SECTION 9

CIRCULATION DESIGN STANDARDS

9.1 INTRODUCTION

9.1.1 The image of the installation is greatly

determined by the design and location of roadways,
walkways, entrances, and parking lots. The primary
roadway system and parking lots utilize considerable
amounts of land and are a visually dominant element
of any installation. The location of primary circulation
elements is presented in Section 7, Site Planning.
This section discusses the details of circulation design
and impacts.

9.1.2 The circulation system provides a primary

vantage point from which all installations are viewed
(Fig. 9.1). Safe and efficient vehicular movement
results in better orientation and contributes to the
development of a positive environment for installation
personnel and visitors. The circulation component is
used to assess the circulation elements of the
installation and identify specific characteristics that
Fig. 9.1 - Lee Avenue provides a
provide visual zone and theme identity. positive impression for visitors
entering Fort Lee.
9.1.3 Roadways, pedestrian walkways, and bicycle
trails will be designed to provide a hierarchy of
circulation design and carrying capacity. Functionally,
a hierarchical network can be created that separates
incompatible types of traffic. This separation of traffic
promotes sustainability because it results in more
efficient energy consumption.

9.1.4 Visually, the circulation hierarchy can be

reinforced through design, planting, signage, and
lighting to promote a more attractive visual experience
and promote a sense of orientation.

Page 9-1
9.2 CIRCULATION OBJECTIVES

The goal for the circulation system on the installation

is to establish a sustainable system that promotes
aesthetic appeal, environmental preservation, and
energy conservation while providing safe and efficient
circulation. The objectives below should be followed
to achieve a sustainable circulation system:

x Provide circulation that meets antiterrorism

and security requirements and promotes
and enhances public health and safety
(Fig. 9.2). Fig. 9.2 - It is desirable to separate
vehicular and pedestrian systems.
x Provide a system of circulation that includes
all forms of vehicular and pedestrian
circulation.

x Provide a system that includes hierarchies

of vehicular and pedestrian flow (Fig. 9.3).

x Adapt the circulation system to the natural

conditions of the site (Fig. 9.4).

x Improve the existing circulation network for

expansion, safety, way finding and
appearance. Fig. 9.3 - It is also desirable to
separate pedestrian and bicycle
circulation systems.
x Promote maintenance and repair of existing
and proposed circulation systems.

9.3 ROADWAY HIERARCHY

9.3.1 The roadway network of the installation should

functionally and visually reflect a logical hierarchy of
traffic circulation. The network should separate types
of traffic by function and volume, ranging from
through traffic to local traffic. The visual character of
each segment of the network should appropriately
convey its role and function within the overall
network. The basic network is classified as follows in Fig. 9.4 - Adapt circulation to
terms of the type, character, and appearance of the topography.
road (Fig. 9.5).

9.3.2 Fort Lee's network of roadways establishes a

strong spatial organization, and to a large extent,
determines how one sees the installation. The most

Page 9-2
important road is Adams Avenue, which links together
the entire main cantonment area, forming the
vehicular spine of the crescent and extending from First
Street to the Adams Avenue gate. Lee Avenue and
Sisisky Boulevard are important as primary gateways
to the post. Sisisky Boulevard is also important as an
extension of the gateway and link between the two
ends of the Adams Avenue crescent.

9.3.3 The present lack of a clear hierarchy in

roadway design is a major liability for Fort Lee's street
system. The scale of certain streets does not reflect
the road's relative importance. Redundant and parallel
through routes such as Shop Road, Byrd and Carver
Avenues, allow traffic to “filter” through areas rather
than flow along a central corridor. While this pattern
may disperse traffic volumes, it weakens the sense of
orderliness and arbitrarily causes higher traffic flows
along local access streets.

9.3.4 The image of Adams Avenue as the primary

vehicular spine should be reinforced through roadway
improvements, lighting, signage and uniform planting.
The roadway should appear as a consistent element
linking together the various areas of the post. The
hierarchy of primary, secondary and tertiary road
types should be reinforced through the uniform
treatment of landscaping, roadway cross-section,
building setbacks, lighting, and orientation. Gateway
intersections should appear as important nodes with
generous building setbacks and large scale
monuments, where appropriate. Redundant parallel
streets should be minimized and eliminated where
possible to allow larger contiguous spaces for
development and simplified traffic patterns.

9.3.4.1 Highways. Highways provide primary high-

speed traffic access to, around, or through a military
installation. The design includes:

9.3.4.1.1 Continuous, relatively straight or large radii

curvilinear alignments that carry high-speed through-
traffic movement between major activity centers within
a region.

9.3.4.1.2 A minimum of two lanes on each direction

typically divided by a median or median divider.

Page 9-3
9.3.4.1.3 Alignments that border lane use areas
rather than bisect them, and green space buffers
between the road and adjacent uses.

9.3.4.1.4 Controlled access onto the road.

9.3.4.1.5 Either grade-separated or at grade

channelized intersections with traffic signal controls.

9.3.4.1.6 Shoulders for emergency stopping but strict

prohibition of on-street parking.

9.3.4.1.7 Street signing, lighting, and planting that

Fig. 9.6 - Lee Avenue is a main
reflects the high-speed nature of traffic movement.
entry gate from VA Route 36.
9.3.4.1.8 Main Gate Roadways. The roadway cross
section at major gateway entries should project
an image of prominence and orderliness
(Fig.9.6). A planted median and large street trees
at the roadway edge should form these important,
formal post gateways.

9.3.4.2 Primary Roadways. These are arterial

routes that connect major activity centers, provide the
primary access through the installation, and provide
the means by which most people view the installation.
These roadways often traverse the entire installation
and carry the heaviest volume of traffic that results in
high speed and high visibility corridors. Direct access Fig. 9.7 - A boulevard is divided by
a median.
to this type of road should be restricted to crossing at
major intersections. Primary roadways are designated
as boulevards in urban areas and as avenues in rural
and suburban areas. Design characters include (Fig.
9.7)

9.3.4.2.1 Continuous, through-traffic alignments that

are relatively straight or large-radii curvilinear to
handle moderate to heavy traffic.

9.3.4.2.2 Alignments that form the boundary between

different land uses are preferable to alignments that
transect a land use zone.

9.3.4.2.3 Two or more moving lanes in each direction

typically divided by a median (Fig 9.8):

Page 9-5
Fig. 9.8 - A cross-section Lee Avenue.

9.3.4.2.4 Controlled access and a minimum of curb

cuts limited to entranceways to major facilities or
building groups.

9.3.4.2.5 At-grade intersections with signal controls.

9.3.4.2.6 On-street parking prohibited.

9.3.4.2.7 Medians, street lighting, signing, and

planting that enforces the moderate- to-high speed
nature and importance of the road.
Fig. 9.9 - Adams Avenue is a
9.3.4.2.8 Curbs, gutters, and sidewalks provided in primary roadway throughout the
all cantonment area and other residential areas with installation.
densities greater than two dwelling units per acres.

9.3.4.2.9 Adams Avenue. Adams Avenue

represents the most important roadway providing
primary access to activities on Post and defining the
crescent-shaped Living/ Training Zone. The visual
appearance of the roadway should emphasize its
importance in the post's roadway hierarchy.
Landscaping, lighting and signage should all be
designed to contribute to this visual impression (Figs.
9.9 and 10).

Page 9-6
Fig. 9.10 - A cross-section of Adams Avenue.

9.3.4.2.10 Sisisky Boulevard. Sisisky Boulevard

connects to the new gate at VA Route 36 and
provides a loop connection to Adams Avenue at the
north and south. The roadway provides a pleasant
drive through the forest as well as providing access to
residential areas and field training facilities.
Landscaping, lighting and signage should all be
designed to reinforce the forest-like setting.

Fig. 9.11 - A cross-section of Sisisky Boulevard.

Page 9-7
9.3.4.3 Secondary Roadways. Secondary roadways
serve as connectors between primary roads and
tertiary roads and typically connect primary roads to
adjacent land use zones. Secondary roads
accommodate moderate to slow traffic speeds with
one moving lane in each direction. On-street parking
should be prohibited and left-turn lanes provided at
intersections with primary roads. Design
characteristics include (Figs. 9.12 and 13): Fig. 9.12 - Byrd Avenue is a secondary
roadway that is also used for troop
9.3.4.3.1 Continuous through-traffic alignment movement.
between primary roads, either straight or curvilinear
based upon the design speed topography and land
pattern.

9.3.4.3.2 Direct access to abutting property.

9.3.4.3.3 A maximum of two moving traffic lanes in

each direction, either undivided or a boulevard with
planted median.
Fig. 9.13 - Carver Avenue is an
9.3.4.3.4 On-street parking generally prohibited. important secondary roadway.

9.3.4.3.5 Sidewalk separated from the road by a

planting strip.

9.3.4.3.6 Street lighting, signing, and planting that

reflect the moderate-to-slow speed nature of traffic
and the character of the land use area they are in.

9.3.4.3.7 Curbs, gutters, and sidewalks provided in

all cantonment and other residential areas with
densities greater than two dwelling units per acres. Fig. 9.14 - An improved, visually
appealing streetscape will enhance
the image of an installation.
9.3.4.3.8 Living-Training Area. This design criterion
applies to roadways in the vicinity of troop
barracks and other nearby areas. Setbacks for
new construction are to be applied to all streets
(including tertiary roads). See DC 1.3 for required
setback distances. Lighting, landscaping, and
signage should all contribute to an improved
visual impression (see appropriate Design
Criteria) (Figs. 9.14-15):

9.3.4.3.9 All deep drainage ditches should be Fig. 9.15 - Schematic secondary
retrofitted to incorporate LEED design roadway cross-section for Living-
Training Zone.
techniques, where feasible.

Page 9-8
9.3.4.3.10 Shop Road. These design criteria
applies to all secondary roads throughout the
post (unless specifically targeted by another
street design criteria). Design and location of
utilities, street trees, sidewalks and signage form the
image of the post along the secondary roadways (Fig
9.16).

9.3.4.4 Tertiary Roadways. Tertiary roadways

provide access to individual facilities, parking and Fig. 9.16 - Schematic roadway
cross-section for Shop Road.
service areas. They are designed to handle low
speed, low volumes of traffic, with one lane in each
direction (Figs. 9.17-18). Tertiary roadways make
use of “T” intersections and cul-de-sacs to reduce
through traffic, promote safety, and limit noise impacts
from truck traffic. Design characteristics include:

9.3.4.4.1 Alignments designed to discourage

through-traffic.

9.3.4.4.2 Alignments are relatively short straight or

curvilinear keeping with topography, land use, and Fig. 9.17 - Rear Access Road is
slow speed nature of traffic. tertiary roadway.

9.3.4.4.3 Generally a maximum of two moving traffic

lanes, one in each direction.

9.3.4.4.4 On-street parking allowable on an

infrequent overflow basis by the addition of a parallel
parking lane or bay.

9.3.4.4.5 Curbs, gutters, and sidewalks provided in Fig. 9.18 - Schematic tertiary
roadway cross-section.
all cantonment area and other residential areas with
densities greater than two dwelling units per acres.

9.3.4.4.6 Sidewalks maybe limited to only side,

depending upon need and incorporate the use of brick
pavers.

9.3.4.4.7 Street lighting, signing, and planting in

character with slow speed nature of traffic and the
land use area within which the road is located.

9.3.4.4.8 Fort Lee Tertiary Roads. The design of the

roadways, lighting, pedestrian system (walking and
troop movement pathways), signage and landscaping
all contribute to a positive visual impression. Even

Page 9-9
roads classified as tertiary in the roadway hierarchy
should be carefully considered.

9.3.4.5 Residential Streets. These design criteria

applies to all residential streets in family housing
neighborhoods throughout the post (Figs. 9.19-20).

9.3.4.5.1 Cul-de-sacs. Cul-de-sacs are short

dead-end tertiary streets located primarily in
Fig. 9.19 - Hazel Grove Court is a new
residential areas. They connect at one end to a residential street in the Harrison Villa
tertiary or secondary street and have a turnaround at neighborhood.
the other end, providing direct access to an abutting
property while preventing through traffic. Design
characters include (Fig. 9.21):

9.3.4.5.2 Short, straight, or curvilinear alignment to

serve abutting property.

9.3.4.5.3 Generally a maximum of two traffic lanes,

one in each direction.

9.3.4.5.4 Generally a maximum length of 600 feet, or

less, except in areas where terrain and low density Fig. 9.20 - Schematic residential
justify a longer length. street cross-section.

9.3.4.5.5 Turnarounds must include a diameter to

accommodate fire and garbage trucks.

9.3.4.5.6 Turnarounds can be either symmetrical or

offset.

9.3.4.5.7 Turnarounds should have center planting

islands to reduce the expanse of paved area (Fig. Fig. 9.21 - Residential street plan view
9.22). showing utility easements along rear of
lots.
9.3.4.5.8 Overflow parking can be provided on street
in parking bays or within center of turnarounds.

9.3.4.5.9 Sidewalks, if any, are generally limited to

one side of the road.

9.3.4.5.10 Street lighting, signing, and planting are in

character with the slow speed nature of traffic and the
land use area being served.

9.3.4.6 Tactical Vehicle Trails. Tactical vehicle trails

provide alternative access for armored vehicles and Fig. 9.22 - Cul-de-sac turnarounds
other vehicles utilized in combat readiness training. should incorporate plantings.

Page 9-10
They are recommended for installations with high use
of armored vehicles to enhance the movement of the
vehicles and reduce traffic congestion on the other
installation roadways. These trails provide one lane
access for vehicles between motor pools and
maneuver areas (Fig. 9.23). It is recommended that
these trails be hard surfaced within developed areas
with concrete of a thickness to withstand the weight of Fig. 9.23 - Tactical vehicle section.
armored vehicles. The hard service will reduce dust
pollution. These trails should be designed to provide
as direct access as possible while minimizing
crossings with primary, secondary, or tertiary roads.
All crossings with the other roadway systems should
be paved with concrete to support the weight of the
vehicles and clearly marked with signage.

9.4 ROADWAY SETBACKS

9.4.1 Department of Defense Antiterrorism standards

state that all inhabited buildings within a controlled
perimeter will be setback a minimum of 10 meters (33
feet) from roadways, and that troop billeting and
primary gathering spaces shall be setback a minimum
of 25 meters (82 feet) from roadways. Inhabited
buildings not within a controlled perimeter the
minimum setback distance is 25 meters (82 feet) and
for primary gathering places and troop facilities the Fig. 9.24 - Antiterrorism roadway
minimum distance is 45 meters (148 feet). (See, setbacks within a controlled
Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD perimeter.
Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, Table
B-1) (Fig. 9.24).

9.4.2 Minimum Required Building Setbacks.

Any new building or addition is to be located so that
its facade plane is set back from the street centerline
the following minimum distances. In existing built-up
areas the setback requirement is intended to reflect
the prevailing existing setbacks. In general, new
buildings in these areas should be aligned with
adjacent existing permanent structures. Follow this
procedure:
1. Check the minimum setback required.
2. Compare with existing permanent adjacent
buildings on both sides.
3. If there is a significant difference, and if the
existing buildings are to remain, then conform to

Page 9-11
 existing conditions after verifying with the
DOL/DPW.

9.4.2.1 The chart below specifies minimum building

setbacks. Check DC 1.4.1 through 1.4.7 for additional
setback and build-to requirements in particular areas.
When more than one setback is described, the more
restrictive (greater distance) is to apply.

9.4.2.2 Use 50-feet of grassy area from parking lots

along Adams Avenue (Fig. 9.25).

9.4.2.3 Recommended Minimum Building Setbacks

Fig. 9.25 - Landscaping along
VA Route 36 275 ft. roadways has positive visual
impact.
Lee Avenue 200 ft.

Sisisky Boulevard (North of Adams 200 ft.

Avenue)

Sisisky Boulevard 100 ft.

Mahone Avenue 100 ft.

Adams Avenue 100 ft.

Byrd Avenue 75 ft.

Carver Avenue 100 ft.

Shop Road 75 ft.

Quartermaster Road 50 ft.

1st Street 50 ft.

6th Street (South of Adams Avenue) 200 ft.

11th Street 100 ft.

13th Street 75 ft.

16th Street 100 ft.

19th Street 100 ft.

38th Street 100 ft.

Page 9-12
 40th Street 100 ft.`

41st Street 100 ft

All othernumbered streets 75 ft.

Recommended Minimum Building Setbacks

Match existing setbacks measured to face of existing

adjacent buildings.

9.5 ROADWAY SYSTEM DESIGN

9.5.1 The location and design of new circulation

system alignments as well as improvements to the
existing system should be prepared to promote
development sustainability. They should be designed
to minimize impacts, relieve driver monotony, and
provide a positive visual experience for the user,
without compromising safety. The following design
techniques should be applied to circulation system
design.

9.5.2 Blend Circulation With Natural Landform. The

horizontal and vertical alignment of roads, walkways,
and bikeways should minimize landform disturbance
and blend with the natural setting (Fig. 9.26).

9.5.2.1 Minimize cut and fill by avoiding steeping

terrain and aligning roadway, walkway, or bicycle
system to cross slopes diagonally or parallel to the
contours rather than perpendicular to the contours.

9.5.2.2 Mold cut and fill slopes to blend into the Fig. 9.26 - Build circulation routes
natural landform. into the natural landforms.

9.5.2.3 Blend road drainage ditches, swales, or

channels into the natural landform.

9.5.2.4 Use cluster development wherever possible

to limit the lengths and required intersections of
roadway and other circulation system elements and to
preserve land. Consideration should be given to
meeting antiterrorism requirements when developing
cluster type facilities.

Page 9-13
9.5.2.5 Minimize pedestrian, railroad, and bikeway
crossings of highway, primary, and secondary roads.

9.5.2.6 Use natural topographic conditions to create

grade separated pedestrian, railroad, and bikeway
road crossings wherever possible especially on
highways and primary roads.

9.5.3 Adapt Circulation to Preserve Vegetation.

Design roads, walkways, and bike paths to minimize
disturbance to existing vegetation, encourage re-
vegetation in disturbed areas, and reduce the visual
impact of landscape disturbance.

9.5.3.1 Align roads through open areas rather than

forested areas.

9.5.3.2 Minimize cut and fill to reduce the limits of

clearing.

9.5.3.3 Clear only for sight distances rather that

uniform right-of-way clearing.

9.5.3.4 Utilize tree wells or retaining walls to

preserve specimen trees or significant vegetation
areas.

9.5.3.5 Provide optimum conditions for re-vegetation

by following proper planting and maintenance
techniques.

9.5.3.6 Restore vegetation to disturbed areas using

naturalistic plantings of native plant material.

9.5.4 Minimize Adverse Impacts on Adjacent Land

Uses.

9.5.4.1 Air Pollution. Locate roadway alignments to

minimize the impact of traffic-emitted pollutants on
adjacent development. This can be accomplished by
the following:

9.5.4.1.1 Locate roads adjacent to land uses that are

minimally affected by traffic-emitted air pollutants. Fig. 9.27 - Vegetation and berms
buffer air and noise pollution.
9.5.4.1.2 Reduce the impact of traffic-emitted
pollutants on more sensitive land use areas by
locating the roadways downwind and/or providing

Page 9-14
planted buffers. Tactical vehicle trails should be hard
surfaced to reduce dust pollution.

9.5.4.2 Noise Pollution. Design and locate roadways

to reduce the impact of traffic noise on adjacent
development.

9.5.4.2.1 Roads should be physically separated from

sensitive land uses including residential, medical,
education, recreation, administration, religious, library,
community, or child care facilities.

9.5.4.2.2 Utilizing noise abatement techniques such

as berms, sound barrier walls, and plant material to
reduce noise levels (Fig.9.27).

9.5.4.2.3 Reroute truck and tank traffic to roadways

adjacent to less noise sensitive land uses. Tracked
vehicle traffic should, ideally, be routed to a system of
tank trails that are totally separate form corridors used
by wheeled traffic vehicles.

9.6 INTERSECTIONS

9.6.1 Intersections are the most dangerous areas of

the installation circulation system. They should be
planned or improved to provide safe and efficient
traffic flow for both pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
The following design techniques should be used to
plan or improve intersections.

9.6.1.1 All roadways should intersect at right angles

(90 degrees), although 85-95 degrees is acceptable.

9.6.1.2 Avoid dangerous, complex intersections of

more than two streets intersecting at one point or
offset intersections (Fig.9.28).

9.6.1.3 Eliminate intersections that are in close

proximity to one another. They should be no closer
than a minimum distance of 30 meters (100 feet).
SIGHT
9.6.1.4 Use T-intersections for tertiary road
intersections with secondary or primary roads to Fig. 9.28 -Intersection design
reduce conflict and promote safety. criteria.

Page 9-15
9.6.1.5 Provide turning lanes at all intersections
along primary roads to eliminate interference with
through traffic flow.

9.6.1.6 Minimize intersections along primary roads to

reduce points of conflict and increase safety. Existing
intersections with secondary and tertiary streets can
be eliminated by the use of cul-de-sacs with traffic
routed along parallel streets to primary and secondary
streets.

9.6.1.7 Include adequate sight distances to meet

minimum standard requirements at all intersections.
The location from where the driver is waiting to cross
or enter a traffic lane to a point 23 meters (75 feet)
down the centerline to the right and the left forms the
sight triangle.

9.6.1.8 Minimize pedestrian and bicycle intersections

with primary streets.

9.6.1.9 Provide crosswalks at all intersections where

necessary, marked with paint or vinyl strips or
identified with a different paving surface.

9.6.1.10 Provide pedestrian access to persons with

disabilities in accordance with the Americans with
Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and
the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS).
In the event of a conflict the most stringent standards
will be applied (Fig. 9.29).

9.6.1.11 Create local service drives or access roads

to parallel highways and primary roads to provide
access to properties fronting the primary road
avoiding a direct curb cut form the primary road to
Fig. 9.29 - Accessible parking
each individual property. spaces sized differently than
standard spaces.
9.6.1.12 Intersections between railroad track and
high-speed roads must be signaled, well marked and
have a smooth transition. All other road crossings
must be well marked and have clear line of sight
down the tracks.

9.7 ENTRANCE GATES

The location and design of the installation entrance

gates is a primary component of the installation

Page 9-16
circulation system. Entrance gates must be designed
to be functional, while providing security protection
not only for the installation itself, but also for
personnel and others waiting to be admitted to the
installation. Gates should also be designed as a visual
amenity to provide an aesthetically pleasing entrance
to and exit from the installation. See Section 12,
Force Protection, paragraph 12.7 for information on
the design standards for installation gates.

9.8 PARKING REQUIREMENTS

9.8.1 The total quantity of parking in any one location

will vary with the needs of the facility. The following
are general considerations considering parking Fig. 9.30 - Required minimum
requirements. number of accessible parking
spaces.
9.8.1.1 All parking lots will be accessible to persons
with disabilities in accordance with the requirements
of the UFAS, paragraph 4.1.1(5)(a). If parking spaces
are provided for employees or visitors, or both, then
accessible spaces shall be provided in conformance
with the required minimum number of accessible
spaces (Fig. 9.30).

9.8.1.2 For initial planning and programming, allocate

400 square feet of parking lot area per car. The total
provides adequate minimum space for the parking
spaces, access drives, and planting islands that make
up a parking lot. This allocation is not withstanding
tactical military vehicles.

9.8.1.3 Minimize parking space requirements of a

facility by selecting a site that will allow the sharing of
parking with related activities.

9.8.1.4 Small parking lots are usually preferable to

large lots because they enhance the visual
environment by increasing the percent of landscaped Fig. 9.31 - Provide islands with
area to paved area and allow more conformances to trees to soften visual expanse.
natural topography.

9.8.1.5 The monotony of large parking areas can be

altered by the use of designs such as curvilinear
parking or the introduction of large planting islands.

Page 9-17
9.8.1.6 Promote means of access other than
vehicular by providing alternative means of access
such as walkways and bikeways.

9.9 PARKING LOT LOCATION AND DESIGN

9.9.1 Parking areas can be designed and enhanced

to provide a more pleasing impact and a more
comfortable physical experience for the user. The
following design techniques should be used to create
more aesthetically pleasing, physically comfortable
parking lots (Fig. 9.31).

9.9.1.1 Locate parking lots between and behind

buildings to reduce the visual impact from the
circulation system. The parking lot is often the arrival
point for the visitor. Although a major building front
entry may be oriented to the roadway, frequently it is
the rear or side entrance that is used because it may
be more convenient to the parking (Fig. 9.32).
Fig. 9.32 - Conceptual Parking Plan.
9.9.1.1.1 The proper siting and design of parking lots
and the design of pedestrian spaces that lead from
parking to the destination building are important to the
overall impression of the installation, the following
recommendations provide guidance for the siting and
design of parking lots and related pedestrian
amenities.

9.9.1.1.2 Parking is best located at the rear of

buildings and facilities for effective screening of
parking areas. Force protection guidelines require at
least 25 meters between the parking lot and an
unhardened building wall for most occupied buildings.
This standoff distance allows a generous area for
landscaping and other features around the building.

9.9.1.1.3 Parking in front of a building occurs at

existing buildings requiring a high level of access and
visibility with a high turnover in parking, such as at
community support facilities. Existing parking in front
of buildings should be maintained and improved;
however, future parking in front of buildings should be
discouraged in general. Locate new parking to the
sides and rear of buildings instead (Fig. 9.33).
Fig. 9.33- At CASCOM Headquarters,
parking is separated from the main
building entrance.

Page 9-18
9.9.1.1.4 Parking to the side of a building is
recommended where several buildings share common
parking field. Special consideration must be made for
pedestrian pathways which direct visitors to the front
entrance of the destination buildings.

9.9.1.2 Locate parking lots on relatively level areas to

avoid excessive cut and fill.

9.9.1.3 Design parking lots to be efficient in the

design and placement of access drives and parking Berm/Planting
spaces. All drives providing direct access to parking
spaces should provide spaces on both sides of the
drive.

9.9.1.4 Provide planting areas at the ends of all rows Planting/Fence

of parking spaces. Provide islands with trees within
the main parking lot to soften the visual expanse of Fig. 9.34. - Trees, berms, fences
the parking lot, and provide shade and/or wind and walls are used to screen
parking.
breaks.

9.9.1.5 Use natural topography and existing trees to

visually screen parking areas from adjacent facilities
and other parking bays (Fig.9.34).

9.9.1.6 Design parking lots to preserve significant

existing trees. Provide a planting area around the
tree that is large enough to allow water to the root
system.

9.9.1.7 On street parking along primary and some

secondary streets should be avoided because it
reduces the vehicular carrying capacity of the street,
is visually unattractive, and is unsafe.

9.9.1.8 Parking lots should be paved with concrete, Fig. 9.35 - Required individual
parking stall dimensions.
asphalt, or other paving material.

9.9.1.9 Parking structures, both below grade and

above grade, provide for greater parking capacity in
densely developed areas where available land is
scarce. Parking structures are expensive, but they
provide a number of benefits including efficient land
use, reduced visual impact and protection of vehicles
from inclement weather. If parking structures are built
they shall be designed to meet antiterrorism
requirements.

Page 9-19
9.9.2 Parking Area Design Guide. A
comprehensive parking area design guide which
includes siting, parking area types, geometry (parallel,
perpendicular, angled), access, and maintenance
consideration is located at the following website: U. S.
Air Force Landscape Design Guide, Section 14,
Parking Areas.

9.9.2.1 Standard Dimensions. Individual stall size

is to be 9'0" x 18'0". Parking lots with larger stall sizes Fig. 9.36 - Parking bays should be
60 feet wide and include two rows
should be restriped where their efficiency can be of parking.
increased by doing so. The total width of each parking
bay is to be 60 feet (Fig.9.35 and 36). Larger
dimensions are permitted in less densely developed
areas of the installation, or in motor pool areas where
trucks and service vehicles must be stored. However,
the space efficiency of these too must be minimized
insofar as possible. Parking lots must be held a
minimum of 15-Feet away from roadways wherever
feasible.
Fig. 9.37 - Improvement criteria for
9.9.2.2 Small Lots. Often public perpendicular small parking lots.
parking is located directly on streets. This is a
dangerous and less than desirable condition.
Wherever possible, parking should be separated from
the street by a planting strip. Access points (curb
cuts) should be kept to a minimum to facilitate through
traffic movement (Fig.9.37).

9.9.2.3 Integrating a Pedestrian Pathway. Frequently

important destinations must be accessed by
Fig. 9.38 - Planted islands
pedestrians through large parking fields. In these incorporating a pedestrian walkway.
cases, a special pedestrian pathway is to be provided
through the parking to the building entrance (Fig.
9.38).

9.9.2.4 Parking Planted Islands. Provisions for

landscaping must be made within larger parking lots.
Planted islands are to be provided by omitting two
parking stalls in adjacent bays. Canopy trees are
recommended for planting to provide shade. No more
than 15 to 20 spaces are recommended between Fig. 9.39 - Planting bay at the
plant islands. Use planted islands to define a parking lot perimeter.
pedestrian walkway leading to major building entries.
At the perimeter of parking lots, omit single spaces to
provide planting or to preserve existing trees (Fig.
9.39).

Page 9-20
9.9.3 Antiterrorism Setback Requirements.

Parking lots within a controlled perimeter shall be

located a minimum of 10 meters (33 feet) from
inhabited structures, and 25 meters (82 feet) from
troop billeting and primary gathering structures.
Parking lots without a controlled perimeter shall be
located a minimum of 25 meters (82 feet) form
inhabited structures, and 45 meters (148 feet) from
troop billeting and primary gathering areas (UFC 4-
010-01, Table B-1). Designated parking for family
housing located within secured perimeters with
access control is excluded from the 25-meter (82 feet)
setback requirement.

9.10 SERVICE AREAS

Facilities that require pickup and deliveries should

have a service area that allows for easy access to a
loading dock exclusively for service vehicles. These
areas should be designed to provide direct, easy
access for vehicles and not conflict with railroad
operations. They should be screened from public view
to reduce negative visual impacts. Service areas shall
meet all antiterrorism requirements (Fig.9.40).

9.11 DROP-OFF AREAS Fig. 9.40 - Loading area design

criteria.
Facilities that include a high percentage of persons
arriving by vehicle should include a vehicle drop-off
area for users. Included are buildings such as
headquarters, child development centers, schools,
dining facilities, and clubs. Antiterrorism standards
state that the access drive must be clearly defined
and marked and that their intended use is clear to
prevent parking of vehicles in those areas and that
drop-off lanes will not be located under any inhabited
portion of a building (UCF 4-010-01, paragraph B-1.4)
It is recommended that physical barriers be used to
define the area. The driveway shall be configured so
that vehicles can be restricted during times of high
alert. Access to the driveway shall be located outside
the standoff area with the initial approach parallel to
the building, or a barrier must be directed to prevent Fig. 9.41 - Dimensions for a
direct vehicular movement toward the building (Fig. passenger drop-off area.
9.41).

Page 9-21
9.12 WALKWAY AND PEDESTRIAN CIRCULATION
9.12.1 Walkways provide connections for
pedestrians between buildings and ancillary facilities
such as parking lots and other areas. Well designed
and located pedestrian walkways also provide a
desirable alternative to total dependence on motor
driven vehicles.

9.12.2 The goal is to encourage the use of walkways

as an alternative means of circulation. Pedestrian
walkways should be designed and located to provide Fig. 9.42 - Walkways need to be
enjoyable experience for the user.
a comfortable, enjoyable experience for the user (Fig.
9.42). The use of walkways within the installation
promotes development sustainability by conserving
energy, reducing air pollution, and decreasing the
land requirement for parking. These walkways as well
provide a means to increase physical fitness.

9.12.3 In order to achieve this goal the following

objectives must be met:

x Provide walkways that are designed at a

pedestrian scale to be comfortable and Fig. 9.43 - To promote means of access
pleasant (Fig.9.43). other than vehicular, provide walkways
and bikeways.
x Provide safe and secure pedestrian
facilities that are separate from vehicular
and railroad traffic. Use traffic calming
features such as “traffic humps” or
“bumpouts”.

x Provide reinforcement for sidewalks wide

enough (8’-6”) to support a vehicle.

x Provide amenities for pedestrians.

x Provide accessibility to all users, including

physically impaired or challenged persons.
All street and driveway crossings shall be Fig. 9.44 - Ramps must be
ramped, marked, and accessible to persons provided per UFAS standards.
with disabilities in accordance with
requirements of the UFAS (Fig.9.44). See
the following UFAS paragraphs for the
respective standards: Curb Ramps,
paragraph 4.7; Ramps, paragraph 4.8;
Stairs, paragraph 4.9.

Page 9-22
 x Provide links to major attractions and
generators of pedestrian traffic.

x Provide design consistency throughout the

walkway and be well drained.

9.12.4 Walkway Network Hierarchy. Sidewalks are

classified to conform to the hierarchy roadway
system: primary walkways, secondary walkways, and
tertiary walkways. Non roadway oriented sidewalks
should be sized and placed where people will use
them rather than creating worn “shortcut” paths.
Railroad track crossing should be avoided, but where
necessary, they should be well marked and have
good line of sight. Walkways through railroad track
ballast should be maintained with small, well-drained
rock.

9.12.4.1 Primary Walkways.

9.12.4.1.1 Primary walkways should be placed along

both sides of primary roadways, wherever possible,
within the cantonment areas. These walkways are
also used for high volume pedestrian routes to
facilities and should be designed along axis lines
relating to adjacent building entries, plazas, or streets.
They should be paved with concrete, brick, or other
pavers (Fig.9.45).

9.12.4.1.2 Primary walkways should be sized to

accommodate anticipated pedestrian use. They
should have a minimum width of 1.8 meters (6 feet), Fig. 9.45 - Primary Walkway.
and a maximum width should be 3-3.5 meters (10-12
feet) in high use areas.

9.12.4.2 Secondary Walkways.

9.12.4.2.1 Secondary walkways should be provided

along one or both sides of secondary and tertiary
streets. They are designed to carry moderate volumes
of pedestrians between activity centers and housing
areas (Fig.9.46). They should provide access to
building entrances, plaza areas, or streets. They
should be paved with concrete, brick, or other pavers.
Fig. 9.46 - Secondary Walkway.
9.12.4.2.2 These walkways should be sized to
accommodate anticipated pedestrian use, but not less

Page 9-23
than 1.2 meters (4 feet), and a maximum of 3-3.5
meters (10 - 12 feet) in high use areas.

9.12.4.3 Tertiary Walkways.

9.12.4.3.1 Tertiary walkways provide pedestrian

walkways in recreational and scenic areas for casual
walking and hiking (Fig.9.47). They can be paved
with concrete or bituminous asphalt or constructed
with woodchips. The layout of the walkway should
have a meandering and curvilinear alignment. Paved Fig. 9.47 - Tertiary walkway cross-
walkways should have a minimum width of 1.2 meters section.
(4 feet). Wood chip trails should have a minimum
width of 1 meter (3 feet). Where paths are designated
for use by bicyclists and pedestrians, these widths
should be increased an additional three feet for each
bike lane.

9.12.5 Troop Running Trails.

Troop running trails should be provided for soldiers

both in and out of formation. The width should 4.5-5
meters (approximately 15 feet) to provide the width
necessary for four soldiers abreast with a cadence
caller. Primary, secondary, and tertiary walkways can
be designed to provide this function.

9.12.6 Troop Movement Paths.

In locations where troops need to move four (4)

abreast; for example, troops marching in formation
between classrooms, barracks/dinning hall facilities, a
hard surface walkway of adequate width should be
provided.

9.12.6.1 General Notes. A major opportunity exists at

Fort Lee to create a significant, dedicated pedestrian
movement system (Fig 9.48). At present massed
groups of soldiers (platoons) are marched about the
post between living quarters and training facilities.
They presently utilize the street system and this
creates significant conflicts with vehicular traffic.
Three alternative movement systems to the auto are
recommended: Fig. 9.48 - Map of possible troop
and bikeway systems.

Page 9-24
 Troop Movement Spine - A major troop
movement corridor should be developed as
illustrated along Byrd Avenue (Fig 9.49).

Troop Movement Pathway - A smaller troop

movement pathway should be developed
connecting troop training areas along Saratoga
Drive, in the Shop Road area and across Route 36
to the north.

Bikeway - A bikeway system should be developed

to connect family housing neighborhoods to
training and administrative area. A loop system
incorporating Adams Avenue, Lee Avenue and
Saratoga Drive is recommended. The bikeway
indicated on map at right illustrates major system
only. Other secondary bikeway systems should be
Fig. 9.49 - Troop movement spine
developed as need dictates. schematic cross-section.

9.12.6.2 Byrd Avenue. Portions of Byrd Avenue

would be converted to a troop movement spine. This
entails removing vehicular traffic from that street and
rebuilding it for the exclusive pedestrian use of troops.
Cross streets are to be minimized. Where they occur,
special crossing treatment is to be used. The street is
to be regraded (sloped 1 percent to drain to sides)
and paving is to be bituminous material with concrete
banding. Lighting is to be upgraded. Overhead utility
wires are to be placed under ground. Deep drainage
ditches are to be replaced with underground piped
stormwater system.

9.12.6.3 The Troop Movement Spine along Byrd

Avenue would represent the primary pedestrian
movement system within the Living-Training visual
zone. Special paving materials and street furnishings
are noted below in this section and in Section 11, Site
Elements.

9.12.6.4 The treatment of the spine should create

a pedestrian environment that forms the central axis
of troop activities and movement along Byrd Avenue.
The space should be large enough to permit platoons
to pass in two directions, but not too wide to create a Fig. 9.50 - Schematic plan of troop
movement spine at a cross street.
lifeless space. Large canopy trees and landscaping at
the Spine edge and against buildings should frame
the pedestrian space.

Page 9-25
9.12.6.5 A Troop Movement Pathway system
should be established to link troop housing, activity
and training areas (i.e. along Shop Road). A 12-foot
wide bituminous pathway with special treatment at
intersections should be developed. A removable steel
pipe bollard should be located at the intersections,
centered in the pathway, to obstruct vehicles using
the pathway (Fig. 9.50).

9.12.6.6 The Troop Movement Pathway

represents a less intensively developed pedestrian
system than the Troop Movement Spine. A Troop Fig. 9.51 - Troop movement
Movement Pathway System should be established to pathway schematic cross-section.
link troop housing, activity and training areas (i.e.,
along Sisisky Boulevard). A 12-foot wide bituminous
pathway should be developed adjacent to roadway
(minimum 18-feet from edge of road) and at edge of
forested area (Fig.9.51). Special treatment should be
utilized where pathway intersects roadways The
Troop Movement Pathway represents a less
intensively developed pedestrian system than the
Troop Movement Spine.

9.12.6.7 The use of bicycles as alternatives to

the automobile has become more acceptable to
installation personnel This trend is encouraged as a
method of reducing the automobile vehicle trips within
the installation and reduce the need for greater
carrying capacity. Also, cycling is a popular recreation
activity that is enhanced by the availability of a safe
and well planned system of bike trails.

9.12.6.8 A bikeway system should provide direct

routes between primary traffic and destination within
the installation. This network should be continuous
and minimize conflicts between bikes, pedestrians,
and vehicles. Bikeways should be planned and
designed according to the classifications that define
the level of separation they maintain from roadways
and walkways. The ideal solution for developing Fig. 9-52 - Schematic cross-section
of a Class I Bikeway separated from
bikeways is to separate them physically from both roadways.
roadways and walkways. Fort Lee preferred
standard is for bike pathways to be separated
from adjacent roads with a landscaped median.

9.12.6.9 The bikeway paving materials are to be

bituminous with a brown/red colored aggregate to

Page 9-26
differentiate it from troop movement and roadway
bituminous pavements. Possible locations for the
bikeway would include roadway rights-of-way,
abandoned railroads, fire lanes and recreational
areas.

9.12.6.10 Bikeways are design according to the

following classifications:

9.12.6.10.1 Class I Bikeway. A Class I Bikeway is

intended for the exclusive use of bicycles (Fig. 9.52).
While it may parallel a roadway, it is physically
separated by distance or a vertical barrier. Class I
Bikeway considerations include:

x A Class I Bikeway provides the safest and

most efficient means of bicycle travel and is
the preferred option for bikeway
development.

x Crossing of a Class I Bikeway by

pedestrians, train, or automobile should be
minimized.

x If a Class I Bikeway does not closely

parallel a roadway, it should be designed to
provide appropriate bikeway gradient and
curvature.

x Class I Bikeways require the greatest

amount of space and advance planning to
reserve land and assure appropriate
routing.

9.12.6.10.2 Class II Bikeways. A Class II Bikeway

shares the right-of-way with a roadway or walkway
(Fig. 9.53). It is indicated by a bikeway pictograph on
the pavement and a continuous strip on the pavement
or separated by a continuous or intermittent curb or
other low barrier. Class II Bikeway considerations
include:
Fig. 9.53 - Class II Bikeway
x Because some separation is provided for schematic cross-section.
bicycle travel, a Class II Bikeway provides
some level of safety for the bicyclist and
pedestrian.

Page 9-27
 x While crossing by pedestrians or
automobiles are discouraged, they are not
as controllable as they are on a Class I
Bikeway because the Class II Bikeway is
adjacent to the walkway or roadway.

x Because Class II Bikeways are tied to the

adjacent roadway or walkway, route
selection is important to maintain
appropriate bikeway gradient and
curvature.

x Class II Bikeways generally require less Fig. 9.54 - Schematic cross-section

space than Class I Bikeways because they of an on-street, one-way, Class III
bikeway lane.
follow the alignment of and share the right-
of-way with a roadway or walkway.

9.12.6.10.3 Class III Bikeways. A Class III Bikeway

shares the right-of-way with a roadway or walkway.
(Fig.9.54) It is not indicated by a continuous strip on
the pavement or separated by any type of barrier, but
it is identified as a bikeway with signs. Class III
Bikeway considerations include:

x Because no separated is provided, there is

a higher potential for safety conflicts
between automobiles and bicycles and
between bicycles and pedestrians.

x Class III Bikeways provide continuity within

the bikeway network and designate
preferred shared routes to minimize
potential conflicts. To maintain safety for
bicyclist and pedestrians, Class III
Bikeways should be developed, if possible,
only where automobile and pedestrian
traffic is moderate to light.

x Because Class III Bikeways share the

roadway or walkway, route selection is
important to maintain appropriate bikeway
gradients and curvature.

x Class III Bikeways require the least space

because they share the pavement with a
roadway or walkway.

Page 9-28
 x Railroad crossings should be well marked,
with proper operating signals and clear
sighting down the tracks. Road crossing
transitions should be smooth and well
drained.

9.12.6.11 General Guidelines.

9.12.6.11.1 To encourage use of bicycles, racks

should be located adjacent to rear entrances of
destination buildings, out of pedestrian pathways and
in areas of continuous visual observation. Gradients
along the bikeway should be a maximum of 5 percent
for up to 1,000 feet and up to 10 percent for no more
than 60 feet. The curves for the bikeway should
correspond to the design speed and gradient.

9.12.6.11.2 One-Way System - One Side Only. This

alternative should provide a 6'-0" wide bicycle lane
within the street roadway on one side of street. The
bicycle lane should be consistently on same side of
street to avoid frequent crossovers. Diagonally
painted striping should be used to demarcate the
extent of bikeway lane.

9.12.6.11.3 Two-Way System - Both Sides of Street.

This alternative should provide a 6’-0” bicycle lane on
both sides of street.

9.12.6.11.4 Bicycle tires can catch in normal storm

water inlet grates so special grates with the openings
perpendicular to the curb face should be used.

9.12.6.11.5 Wherever possible, provide a

designated right-of-way for bike traffic, separate from
vehicular and pedestrian routes.

9.12.6.11.6 Locate bikeway crossings away from

vehicular intersections with crossings marked on the
street pavement.

9.12.6.11.7 When separate bicycle right-of-ways are

not feasible, designate bikeway lanes with paint on
the right-hand side of roadways.

9.12.6.11.8 Bikeways should never share

undesignated space with roadways except at
crossings.

Page 9-29
9.12.6.12 Bikeway Furnishings. Encourage use of
the bicycle system by making trails visually attractive
and providing pedestrian amenities in appropriate
locations. Provide site furnishings such as benches,
tables, waste receptacles, drinking fountains, and
signage along paths. Location of these amenities
should be in response to travel distance and traffic
volume.

9.12.6.13 Bicycle Storage. Provide bicycle storage

racks in areas that can be visually supervised and in
close proximity to building entrances, high activity
areas, major workplaces, and recreational facilities,
while avoiding conflicts with pedestrian circulation.
Bicycle storage areas should be covered, especially
at barracks, and easily accessible to building
entrances (Fig.9.55).

9.12.6.14 Landscaping. Use a combination of

canopy and ornamental trees along bicycle paths for Fig. 9.55 - Bicycle storage should
shade, route definition, and visual interest. Provide be convenient to the path and
evergreen buffers to screen harsh winds and covered when possible.
undesirable views.

9.12.6.15 Crosswalks. Provide crosswalks at all

intersections of roads and walkways/bikeways. When
laying out the crosswalk, consider the following:

x Extend walk's paving across the road in

heavily used areas. Raised crosswalks
eliminate the need for curb ramps in
sidewalks.

x Provide a clear line of sight for motorist and

pedestrians. Do not plant in sight lines.
Walkways should meet the road at 90
degree angles (Fig. 9.56).
Fig.9.56 - Adequate sight lines
x Adequate light should be provided. give pedestrians an unobstructed
view of crosswalks.
x Provide barrier-free access at all
intersections or used raised crosswalks.

9.12.6.16 Walkway and Bikeway Lighting Design.

Roadway lights and building exterior lights can serve
also as walkway and bikeway lights. Maximum use
will be made of multi-purpose lighting systems.

Page 9-30
Paragraph 10.4 of Technical Manual (TM) 5-811-1,
Electric Power Supply and Distribution directs the
following walkway and bikeway lighting standards.

9.12.6.16.1 Intensities. Values are dependent upon

whether walkways and bikeways are adjacent to
roadways or are isolated from vehicular traffic.

9.12.6.16.2 Adjacent to Roadways. Walkways and

bikeways will be illuminated to not less than one-half
the maintained illumination required for adjacent
roadways. Areas having in grade, such as stairs and
ramps, will require special treatment. Crosswalks in
the middle of the block will be illuminated to 1.5 to 2
times the normal roadway lighting level.

9.12.6.16.3 Remote from Roadways. Walkways and

bikeways remote form roadways will have a minimum
of 5 lux (0.5 foot-candle) average illumination
measured in lo-foot levels. Pedestrian tunnels will
have 40 lux (4.0 foot-candles), stairways will have 6
lux (0.6 foot-candles), and overpasses will have 3 lux
(0.3 foot-candles) illumination.

9.12.6.16.4 Pole design. Where pole mounted lights

illuminate only walkways or bikeways, shorter poles
are most suitable, but luminary height will not be less
than 10 feet. Construction will be such as to minimize
vandalism by use of break-resistant lenses,
tamperproof screws, and sturdy poles.

9.12.6.17 Signs. The federal Manual of Uniform

Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) provides standards
signs and markings for bicycle lanes and related
bicycle facilities. See the MUTCD, Chapter 9 and any
applicable amendments for traffic controls for bicycle
facilities standards.

9.13 ARMY STANDARDS

The cited Army Standards shall be met.

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-72,

Transportation Infrastructure and Dams

Page 9-31
 x Technical Instructions (TI) 804-11, Design
for Non-Organizational or Privately Owned
Vehicle (POV) Site Circulation and Parking

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-811-1/Air Force

AFJMAN 32-1080, Electric Power Supply
and Distribution

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-822-2, General

Provisions and Geometric Design for
Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage
Areas

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-850-2/Air Force

AFJMAN 32-1046, Railroad Design and
Rehabilitation

x Manual For Railway Engineering

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01,

DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for
Buildings

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility

Guidelines (ADAAG)

x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

(UFAS)

x Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices

(MUTCD)

9.14 REFERENCES

The following references are provided for guidance.

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01,

Installation Design, Chap 9

x U.S. Air Force, Landscape Design Guide,

Parking Area

x U.S. Air Force, Landscape Design Guide,

Walkways and Bikeways (Provides a
comprehensive walkways and bikeways
planning guide including sections on paving

Page 9-32
 materials and gradients and curvature
data).

x Chicago's Bike Lane Design Manual

(Provides a comprehensive series of
technical drawings and design
specifications for bike lanes).

Page 9-33
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Section 10
Go to Table of Contents

Page 9-34
 SECTION 10

LANDSCAPE DESIGN STANDARDS

10.1 INTRODUCTION

10.1.1 The Landscape Design Standards includes

the selection, placement, and maintenance of plant
material on the installation. Landscaped and planted
areas provide a simple and cost effective
enhancement to the general appearance of the
installation (Fig. 10.1).

10.1.2 The visual image conveyed by a military

installation is defined not just by architectural
character and site organization, but also by an
attractive, organized landscape design. The presence
of plant material on the installation greatly enhances
the visual character and environmental quality of the
installation.

10.1.3 Plantings add an element of human scale to

open spaces and can be used functionally to screen
undesirable views, buffer winds, reinforce the
hierarchy of the circulation system, or provide a visual
transition between dissimilar land uses. Fig. 10.1 - Landscaping is a cost
effective way to improve the
appearance of the installation.
10.2 LANDSCAPE OBJECTIVES

10.2.1 The overall objective of the use of plant

material within the installation is to improve the
physical and psychological well being of the people
who live and work on the installation. This is achieved
through the following objectives (Fig. 10.2):

10.2.1.1 Preserve and enhance urban trees, forest

lands, and detailed planting features such as shrubs
and groundcovers. Fig. 10.2 - Landscaping produces a
comfortable environment for
10.2.1.2 Improve the overall visual quality of the pedestrians.
installation through the use of native plant material to:

Page 10-1
10.2.1.2.1 Blend to built environment with the natural
environment.

10.2.1.2.2 Provide scale and comfort to pedestrian

environments.

10.2.1.2.3 Reinforce the hierarchy of the circulation

system (Fig. 10.3).

10.2.1.2.4 Screen unsightly views or elements.

10.2.1.2.5 Buffer incompatible land uses.

10.2.1.2.6 Minimize maintenance through the use of

native plant materials that require less maintenance to
survive.

10.2.1.2.7 Enhance Antiterrorism capabilities. Fig. 10.3 - Landscaping reinforces

the circulation hierarchy.
10.3 PRINCIPLES OF LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT
10.3.1 Landscape design is based on the following
principles.

10.3.1.1 Unity. The selection and placement of plant

material can be used to blend, screen, and soften
incompatible architectural or other unattractive visual
impacts. Plant material as a unifying element can be
placed in front of a building or view to frame and
enhance the visual impact.

10.3.1.2 Balance. Plant material can be selected and

placed to provide visual equilibrium or balance
through the use of either a symmetrical or
asymmetrical planting scheme. Symmetrical plantings
are generally more formal while asymmetrical
plantings are informal.

10.3.1.3 Contrast. Plant material can be selected

and placed to provide differences in size and shape
that add interest to the environment. Plants can be
located to provide a backdrop for other plants such as
a hedge behind a bed of annuals or perennials.

10.3.1.4 Rhythm. Repetition of a single plant or a

mass of plants provides visual interest and formality
to the landscape. Rhythm produces emphasis and

Page 10-2
unity and is especially effective in articulating main
circulation routes.

10.3.1.5 Color and Texture. Plants can be selected

and placed to provide visual interest according to their
color and texture. Colors are classified as either warm
(red, orange, yellow) or cool (violet, blue, green).
Texture is classified as either coarse or fine.

10.3.1.6 Simplicity. Landscape plans should be

broad and simple in form to limit excessive
maintenance. Plant material should be grouped in
beds with simple edges that are easy to mow. Small
turf areas should be avoided because of the difficulty
of mowing. The use of annuals should be minimal
because of the high maintenance involved.

10.3.1.7 Ultimate Effect. The landscape plan should

be prepared with consideration for the mature size of
all plants. The spacing of all material should utilize
nursery industrial standards for mature material to
account for spread as well as height. The ultimate
height of the material should also be considered in
relation to windows and other visual concerns.

10.3.1.8 Spatial Articulation. Plants can be selected

and placed to create enclosed spaces or to separate
spaces from one another. They can also be used to
direct people by visually defining and reinforcing
patterns of movement. The degree of enclosure,
separation, or movement is dependent upon the
density, form, and type of plants used.

10.4 SUSTAINABLE LANDSCAPE

DEVELOPMENT

10.4.1 The use of plant material on the installation

promotes the sustainability of the development.
Trees, shrubs, groundcover, and vines provide
aesthetic appeal as well as preservation of fauna and
flora, energy conservation, climate modification,
erosion control, air purification, and noise abatement Fig. 10.4 - Plant material promotes
(Fig. 10.4). sustainability.

Page 10-3
10.5 LANDSCAPE DESIGN GUIDELINES

10.5.1 Proposed plantings must be reviewed to

ensure that site conditions (soil, topography, adjacent
uses, and architecture) and climatic criteria (sun,
shade, and moisture requirements) are considered in
the desired plant design and selection (i.e., form,
texture, color, size). The uses and users of the site
must also be considered. Landscape planting plans
should be approved by qualified personnel to provide
quality assurance, promote Low Impact Development
techniques (LID), and promote design consistency
within each visual zone.
Fig. 10.5 - A schematic plan of a
10.5.2 The following paragraphs present courtyard between buildings.
landscaping guidelines for the various locations of
plant material use.

10.5.2.1 Plazas & Courtyards. In areas of high

visibility and intensive use, the spaces between
buildings should be utilized as formal outdoor rooms.
Planting, paving and seating should be utilized to
create pleasant outdoor spaces for Personnel to
interact and relax (Fig. 10.5).

10.5.2.1.1 In high visibility and high activity areas

formal plaza space should be created to provide
usable outdoor space.

10.5.2.1.2 Planting should be used to define the

edges of the space and break up large areas of
paving. Large canopy trees should be used to provide
shade and low maintenance ornamental plantings
Fig. 10.6 - Sketch of a landscaped
should be used in planter areas. See Plant Matrix for
pedestrian walkway between
recommended plant materials (Figs. 10.6 and 10.7). buildings.

10.5.2.1.3 Screen parking and service areas from

plazas with low screen walls or with low evergreen
hedges.

Page 10-4
Fig. 10.7 - Sketch of a landscaped courtyard.
10.5.2.2 Planting/Entrances to Important
Buildings. To create a formal approach suitable for
an important command building, align the sidewalk to
the axis of the main entry. Do not place signs,
plantings or other fixtures along that axis. Allow the
pedestrian to approach the doorway walking along the
centerline (Fig. 10.8).

Fig. 10.8 - Planting entrance to important buildings.

Page 10-5
Following the recommendations below for planting,
lighting, etc.

The design of landscaping, paving layout and site

furnishings in the vicinity of troop barracks is of critical
importance in support of the intense activity that
routinely takes place there. All landscape and
pavement materials should be of low maintenance
and durable for high intensity use. Site furnishings
should be selected for high use and longevity.
Following are a series of recommended features
which should be provided at each barracks.

10.5.2.3 Troop Barracks Entrance Areas. The

design of the environment immediately surrounding
troop barracks is of critical importance. The intense
concentration of troop activity there must be
adequately served (Fig. 10.9).

10.5.2.4 Troop Barracks Grounds. Careful design

of paving layout, plantings, and site furnishings is of
critical importance in these areas of intense troop
activity. Use permeable pavers where possible. The
specific needs of companies of foot soldiers are the
focus of these design guidelines (Fig. 10.10). They
are to be adapted to specific conditions for both new Fig. 10.9 - Criteria for improving a
and existing barracks areas (Fig.10.11). barracks entrance area.

Fig. 10.10 - Schematic plan showing design criteria for barracks.

Page 10-6
Fig. 10.11 - Intense troop training activity demands special
accommodations in the design of exterior landscaping.

Fig. 10.12 - Schematic plan showing design criteria for multi-use of

parking lot.

10.5.2.5 Troop Mustering in Barracks Parking

Lots. When parking lots located next to barracks are
not fully utilized for parking on a daily basis, they
should be landscaped and paved in such a way to

Page 10-7
create a separate "convertible" area which can be
easily blocked-off for troop use (Fig. 10.12). Peak
demands for parking, such as special ceremonies,
can be accommodated by opening up the separated
aisle for parking. During off--peak periods, the aisle
can be converted for troop use by drawing a chain
across the entrance drive.

Troop Crossings at Major Roadways

Safety is the primary concern at troop crossing points.

These points must be clearly marked to command the
attention of the motorist and to permit troops to easily
and effectively control traffic (Fig. 10.13).

Fig. 10.13 - Schematic landscape plan for the troop movement spine.

The following design features should be used at all

important troop crossing points. All designs and
dimensions must be reviewed by a traffic engineer to
insure safety.

10.5.2.6 Troop Movement Pathway. A Troop

Movement Pathway system should be established to
link troop housing, activity and training areas.

10.5.2.6.1 A 12-foot wide bituminous pathway with

special treatment at intersections should be
developed. Use permeable pavers where possible. A
removable steel pipe bollard should be located at the

Page 10-8
intersections, centered in the pathway, to obstruct
vehicles using the pathway.

10.5.2.6.2 The Troop Movement Spine will become

the major central axis for the Living Training Zone,
tying together all activities in this area. Its design
should reinforce its primary use. Paving, landscaping,
lighting, and street furnishings should follow the
appropriate Design Criteria.

10.5.3 Parade Grounds & Review Stands.

Parade grounds are to be landscaped as formal
ceremonial spaces, set off from other open space by
a frame of canopy trees (Fig. 10.14). Adjacent
buildings and athletic fields appear as distracting and
inappropriate backdrops for the large scale formal
drills on the parade ground. Set these other facilities
and parking areas apart from the parade ground with
deciduous and evergreen trees. The formal double
row of trees (allee) is to frame the rectangular parade
Fig. 10.14 - Schematic plan showing
ground to set it apart from other open space; to create parade ground design criteria.
a grand outdoor "room" for the most important
ceremonies.

10.5.4 Family Housing Landscaping

Improvements.

Fig. 10.15 - Schematic layout of landscape around a duplex.

Page 10-9
10.5.4.1 Dense low evergreen shrubs should be
used to screen mechanical and electrical equipment
in front yards. Canopy trees should be introduced
along tree lawns and planting strips. Unit pavers for
patio areas and ornamental and shade plantings
should be used in rear yards. Residents should be
encouraged to customize their yards. Wood 6' high
fencing should be used to divide rear yards and
create a greater sense of privacy (Fig.10.15).

10.5.4.2 These criteria apply to existing and/or

new twin type residential units, where a pair of units is
attached, requiring special definition of the rear patio
areas.

10.5.4.3 Housing Rear Yard/Patio Treatment. Fig. 10.16 - Conceptual sketch of

The rear yards of family housing units should provide rear yard.
more opportunity for individual treatment. Permanent
storage buildings of similar materials and colors
should be located to provide more private back yard
spaces, as well as increased storage space for
personal belongings. Concrete 2' x 2' max. size unit
pavers should be utilized in conjunction with smaller
scale landscape materials in backyard treatment.
Three-foot high wood fencing should be used at the
back of the yards and 6' high wood fencing between
yards should be encouraged (Figs. 10.16, 10.17, and
10.18). Residents should be encouraged to customize Fig. 10.17 - Conceptual rear yard
their individual yards. elevation.

Fig. 10.18 - Conceptual plan of outdoor spaces between multiple

residential units.

Page 10-10
10.5.5 Foundation Planting.

10.5.5.1 Foundation planting provides a green

background for additional plantings, adds scale and
character to the building, helps to integrate the
building with its surroundings, screens HVAC and
other utilities and helps create a sense of arrival.
When developing foundation planting plans
consideration should be given Antiterrorism
measures.

10.5.5.2. Focal and seasonal plantings should be at

building entries for pedestrian interest (Fig.10.19).

10.5.5.3 Use the architecture of the building to

evaluate the planting design and selection of plants.

10.5.5.4 Plant materials should not block windows Fig. 10.19 - Diagram of landscape
groupings to accent a view of a
and views from interior spaces. building.

10.5.5.5 Trees shall be setback from the building

walls to provide space for mature growth and to
prevent root systems from damaging the foundation.

10.5.5.6 A symmetrical foundation planting design

should be used for a symmetrical building.

10.5.5.7 Due to the possibility of insect problems

Fig. 10.20 - Sketch of landscaping
(bee stings, etc.) do not plant flowering plants near to enrich space between buildings.
entrances.

10.5.6 Landscaping in Proximity to Buildings.

10.5.6.1 The spaces between buildings should

be of the character of the building architecture and
unify the buildings within the visual zone. A variety of
open lawn areas and clustered planting should be
used to complement buildings, frame open areas,
enclose views and add seasonal interest (Fig. 10.20).

10.5.6.2 A mix of canopy trees and ornamental

planting of varying sizes should be used. Group the
planting to form clusters with ornamentals in
foreground canopy, and evergreen in background.

10.5.6.3 Plantings should be strategically located

for purposes of shade screening, and ornamental
interest.

Page 10-11
10.5.6.4 Provide a gravel strip at building
perimeter.

10.5.7 Management of the Forest Edge

10.5.7.1 Provide transition areas between

residential yard areas and existing forest edge with
natural grasses and indigenous plantings (Fig. 10.21).

10.5.7.2 Minimize mowing and plant

Fig. 10.21 - Schematic cross-
maintenance along roadway edges by using section of the residential-forest
indigenous grasses and plantings 20-feet from the transition.
roadway edge (Fig. 10.22).

10.5.8. Screening.

10.5.8.1 Windscreens. Use a combination of

evergreen and deciduous trees to provide windbreak
protection from prevailing winds. Windbreak plantings
should be irregular in form, rather than straight and
evenly spaced, in order to provide more effective wind
control and to visually blend with the natural character
of the installation. Fig. 10.22 - Schematic cross-
section of the roadway-forest
10.5.8.2 Screening of Dumpsters. Landscape transition.
planting should be used to supplement wood fence
and masonry wall dumpster enclosures.

10.5.8.2.1 When a larger dumpster size is

required, dimension should be adjusted accordingly.

10.5.8.2.2 Low dense planting is recommended

around enclosure as illustrated.

10.5.8.2.3 A hose bib should be located in close

proximity to the dumpster enclosure for cleaning
purposes.

10.5.8.2.4 Dumpsters should be painted a

chocolate malt color throughout the entire post to
complement other site furnishings (Fig. 10.23).

10.5.8.3 Masonry Wall. Fig. 10.23 - Sketch of a masonry

dumpster enclosure.
10.5.8.3.1 In areas of extremely high visibility in
proximity to major buildings a masonry (brick)
dumpster enclosure should be introduced. In areas
where the adjacent predominant building material is

Page 10-12
not brick, a compatible masonry material may be
incorporated.

10.5.8.3.2 A black vinyl coated metal hinged gate

should be incorporated to further screen dumpster.

10.5.8.3.3 A concrete pad and footing of

appropriate size must be designed for the required
load.

10.5.8.3.4 If a larger dumpster is required the

dimension of the enclosure must be adjusted
Fig. 10.24 - Plan view showing key
accordingly (Fig. 10.24). dimensions for a dumpster
enclosure.
10.5.8.3.5 A hose bib should be located in close
proximity to the dumpster enclosure for cleaning
purposes.

10.5.9 Standard Planting

10.5.9.1 In areas of lower visibility a dense

planting screen should be introduced to visually buffer
the dumpster.

10.5.9.2 A concrete pad should be provided, as

well as concrete filled pipe bollards.
Fig. 10.25 - Sketch of a composite
10.5.9.3 Planting screen should be 4 feet -5 feet wood enclosure for portable toilets.
high and consist of maintenance free, plant material
including evergreens.

10.5.9.4 A hose bib should be located in close

proximity to the dumpster enclosure for cleaning
purposes

10.5.10 Screening Remote Toilet Facilities

10.5.10.1 Portable toilets should incorporate a

wood screen wall (Fig. 10.25).

10.5.10.2 A 1" x 4" reinforced pressure-treated

wood screen is recommended.

10.5.10.3 Sufficient space should be provided at

entrance to enclosure wall for maintenance, cleaning,
and removal (a minimum of 5-feet clear).

Page 10-13
10.5.10.4 Gravel or sand should be utilized as
ground surface within enclosure.

10.5.10.5 The portable toilets should be clustered

in recreation areas as needed.

10.5.10.6 Portable toilet facilities should be used

only in areas included in the visual zones cited above.
Fig. 10.26 - Sketch showing
10.5.11 Screening Mechanical Equipment mechanical equipment screened by
plants.
10.5.11.1 TRADOC policy dictates that HVAC
units should be located at grade on concrete pads
adjacent to building wherever possible. (Figs. 10.26,
10.27 and 10.28).

10.5.11.2 Where it is not possible to mount HVAC

equipment on top of buildings, it should be located at
grade away from entrances and areas of high visibility
and screened with brick walls.

10.5.11.3 Sufficient space should be provided for Fig. 10.27 - Plan view of
mechanical equipment screened by
air circulation and easy maintenance. plants.

10.5.12 Screening Loading Docks

10.5.12.1 Where loading docks abut a roadway or

area of high visibility, an effort should be made to
screen the loading dock from view. This is only
appropriate in areas between incompatible zone uses
(Figs. 10.29, 10.30 and 10.31).

10.5.12.2 Landscaped buffer should include a Fig. 10.28 - Cross-section showing

variety of dense evergreen and ornamental planting, mechanical equipment screened by
and should continue the length of the trucks using a berm.
the dock. See DC 3.6 for recommended planting.

10.5.12.3 In areas of extremely high visibility, a

landscaped buffer may also be introduced to improve
the visual screening.

10.5.12.4 In areas of extremely high visibility a 5'

high masonry (brick) wall should be introduced to
screen view of service docks and other deleterious
building uses. If building material is other than brick
the screen wall should be constructed of the same or Fig. 10.29 - Cross-section of a
loading dock screened by a berm
a compatible material. Dense low level planting is
and plants.
optional but desirable.

Page 10-14
10.5.12.5 Where a limited setback distance exists,
a combination of a retaining wall (concrete or wood
railroad tie) and landscaping can be incorporated.

10.5.13 Motor Pool Entrance Area

10.5.13.1 Where entrance gates to motor pool

areas are accessed directly from high visibility roads Fig. 10.30 - Cross-section showing
(i.e. primary, secondary, or through-highways), a loading dock screened by plants.
measures should be taken to provide proper access
lanes and to screen direct views into the interior of the
parking area (Fig. 10.32).

10.5.13.2 Provide, where possible, adequate

channelized left-hand turning lane.

10.5.13.3 Provide landscaped island for security Fig. 10.31 - Plan view of loading
booth. dock screened by a berm and
plants.
10.5.13.4 Set back fence and security fence
approximately 50-feet at entry.

10.5.13.5 Provide landscaped island at interior to

screen views through gate.

10.5.13.6 Screen the edge of the motor pool. Set

back the fence 30-feet and plant screen.

10.5.14 Buffer Planting. Use a mixture of

evergreen and deciduous trees and shrubs to visually
separate land uses and to help separate visual zones.

Screening purposes would best be achieved by the

use of White Pine, Japanese Black Pine, Norway
Spruce, and Canadian Hemlock. Existing Loblolly
Pine stands should be supplemented with understory
plantings.

10.5.15 Open Space Planting. Enhance open Fig. 10.32 - Plan showing an
space areas with planting. Use a mix of evergreen, improved motor pool entrance
deciduous, and flowering trees. Plant the same kind driveway.
of trees in massive groupings to impact the vast open
areas (Fig. 10.33).

10.5.16 Street Trees. Street tree plantings

should be used to reinforce vehicular hierarchy, orient
and direct traffic, upgrade views, and to visually de-
emphasize on-street parking. Also, in the design of a

Page 10-15
street tree planting, separate plant species may be
used to identify distinctive details or areas of the
installation, for example, a particular land use
relationship, historical district, community area, or
other similar entity.

10.5.16.1 Use formal street trees in single rows to

visually reinforce primary and secondary roads. Use
regularly spaced, uniformly shaped deciduous trees to
provide a regimented appearance (Fig. 10.34).
Fig. 10.33 - Open spaces can be
10.5.16.2 Use informal groupings of street trees enhanced by groupings of trees.
along tertiary routes. Utilize medium size deciduous
trees to screen on-street parking along roadways. Set
trees 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) from the back of
curbs. Spacing should be uniform, except where curb
cuts interrupt regular spacing.

10.5.16.3 As a general rule, street trees should be

deciduous species, resistant to salt and root pressure,
and should have a 10-feet to 12-feet high clearance
between the street pavement and branch height to
allow adequate clearance for pedestrian and vehicle
Fig. 10.34 - Use street trees to
traffic to pass unimpeded by lower branches.
visually reinforce clarity of the
roadway hierarchy.
10.5.16.4 The street tree layout should be
coordinated with the layout of proposed street lighting.

10.5.16.5 Appropriate plant heights should be

used within sight triangles to ensure safe views from
intersections.

10.5.16.6 Weeping trees should not be used in

locations where they may hang over the roadway or
block views.

10.5.16.7 The main street tree throughout the

installation is the Willow Oak, and it is recommended
that its use be extended on primary roadways in
highly visible zones. Lee Avenue, in the vicinity of the
PX and the Lee Club, would be an excellent location
to continue the use of the Willow Oak. Care should be
taken not to overuse species that are heavily used on
post; carefully mix in other species suitable for street
tree use (already used on the installation) such as
Red Maple, London Plane, Red Oak, Norway Maple,
and Sugar Maple. Some sections on Adams Avenue

Page 10-16
contain American Elm; due to Dutch Elm disease, a
good substitute would be Zelkova serrata (Japanese
Zelkova).

10.5.16.8 The following species should be

discouraged from use for street tree and lawn
use: Eastern Red Cedar, Ginko, Loblolly Pine
(reserve to natural areas), and American Elm
(use recommended substitutes). Trees with low
branching characteristics (i.e. Pin Oak) are not
recommended for street and parking lot use.

Recommended Minimum Setback from Curb/Edge of

Road to Center Line of Tree* (Fig. 10.35).

Fig. 10.35 - Schematic plan showing criteria for the arrangement

of street trees.

Primary Roadway minimum 10-feet

Secondary Roadway minimum 10-feet

Tertiary or other Roadways minimum 5-feet

* Individual conditions and restrictions may

affect placement of street trees ( i.e. overhead wires,
paved walkways, etc.).

Page 10-17
 * Maintain a clear line of sight at intersections
free of any visual obstructions.

10.5.17 Parking Lot Planting. Parking lots are

often the least attractive elements on a military
installation. The use of landscape plant material and
earth berms can greatly improve the appearance of
these areas as well as help define circulation and
reduce heat gain during summer months (Fig. 10.36).

10.5.17.1 Use shade tree plantings at parking lots to

reduce glare and moderate ambient air temperatures
on the lot. Optimum spacing of parking lot shade trees
is 10 to 12 meters (35 to 40 feet) on center.

10.5.17.2 Choose trees and shrubs that require

minimum maintenance and will not litter the parking Fig. 10.36 - Landscaping at
entrance gates must meet
area with leaves, fruit, or nuts. antiterrorism/force protection
requirements.
10.5.17.3 Consider sight distances near entrances
and exits when selecting and placing plant material.

10.5.17.4 Select trees, shrubs, and ground covers

that can withstand harsher conditions, such as sun,
glare, heat, and reduced water supply.

10.5.17.5 Use a mix of evergreen and deciduous

plant material to screen parking areas from adjacent
uses (Fig. 10.37).

10.5.18 Environmental Control Planting. When

properly placed, plants can provide environmental
benefits, as well as address visual concerns.

10.5.18.1 Use deciduous trees and shrubs at 10.37 - Cross-section of a planted

courtyards, buildings and along streets to provide berm screening parking.
shade, moderate temperatures and reduce glare
during the summer months while allowing solar
exposure in the winter.

10.5.18.2 Locate deciduous plantings on the

southeast and southwest corner of buildings or
courtyards to mitigate solar radiation and glare due to
heat build-up and lower sun angles in the mid-
morning and late afternoon hours.

Page 10-18
10.5.18.3 Use mixed mass plantings of deciduous
shrubs and evergreen trees and shrubs to provide
sound control along primary and secondary roads.

10.5.19 Screening Parking. In areas of high

visibility, parking areas should be screened or visually
buffered from roadways, housing and administrative
buildings (Fig. 10.38).

10.5.19.1 Bermed Planting Strip. An earth berm 3'

high can be used to create a landscaped visual buffer.
10.38 - Cross-section of a planted
Planting should be placed at bottom or lower part of
screening for parking.
slope. Do not plant on top. Low maintenance ground
cover should be used to cover remaining areas.
Larger canopy street trees should be used closer to
street. See DC 3.6 for recommended planting (Fig.
10.39).

10.5.19.2 Planting Screen. A landscaped planting

strip can be used to screen negative visual elements.
Larger canopy trees should be placed closer to street
with evergreens and ornamental shrubs forming a
more consistent visual barrier. 10.39 - Cross-section of a planted
berm screening parking.
10.5.19.3 Masonry Wall. In areas of high visibility
where a 20' planting strip does not exist or when a
wall is desired, place a 3' high brick wall to screen
view of cars. Low evergreen planting is optional.
Gravel or ground cover should be used in area
between wheel stop and wall (Fig. 10.40).

10.5.19.3 Berm and Retaining Wall. A retaining

wall can be used to stabilize an earth berm and
plantings where the setback is very limited. Concrete
or wood railroad ties can be used in the appropriate
10.40 - Cross-section of a planted
visual zone. Arrange planting in clusters on side of wall screening parking.
berm using a dense mix of plant material. See DC 3.
6. for recommended planting.

10.5.20 Screening Secured Areas. Where

chainlink fencing is required and where visual access
from the road for security purposes is required, a
system of clustered dense planting allows security
patrols to view at right angles the subject area but
screens oblique views of the secured areas.

Page 10-19
10.5.20.1 Arrange planting in informal
groupings or clusters. Use a mix of evergreen
and deciduous species. See 3.6 for
recommended planting (Fig. 10.41).

10.5.20.2 A low maintenance ground cover

should be incorporated to reduce or eliminate
mowing and upkeep. (See FL. 6-109)

10.5.20.3 Screening Secured Areas with a

Berm. Where chain link fencing is required and
where visual access from the road for security
purposes is necessary an earth berm with
10.41 - Cross-section of trees and
planting can be introduced to provide a partial shrubs screening parking.
visual screen (Fig. 10.42).

10.5.20.3.1 By varying the location of clustered

planting and interrupting the berm security
personnel can obtain a perpendicular view of the
secured area from the road, while more oblique
auto traffic views are screened (Fig. 10.43).

10.5.20.3.2 A low maintenance ground cover

should be utilized on the berm. Larger planting
should be located at edge and bottom of berm.

10.5.21 Image Planting. The image of the

installation is formed by the visual impressions that
exist within the installation. The primary locations of 10.42 - Cross-section of a planted
berm screening parking.
highly visible images are the main gate, along primary
circulation systems, and at areas of high
concentrations of people. Features such as signs,
statues, static displays, and other primary visual
images can be improved by the use of trees, shrubs,
and ground cover.

Entrances to the Installation. The entrances and

streetscapes into the installation are areas to place
landscaping that will develop a strong visual image
and provide visual interest during all four seasons.
The entrance to the installation creates the first visual
impression for the visitor. 10.43 - Cross-section of a planted
berm screening parking.
10.5.22 The landscape materials and planting
areas should be proportional in scale to the hierarchy
of the street on which they are located.

Page 10-20
10.5.23 Landscaping must be integrated with the
Force Protection requirements of Section 12. Low
shrubs, groundcover, annual/perennial plants and
canopy trees provide seasonal interest as well as
maintain views required to ensure force protection
measures. Large evergreen trees are discouraged in
these locations because they may obstruct sightlines
and impact the need for force protection. Adequate
lines of sight must be maintained fro guard personnel
to observe vehicular and pedestrian traffic
approaching the gate.

10.5.23.1 Zeroscaping. Where appropriate, to

conserve water and lower maintenance consider
zeroscaping.

10.5.23.2 Xeriscape. Xeriscape is the conservation

of water and energy through creative and adaptive
landscape design. Xeriscape landscapes provide
attractive solutions that save money, water, and
maintenance. The following website provides
guidance on specific design principles of the
xeriscape design process and xeriscape design
application:

x USAF Landscape Design Guide, Xeriscape.

10.6 PLANT MATERIAL SELECTION

10.6.1 Trees, shrubs, ground cover and turf are the

major elements of a planting composition. Basic plant
selection criteria should consider creating a unified
composition utilizing native materials for low
maintenance and sustainability, avoiding incompatible
colors, textures and forms, and matching the
appropriate plant to the land use, situation, and
environmental condition.

10.6.2 The ability of plant material to provide lasting

benefit is dependent upon the plant's hardiness and
its appropriateness to the site use. Major factors
affecting plant hardiness are soil type and organic
content, temperature, moisture and light. These
climatic conditions can be modified to an extent by
specific site conditions, such as wind protection, solar
orientation, and planting design, to create
microclimates.

Page 10-21
 Plant Categories
Cultural Characteristics

Growth Rate-Fast

10.6.3 Selecting appropriate plants for a given Growth Rate-Medium

condition is only one aspect of planting design.
Compositional arrangement to provide texture variety Growth Rate-Slow
and to accent site and building features is another. Drought/Pest Resistance
The selection and composition of a planting design
requires an understanding of each plant's Environmental Characteristics
characteristics, form, and environmental needs as
Acidic Soil Tolerant
well as how each plant can relate to and complement
other plants in the design. Plants are used in four Alkaline Soil Tolerant
basic design categories:
Acid/Alkaline Tolerant
x Canopy
Moist Soil Tolerant

x Barrier Well Drained Soil

x Screen (or Baffle) Dry Soil Tolerant

x Groundcover Shade Tolerant

Summer Sun Tolerant

10.7 PLANT PALETTE AND PLANT
CATEGORIES Sun/Shade Tolerant

10.7.1 The plant palette and categories are Specimen Plants

designed to help the designer choose the best plant Functional Characteristics
for each particular set of design requirements. The
plants that appear on the palette and in the categories Street Trees (+35')
were selected for their hardiness and their ability to
Shade Trees (+40’)
survive in this geographical area. To use them
effectively, the design requirements must be well Screen
defined for the specific site (Fig. 10.44).
Massing
10.7.2 The Plant Palette.
Lawn / Edging

10.7.2.1 A select group of plant materials has been Medium Hedges (10-20')
divided into the following six categories:
Erosion Control/Bank Stabilizer
x shade trees
Specimen Plants

x ornamental trees

x evergreen trees Fig. 10.44 - Plant Categories.

x shrubs

x groundcovers

x grasses

Page 10-22
10.7.2.2 On the palette, the plants appear in
alphabetical order by their botanical name, followed
by their common name, design characteristics,
cultural information, recommended use, and
miscellaneous notes. The plant palette is presented in
a matrix format in Appendix O.

10.7.3 The Plant Categories.

10.7.3.1 Plants from the plant palette with similar

characteristics have been cataloged in the Plant
Categories. These characteristics could be cultural
(e.g., slow, medium, and fast growth), environmental
(e.g., shade tolerant), ornamental (e.g., red fall color),
or functional (e.g., shade, street, massing, specimen,
screening plant, etc.). Characteristics include: Cultural
Conditions (growth rate, disease and pest resistance),
Environmental Conditions (sun/shade, pH range, soil
moisture required, and wind/sun), and Ornamental
Characteristics (flower season, flower/bark/foliage
interest).

10.7.3.2 Each category describes a list of plants that

share a similar quality. For example, materials that
are shade tolerant would be placed in the Shade
Tolerant group under the "Environmental Conditions"
heading. To further explain the Categories, under the
"Environmental Conditions" heading, in the Shade
Tolerant group, all shade tolerant deciduous trees
would be listed under “Deciduous Trees"; all shade
tolerant Coniferous trees would be listed under
"Coniferous Trees"; and so on.

10.8 PLANT MATERIAL INSTALLATION

10.8.1 A key step in assuring successful planting is

to select plants of the highest quality. Plant material
should be of the size, genus, species, and variety to
comply with the recommendations and requirements
of the "American Standard for Nursery Stock" ANSI
Z60.1 (Fig. 10.45).

Page 10-23
 Fig. 10.45 - Install Plant Material According to Industrial
Standards

10.8.2 As part of the design process and prior to

plant installation, review the installation's Master
Plans, Basic Information Maps, or As Built Drawings
for utility locations and verify with the Directorate of
Public Works or equivalent.

10.8.3 The planting and establishment of trees,

shrubs, ground covers, and vines is detailed in TM 5-
803-13, Chapter 3. Fig. 10.46 - Space plants according
to their mature size.
10.8.4 General Guidelines for Plant Installation.

10.8.4.1 At planting time, thin plants by removing

one-third of the vegetative material.

10.8.4.2 Spray all evergreens with an antidesiccant

within 24 hours of planting.

Page 10-24
10.8.4.3 Water all plants thoroughly during the first
24-hour period after planting.

10.8.4.4 Site all plants and stakes plumb.

10.8.4.5 Space plants according to their mature size

(Fig. 10.46).

10.8.4.6 Install plant materials in groups for greater

impact (Fig. 10.47).

10.8.4.7 Installation of Lawn Areas.

10.8.4.8 Installation techniques for turf are detailed

in TM 5-803-13, Chapter 4. The details include site Don’t Do This
evaluation, site preparation, selection of turf, and
maintenance requirements.
Do This
Fig. 10.49 - Proper Tree Pruning
10.9 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT MATERIAL Procedures.

10.9.1 The ease of maintenance should be one of

the primary goals when considering the success of
any planting design (Fig. 10.48). Fig. 10.47 - Grouped plants have
greater impact.
10.9.2 Pruning. In general plant material should be
allowed to conform to its natural shape. This practice
allows the plant to mature in a health manner, and
saves the time and energy required for trimming. The
pruning of trees and shrubs is done to maintain
overall plant health, direct plant growth, maintain a
desired shape, and increase flower or fruit
development.

10.9.2.1 Pruning Shrubs.

x Do not prune shrubs flat across the top.

x Prune branches yearly on thick-branched Fig. 10.48 - group plants in mulched

beds to reduce maintenance.
shrubs and at the base of the shrub.

x When pruning deciduous shrubs prune

shrub stems as close to the ground as
possible and shrub branches as close to
the stem as possible.

x When "thinning out" deciduous shrubs

prune about one-third of all branches where
they meet their main stem.

Page 10-25
10.9.2.2 Pruning Trees.

x Remove a large limb by making three cuts

as follows:

x Make the first cut at the bottom of the

branch 12 inches to 24 inches from the branch
attachment (Cut A, Fig 10.49).
x Make the second cut on the top of the
branch within 1" of the undercut (Cut B, Fig
10.49).

x Make the final cut just beyond the outer

portion of the branch collar (Cut C, Fig Fig. 10.50 - Establish a visual
barrier in perimeter setback.
10.49). The first two cuts were necessary to
remove the weight of the branch to allow
cut #3 to be clean without ripping the bark.

x Never cut the central leader of the tree.

x Coniferous evergreens trees should be

pruned, during the spring, by snipping off
new growth. Avoid geometrically shaping
plant material while pruning.

10.9.3 Mulching.

x Use mulch around the base of plant

material to provide for greater moisture and
help inhibit the growth of weeds and
grasses. Mulch should be maintained at a
depth of two to four inches.

x The best time to mulch for water

conservation is in the late spring. Apply
mulch immediately to new fall plantings.

10.9.4 Ground Cover Maintenance. Although

ground covers do not require pruning, they may be
periodically dug up in the spring or fall for propagation
and to prevent overcrowding in their beds.

10.9.5 Landscape Maintenance Schedule. The

general objective of a landscape maintenance
schedule is to ensure an orderly and efficient care of
the grounds. The landscape maintenance schedule
included in the Army Installation Design Guide (See

Page 10-26
Appendix F) identifies times throughout the year when
specified maintenance should be undertaken. Use of
the landscape maintenance schedule will improve all
aspects of landscape on the installation. Materials
and supplies can be ordered in a timely fashion,
manpower needs can be calculated and anticipated,
and a correlation between the level of maintenance
and appropriate cost can be derived.

10.10 TREE PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION

10.10.1 Existing urban trees and forest should be

preserved if they are in good health. Construction
should be planned to provide for the preservation of
significant trees (Fig. 10.50).

10.10.2 During the clearing and construction process,

trees should be protected from damage. Construction
barricades should be erected to protect the existing
trees to be preserved. The barricades should be no Fig. 10.52 - Use trees to obscure
closer to the trunk of the tree than one-half the sight lines.
distance form the trunk to the drip line. Existing trees
that cannot be preserved should be considered for
transplanting to a different location on site or to a
different site (Fig. 10.51).

10.10.3 Changes in the grade of the soil around trees

can cause extensive root damage and eventually
death of the tree. To prevent damage to the tree, it is
important to maintain the existing grade for least the
size of the threes canopy (the drip line).

10.11 ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION

CONSIDERATIONS

10.11.1 The presence of vegetation on an installation

Fig 10.51 - Construct a barrier at
can have both beneficial and detrimental impacts on drip line during construction to
security. The selection and placement of landscape maintain grade.
plant material on Army installations is an integral
element in the provision of protective measures to
reduce the threat of terrorism.

10.11.2 Proper selection and placement of trees and

shrubs can be utilized to provide visual screening
without creating concealment for covert activity. The
landscape architect responsible for tree placement
should work closely with installation force protection

Page 10-27
experts to design a landscape plan that provides
visual screening without compromising Antiterrorism
measures (Fig. 10.52).

10.11.3 The plant material must allow building

occupants to see out, but must not allow outside
forces to monitor interior activity. The landscape
architect should incorporate the following aspects into
the design:

x Avoid conditions within 10 meters (33 feet)

of inhabited structures that permit
concealment of aggressors or obscure the
view of objects or packages 150-millimeters
(6 inches) in height from the view of
security personnel. This results in the
placement of shrubs and trees that are
loose rather than dense in growth habit and
possess multiple small stems rather than a
single trunk that will obscure a 150-
millimeters (6 inch) package.

x Vegetation groupings provide reduction of

blast effect.

x Plant material selection and placement shall

minimize potential hiding places for bombs
and aggressors.

x Provide vegetation screens for play areas

and outdoor recreation areas to obscure
from off-installation view.

x Use trees to obscure sight lines of on-

installation buildings from off-installation
buildings.

10.12 ARMY STANDARDS

The cited Army Standards shall be met.

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-70, Buildings

and Structures

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-630, Natural

Resources Land Management

Page 10-28
 x Technical Manual (TM) 5-803-13,
Landscape Design and Planting

x American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI

Z60.1

x Overseas (Host Nation Standards)

10.13 REFERENCES

The following references are provided for guidance.

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01,

Installation Design, Chap 10

x USAF Landscape Design Guide

x C. Brickell and D. Joyce. Pruning and

Training, 1996.

x The Department of Conservation and

Recreation Division of Natural Heritage’s list
of Invasive Alien Plant Species of Virginia
can be found online at
http://www.dcr.virginia.gov/natural_heritage/
documents/invlist.pdf

Page 10-29
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Section 11
Go to Table of Contents

Page 10-30
 SECTION 11

SITE ELEMENTS DESIGN STANDARDS

11.1 INTRODUCTION

11.1.1 Site elements include all visual elements of

an installation that are considered utilitarian in use.
These elements include the following four categories
of utilitarian amenities:

x Site Furnishings

x Signs

x Lighting

x Utilities

11.1.2 The four sub-components provide dominant

visual impacts within Fort Lee. The specific site Fig. 11.1 - Site elements
element features and equipment should, to the extent significantly affect the visual quality
of the installation.
possible, reflect the local or regional design standards
(Fig 11.1). This allows for ease of maintenance and
blending into the local community. The four sub-
components and their visual impacts are discussed in
detail in this chapter.

11.2 SITE ELEMENT OBJECTIVES

11.2.1 The site element plans for existing and future

installation use should be prepared and the site
elements selected to enhance the sustainability of
Fort Lee. To this end, site elements should meet the
following objectives:

11.2.1.1 Site elements should be appropriate to their

intended function.

11.2.1.2 Site elements should be part of a

coordinated system that provides consistency and
continuity to convey a sense of organization (Fig. Fig. 11.2 - Site Elements Should
Convey Sense of Organization.
11.2).

Page 11-1
11.2.1.3 The design and location of the various site
elements should express an image, character, and
scale appropriate to Fort Lee.

11.2.1.4 Design and locate all site elements to meet

AT/FP requirements.

11.2.1.5 Use recycled/salvaged materials wherever

possible.

11.2.1.6 Minimize maintenance and repair through

the use of efficient products that are vandal-proof.

11.2.1.7 Minimize negative visual impacts of all utility Fig. 11.3 - Plants can readily be
systems (Fig. 11.3). used to minimize the negative
visual impact.
11.2.1.8 Minimize environmental impacts of all utility
systems.

11.2.2 Site Furnishings Relationships

11.2.2.1 Relationship of Bench and Sidewalk

11.2.2.1.1 The simplest of relationships between

site furnishings and site conditions is illustrated here.

11.2.2.1.2 Benches in the appropriate style should

be located in areas of active pedestrian use.

11.2.2.1.3 A bench should be incorporated with a Fig. 11.4 - Diagram showing the
trash receptacle in the appropriate style. preferred relationship between a
bench and adjoining walkway.
11.2.2.1.4 Paving should extend a minimum of 1'
beyond the end and back of bench.

11.2.2.1.5 Bench should face walkway activity

area (Fig. 11.4).

11.2.2.2 Locations of Bus Shelters

11.2.2.2 Bus shelters should be located in as

few locations as possible, only where the heaviest
demand exists (Fig. 11.5).

Fig.11.5 - Preferred relationship of

bus shelter, street, and site
furnishings.

Page 11-2
11.2.2.2.1 The shelter should be a minimum of 30'
from the corner in order to not obstruct the view of on-
coming traffic and not interfere with pedestrian
movement on the sidewalk (Fig 11.6).

11.2.2.2.2 Trash receptacles and lighting fixtures

should be located in proximity to bus shelter.

11.2.2.3 Buildings and Surrounding Open Space

11.2.2.3.1 Small plaza areas are important where

administration buildings are clustered. These are the
places people use enroute to different offices. They
serve as informal meeting places and unify the
complex of buildings.

11.2.2.3.2 Plaza Courtyards. Create a small Fig. 11.6 - Plan view of the
arrangement of elements at a bus
defined "outdoor room" by forming a rectangular area stop.
of paving, using accent materials, such as brick with
concrete (Fig. 11.7).

Fig.
Fig. 11.7
11.7 -- A
A conceptual
conceptual plan
plan for
for a
a plaza
plaza or
or formal
formal open
open
space.
space
11.2.2.3.3 Site Furnishings in Plazas and
Courtyards.

11.2.2.4 Recreation and Picnic Areas

Page 11-3
11.2.2.4.1 Site Furnishing should be grouped
together to form clusters of activity in the open
space, rather than randomly scattered in the OS
Zone (Fig. 11.8).
11.2.2.4.2 Picnic tables should be placed close
to trees for shade, but not underneath the tree.
Grills and trash receptacles should not be too
close. (Fig. 11.9)
Fig. 11.8 - Plan view of elements
11.2.2.4.3 The relationship of active recreational arranged in a courtyard.
uses and facilities must be carefully planned and
related to the natural elements in the landscape,
especially shade trees (Fig. 11.10).

Fig. 11.10 - Plan view of elements

Fig. 11.15 – Perspective view of a corner with a properly installed arranged at a picnic site.
lawn barrier rail.

Fig. 11.9 - Perspective view of elements arranged at recreation area.

11.2.2.5 Lawn Barrier Rail

11.2.2.5.1 To discourage footpaths across lawn

areas, use lengths of a low pipe rail along edge of
sidewalk.

11.2.2.5.1 Locate rail 18 inches high, 12 inches

back from edge of sidewalk. Use 2-inch diameter
steel pipe painted Brown (Fig. 11.11).

11.2.2.5.1 Locate vertical supports 6 to 8 feet Fig. 11.11 - Detail of lawn barrier
apart. Use 4-inch x 4-inch pressure treated wood. rail.
Secure as required. 11.2.2.6 Battalion Monuments

Page 11-4
11.2.2.6.1 Battalion monuments are constructions
that instill pride and identity. The location and size of
these constructions should be carefully controlled as
illustrated (Fig. 11.12).

Fig. 11.12 – Perspective view of the preferred size, location and

scale of unit monuments and pennants.

11.2.2.6.2 While the creativity of each battalion

should not be stifled, the design energy should be
channeled in order to create a structure that is
permanent and projects a professional image
(Fig. 11.13).

11.2.2.6.3 Materials that will withstand the

elements and facilitate maintenance should be
selected.

11.3 SITE FURNISHINGS

11.3.1 Site furnishings include all of the utilitarian Fig. 11.13 – A unit monument that
outdoor amenities found on an installation. These lacks scale and permanence.
outdoor furnishings should be located in coordinated
clusters to provide areas of multi-furnishing amenities,
and avoid the haphazard proliferation of furniture
elements around the installation. All furnishings shall
be accessible to, and usable by, persons with
disabilities, in accordance with the requirements of
the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG) and the Uniform Federal
Accessibility Standards (UFAS), with the most

Page 11-5
stringent standards to apply in the event of conflicts.

11.3.2 Site furnishings include the following:

x Seating (Fig. 11.14)

x Tables
x Telephone Booths
x Shelters
x Kiosks
x Walls and Fences (Fig. 11.15)
x Trash Receptacles
x Dumpsters
x Flagpoles
x Movable Planters
x Bicycle Racks
x Tree Grates
Fig. 11.14 – A planter can also
x Bollards serve as a bench.

x Play Equipment
x Mailboxes
x Monuments, Memorials, Military Equipment
Static Displays
x Drinking Fountains

11.3.3 Site Furnishings Matrix

11.3.3.1 The following matrix is a summary of the site

furnishings to be used on post within the appropriate
visual zones. The three columns contain the following
information: Item (general description), Visual Zone
(which visual zones each furnishing is used within)
Application (specific application within visual zone).
Though there may be exceptions to application and
visual zone, the matrix may be used as a general Fig. 11.15 – Dimensions for a wall
guide, followed by more detailed information on intended to be used for seating.
selection and location in each particular application.

Page 11-6
Table: 11.1 Site Furnishing Matrix

Item Visual Zone Application

G L T
CS IA FH OS
W T F

1. Benches/Tables

A. Wood 1A. General use

Curvilinear Form with throughout, Especially
Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Metal Supports in areas of public use

B. Recycle Plastic 1B. Other less visible

Metal Supports Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ areas, especially in
training areas

C. Picnic Table Ɣ Ɣ 1C. Recreational areas

2. Bollards

A. Steel Pipe with Steel 2A. Highly Visible areas

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Ball and Cap, Black throughout post

B. Wood 2B. Recreational and

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
housing areas

C. Conc. Filled Pipe, 2C. Service areas and

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Ptd. Black less visible areas
3. Trash Receptacles

A. Metal Receptacle, 3A. Areas of high

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Formal Design visibility

B. Metal Receptacle, 3B. General use near

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Utilitarian Design seating areas
4. Fences

A. Metal Picket 4A. High visibility areas

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
requiring security

B. Recycled Plastic Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ 4B. General screening

C.Chain Link-Black Vinyl 4C. High security in

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
areas of low visibility

Page 11-7
 Item Visual Zone Application

G L T
CS IA FH OS
W T F

D. Sidewalk Railing Ɣ 4D. As required

5. Phone Booths

A. Extruded Aluminum 5A. Areas of high public

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Kiosk use

6. Bus Shelters

A. Rectangular 6A. As required

Aluminum Frame with
Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Wood or Recycled
Plastic Seat
7. Flagpole One per installation

A. Pennant Holder Ɣ 7A. As required

8. Drinking Fountain

A. Standard Iron/Steel 8A. Areas of high use

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Fountain and visibility

B. Handicap Pedestal- 8B. As required near

Ɣ Ɣ
mounted Fountain seating
9. Bicycle Racks

A. Simple Ribbon Rack - 9A. Locate at building

Black Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ entries out of main
circulation patterns
10. Sidewalk Railing Ɣ
11. Storage Shed Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ As required
12. Smoking Picnic Shelter

A. Detached 12A. Areas of high

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ visibility near
permanent facilities

Page 11-8
 Item Visual Zone Application

G L T
CS IA FH OS
W T F

B. Attached 12B. Areas of high

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ visibility as part of
permanent facilities

Page 11-9
11.3.3.2 Dos and Don’ts on the Use of Site
Elements. The visual image of Fort Lee not only
depends upon, but also profits greatly from, the
observance of established design criteria. The
following basic guidelines, extracted from the IDG,
are provided for referencing convenience, and
adherence as applicable to specific situations.

11.3.4 Landscaping

x No landscaping timbers
x No paint around bases of trees
x No tires around bases of trees
x No gravel around bases of trees
x No retaining walls around bases of trees
x No landscaping without Environmental
Management Office consultation
x 4 to 6 inches of mulch and/or flowers around
bases of trees

11.3.5 Site Furnishings

The following descriptions identify each

furnishing to be used within each visual zone.
Though it is not required that the specific
manufacturer be used, if substitutions are made
the furnishings selected should match the
specifications of the model shown as closely as
possible (Fig. 11.16).
Fig. 11.16 – Site furnishings
arranged to create an inviting
The Section is arranged in the following way: building entry.
x Item: (Generic description of furnishing to be
used)
x Material: (of the major components)
x Color: (of the major components)
x Form/Style: (General Description)
x Application: (General location and specific
visual zones) (Fig. 11.17)
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o (Selected Manufacturer or first choice of
manufacturers)
x Model No.: (Most current model number
available at the time of the brochure
Fig. 11.17 – General Use Bench
printing) Recycled Plastic.

Page 11-10
11.3.5.1 Lawn Barrier Railing (Fig. 11.18)
x 18 inches high, 2-inch diameter
x Create using Dark Terra Cotta steel pipe rail
x 4-inch x 4-inch wood posts spaced 6 to 8 feet
apart

11.3.5.2 Trash Receptacles

11.3.5.2.1 Trash Receptacle Location. Trash

containers should be highly visible and accessible for Fig. 11.18 - Lawn barrier railing
effective litter control. Containers should be located details.
conveniently along walkways, near major pedestrian
intersections, near building entrances and near
seating and eating areas. Antiterrorism/force
protection requirements restrict the location of
dumpsters to a minimum of 10 meters (33 feet) from
inhabited buildings and 25 meters (82 feet) from
billeting and primary gathering areas (Unified
Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD Minimum
Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, Table B-1).

11.3.5.2.2 Trash Receptacle Design. Containers

should be of a design that is compatible and in
harmony with other site furnishings. Fig. 11.19 - Fig. 11.20 -
General Use High
x General Use: Expanded Steel Mesh with Trash Visibility
Plastisol Coating, Finished on Inner Metal Receptacle. Trash
Receptacle.
Structure to 3/16" Thickness with Trash Lid. -
As manufactured by or equal to Wabash valley
Corp. Model No. FR400D (Fig. 11.19).

- 32 Gallon

x High Visibility Use in Living-Training,

Community Service and Tenant Facilities
Areas: Square receptacle of reinforced
(concrete) exposed aggregate with linear low
density high impact resistant polyethylene liner
and lid with receptacle hole in it (Fig. 11.20).
- The BEST Litter Receptacles, Inc.
(various models/sizes)

11.3.5.3 Benches Fig. 11.21 - Bench for use in Living-

Training, Industrial, and Tenant
x General Use: Contour bench with recycled Facilities Visual Zones.
plastic seat and back in various colors with black
metal supports (Fig. 11.21).

Page 11-11
 - Landscape Forms/LFI Model No. Timberline
3.13 (Redwood or Red Oak) 313PE2572 POE:
Support (square tubular embedded)

x Use in Living-Training, Industrial, and Tenant

Facilities Areas: Backless recycled plastic bench
with natural color; simple wood slat seat and
embedded black metal pedestal (Fig. 11.22).
- Landscape Forms/LFI Model No. Forum 39
PE 1972 Redwood, PDE Support (square
tubular embedded)

11.3.5.4 Picnic Table

x General Use: Natural color recycled plastic top

and seats, galvanized pipe supports with black Fig. 11.22 - General Use Picnic
finish, single pedestal with two seats per Table.
table.(Fig. 11.22).
- Gametime Model No. 795, 6ft Single Post
Picnic Table
x 1C. Picnic Table
x Material: Recycled Plastic top and seats,
galvanized pipe supports
x Color: Natural wood color galvanized
pipes to have black finish.
x Form/Style: Two seats per table, single
pedestal
x Application: Zones: FH, OS
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Gametime
o P.O. Box 121
o Fort Payne, Alabama 35967
o 205-845-5610
x Model No.: No. 795, 6ft. Single Post Picnic
Table

11.3.5.5 Storage Shed

x General Use: Storage / Hazardous Materials

Storage, 8’8” high, 10’x12’ or 12’x20’ floor area Fig. 11.23 - Storage Shed.
(Fig. 11.23)
-As manufactured by or equal to
Smith-Midland Corporation, Easy-Set Precast
Building, P.O. Box 300
Midland, Virginia 22728, (703) 439-3266
-As manufactured by or equal to

Page 11-12
 AES PreCast, Precast Concrete Building
Systems, 3851 17th Street
Northport, Alabama 35476, (205) 333-8000

11.3.5.6 Smoking/Picnic Shelters

x General Use: Steel Frame, with pre-finished

and durable components with exterior design
elements that compliment the architecture of
the building it serves.

x High Visibility Use in Living/Training, Industrial,

and Tenant Facilities Areas: Detached and
designed and constructed of materials that
coordinate with the permanent building (Fig.
11.24).
Fig. 11.24 - Smoking/Picnic Shelter.
x High Visibility Use in Living/Training, Industrial,
and Tenant Facilities Areas: Attached and
designed and constructed of materials that
coordinate with the permanent building (Fig.
11.25).

11.3.5.7 Bus Shelters.

11.3.5.7.1 Bus Shelter Location. Bus shelters

should be located at major facilities along the bus
route such as Commissary/Post Exchange areas,
barracks, medical, and dental clinics. Bus stops Fig. 11.25 - Smoking/Picnic Shelter.
should relate to major pedestrian walkways, and be
placed on concrete pads. Provide a minimum 3-foot
clearance between shelters and the edge of walks.

11.3.5.7.2 Bus Shelter Design. Fort Lee has a

specific design for bus shelters (Fig. 11.26) that is
constructed in-place. Plans for these shelters are
provided by DEL to be included in plans for new
facilities or renovations where a bus shelter is to be
incorporated.

11.3.5.8 Kiosks

11.3.5.8.1 Kiosks Location. Kiosks can be used as Fig. 11.26 - Fort Lee Approved Bus
Shelter.
information centers at pedestrian nodes within the
town center. Provide kiosks only where they are
needed on a concrete base adjacent to walkways

Page 11-13
(Fig. 11.27). Allow a minimum of 3’ clearance on all
sides.

11.3.5.8.2 Kiosks Design. Kiosk design should

blend compatibly with other site furnishings and with
the architectural character of the zone in terms of
form, scale, and materials. A similar design treatment
should be established for kiosks and shelters.

11.3.5.8.3 Phone Booth. (Fig. 11.28)

x 5A. Kiosk Phone Booth

x Material: Cast Aluminum
x Color: Black finish
x Form/Style: Cylinder
x Application: Use only in high volume
pedestrian areas. Fig. 11.27 - Example of Kiosk.
x Zones: GW, LT, CC, TF
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o King Products Ltd.
o 3150 Wharton Way
o Mississauga, Ontario
o Canada L4X 2C1
o 416-625-1111
x Model No.: 540, Telephone Kiosk

11.3.5.9 Walls and Fences.

11.3.5.9.1 Location and Use. Walls and fencing

should be used to provide visual screening, define
pedestrian plaza areas, wind screening, pedestrian Fig. 11.28 - Phone Booth Kiosk.
and vehicular control, security, and to retain soil. The
design of walls and fences should fulfill their function
in harmony with the character and appearance of their
setting (Fig. 11.29).

11.3.5.9.2 Walls. Low walls should be used to

define pedestrian court areas and provide informal
seating. Screening walls can be used where
appropriate to screen building service areas. Walls
adjacent to walkways should be free of any
projections, such as signs or drain pipes that would Fig. 11.29 - Screen Wall Hides
pose a hazard to passing pedestrians. Construction of Mechanical Equipment.
walls should incorporate either brick to match
adjacent buildings, with stone or concrete cap, or
concrete with a textured finish and stone or concrete
cap. Retaining walls may be constructed of brick,

Page 11-14
native stone, versa-lock modular stone with a light tan
finish, or concrete block with a light tan stucco finish,
concrete block planters, or other appropriate material.
Walls used to screen service areas or trash
enclosures should incorporate landscape plantings to
help reduce the negative visual impact of these areas.

11.3.5.9.3 Fences. Fences should be used for

screening of service areas and site utilities,
particularly dumpsters. Screen fencing should consist
of square tubular metal posts and rails with vertical
wood fence boards. All fence posts should be
securely anchored with concrete footings. All metal
posts and framework should be black vinyl coated
and wood fencing should be western cedar. Hardware
shall be stainless steel to prevent rust. Chain link
fences should be screened with trees and shrubs.
The use of chain link fence should be held to a
minimum in the cantonment area. Fig. 11.30 - Steel Picket Fence.

11.3.5.9.4 Fencing/Railings
x Steel Picket Fence (Fig. 11.30)
x 3A. Metal Picket Fence
x Material: Tubular Steel
x Color: Black finish
x Form/Style: Traditional Picket
x Application: Areas of high visibility within
public use zones
x Zones: GW, LT, CC, TF
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Westmoreland Tubular Products Mfg.
Co.
o Bristol, PA
o 215-949-3100
o Model No.: Barrier Traditional

11.3.5.9.5 Recycled Plastic (Fig. 11.31)

x 4B. Wood Fence Replacement
x Material: Recycled Plastic
x Color: Natural
x Form/Style: Traditional Post, Board, Rail
pattern
x Application: Screening or area definition in
Fig. 11.31 - Wood Fencing will be
Headquarters and Residential replaced with Recycled Plastic.
areas
x Zones: GW, LT, CC, FH, OS

Page 11-15
 x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Walpole Woodworkers
o 767 East Street
o Walpole, MA 02081
o 616-668-2800
x Model No.: The height of the ‘Universal’ Fence
should be either 4, 5, 6, or 8 feet.

11.3.5.9.6 Chain Link Fence (Fig. 11.32)

x 4C. Chain Link Fence
x Material: Galvanized mesh with vinyl
coating
x Color: Black vinyl coat
x Form/Style: Posts and rails as required, with Fig. 11.32 - Chain Link Fence.
square terminal post tops
x Application: High security in areas of low
visibility wherever needed
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Anchor Fence Co.
o 6500 Eastern Ave.
o Baltimore,
o Maryland 21224
o 301-633-6500
x Model No.: As required for application with Fig. 11.33 - Sidewalk Railing.
PVC vinyl and square terminal
posts

11.3.5.9.7 Sidewalk Railing (Fig. 11.33)

x 4D. Sidewalk Railing
x Material: Steel Pipe Rail, 2-in. Diameter
4-inch x 4-inch wood posts
x Color: Dark Terra Cotta, pipe only
x Form/Style: As illustrated
x Application: Edges of and at Inter-sections of
sidewalks (To prevent
shortcuts across lawns where
high pedestrian traffic occurs)
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Make and install on the installation

11.3.5.10 Dumpsters.

11.3.5.10.1 Dumpster Location. The location of

dumpsters can have a significant visual impact and Fig. 11.34 - Enclose Dumpsters
with Walls, Fences, or Plantings
should be addressed as part of an overall building and Place on Concrete Pad.
design and incorporated in site planning (Fig. 11.34).

Page 11-16
To the greatest extent possible, incorporate dumpster
placement into areas screened with walls, fencing, or
plant material. Use recycled plastic or masonry for the
wall systems. Avoid locating dumpsters along major
circulation or use areas. Dumpsters should be directly
accessible by way of a paved service drive or parking
lot with adequate overhead clearance for collection
vehicles. Antiterrorism/force protection requirements
restrict the location of dumpsters to a minimum of 10
meters (33 feet) from inhabited buildings and 25
meters (82 feet) from billeting and primary gathering
areas (Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD
Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings).

11.3.5.10.2 Dumpster Site Design. Incorporate

plantings to buffer the visual impact of screen walls.
Walls or fencing should be a maximum 6’ in height.
Provide a minimum 3’ clearance on each side
between screen walls and dumpsters to allow
adequate pedestrian and truck access. All dumpsters
should be placed on concrete pads with aprons large
enough to encompass the bearing points of the
service vehicle.

11.3.5.11 Flagpole.

11.3.5.11.1 A single standard flagpole for Fort Lee

will be tapered mill finish aluminum, fitted with a gold
anodized finish “ball” finial. The mounting detail
should be simple with a concrete base flush at grade.
A concrete pad should be used when poles are
located in lawn areas. In plaza areas, flagpole
locations and mounting detail should be integrated
into the paving pattern. Flagpoles should include
lighting and may be accented with planting beds Fig. 11.35 - Standard Flagpole.
around the base of the flagpole.

11.3.5.11.2 Flagpole (Fig. 11.35)

x 7A. Steel Flagpole
x Material: Stainless steel pole
x Color: Clear finish, satin rubbed finish
x Application: Key ceremonial and activity
areas
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Acme Flagpole Co.
o Lingo, Inc.
o Box 1237, 28th St.

Page 11-17
 o Camden NJ 08105
o 609-964-0487
x Model No.: As required with:
o Standard foundation
o Flagclasp with thermoplastic finish
o Ball on pole top
o Polished finish #4

11.3.5.11.3 Pennant Holder (Fig. 11.36)

x 7B. Pennant Holder
x Material: Pressure-treated Wood, 4-inch
x 4-inch posts
x Application: Entrances to Barracks and
other buildings used by
trainees Fig. 11.36 - Pennant Holder.
x Zones: LT
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Fabricated on Post

11.3.5.12. Planters.

11.3. 5.12.1 Movable pre-cast concrete planters

may be used outside building entrances to provide
seasonal color and interest and function as security
threat barriers (Fig. 11.37). Planters should be located
so they block uninterrupted vehicular access to a Fig. 11.37 - Movable Planters.
building, but not so they excessively impede
pedestrian movement. Several planters of various
sizes should be grouped together to produce an
aesthetically pleasing display.

11.3. 5.12.2 Planters Sizes and Design.

x Moveable Planters
x Material: Concrete
x Color: Slate gray or Equal
x Form/Style: Attractive and Functional Planters
that have Multiple Finish Options
and Sizes.
x Application: At building entries, plazas, and
places require AT/FP barriers.
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Dura Art Stone (www.duraartstone.com)
x Model No.: Spanish S Round and SS Square

11.3. 5.13 Bicycle Racks.

Page 11-18
11.3. 5.13.1 Bicycle racks should be provided at key
destination locations. They should be located on a
concrete surface where they will not impede
pedestrian movement or block building entrances.

11.3. 5.13.2 A ribbon type tubular aluminum bike

rack with an anodized dark bronze finish is the post
standard. Bicycle storage areas near barracks should
be covered.

11.3. 5.13.2 Bike Rack (Fig. 11.38)

x 9A. Ribbon-shaped Bike Rack
x Material: Welded seamless pipe
x Color: Black finish
x Form/Style: Sinuous curved rack, embedded
below grade
x Application: At building entries out of main Fig. 11.38 - Bike Rack.
circulation areas
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Bike Security Racks
o Space Lattice Co.
o P.O. Box 371
o Cambridge, MA 02140
o 617-547-5755
x Model No.: “Bike Stanchion”, BS-B3, Mounted
Below-Grade

11.3. 5.14 Tree Grates (Fig. 11.39) Fig. 11.39 - Tree Grate.

Tree grates should be used when installing trees in

large paved areas such as pedestrian plazas, walks,
and ceremonial entrance courts. Tree grates and
planting pits should be a minimum of 5 feet x 5 feet.

x cast iron tree grate

x Material: Cast Iron
x Color: Black finish
x Form/Style: Sunrise, in halves, 1/2 maximum
slot widths for pedestrian safety.
x Application: At plazas and walkways
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
Iron Smith

Page 11-19
11.3. 5.15 Bollards.

11.3. 5.15.1 Bollards are utilized to separate

vehicular and pedestrian traffic, to direct access, or as
decorative elements in pedestrian areas. Jersey
Barriers may be installed temporarily and should be
avoided.

11.3. 5.15.2 Metal Bollard (Fig. 11.40)

x 2A. Metal Bollard

x Material: Steel Pipe with
x Steel Ball & Cap
x Color: Black
x Form/Style: Traditional pipe with ball
x Application: General use for any area
requiring circulation control.
x Zones: GW, LT, CC, TF
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Make and install on Post; 3-foot Fig. 11.40 - Bollard.
height, 6 to 8 inches diameter.

11.3. 5.15.3 Wood Bollard (Fig. 11.41)

x 2B. Wood Bollard
x Material: Wood
x Color: Natural Pressure-treated
x Form/Style: 6-inch x 6-inch square wood, cut
top on 30 degree angle
x Application: Recreational Areas, training
areas, family housing areas,
vehicular circulation control
x Zones: TF, FH, OS
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Make and install on Post. Fig. 11.41 - Wood Bollard.
11.3. 5.15.4 Concrete-filled Pipe Bollard
x 2C. Concrete Filled Pipe Bollard
x Material: Galvanized steel pipe filled with
concrete with convex top
x Color: Black colored finish
x Form/Style: Simple cylinder
x Application: Service areas, protection of
building walls, corners, where
required in less visible areas.
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:

Page 11-20
 x Make and install on post; 3-foot height, 6- to 8-
inch diameter

11.3. 5.16 Playgrounds/Tot Lots

11.3. 5.16.1 The playgrounds and tot lots within

the installation should use equipment that is
consistent throughout the installation or that meets
specific criteria of materials, color, and design.

11.3. 5.16.2 Playground Planning and Design.

Guidance for planning and designing unsupervised
outdoor play areas that meet child safety and child
development requirements is found in Technical
Manual (TM) 5-803-11, Children's Outdoor Play
Areas. The guidance given in this publication meets
the needs of children with and without disabilities.

11.3. 5.16.3 Playground Inspection and

Maintenance. A play area inspection and
maintenance program for Child Development Centers
can be found in Technical Manual (TM) 5-663, Child
Development Center, Play Area Inspection and
Maintenance Program.

11.3. 5.16.4 Recalled and Banned Playground

Equipment. For updates on banned or recalled
playground equipment consult the Consumer Product
Safety Commission Press Releases and Recalls web
site.

11.3. 5.16.5 Playground Equipment (Fig. 11.42)

x PlaySense® Designs
x Material: Steel, Tuff clad, Polyethylene
x Color: Beige tuffclad with Beige roof
x As Manufactured by or Equal to: Landscape
Structures

11.3. 5.17 Mailboxes.

Fig. 11.42 - Playground.
11.3. 5.17.1 All mailboxes should be located in
close proximity to the facility they serve. However,
when locating mailboxes consider the potential for the
site element being used as a container for the
concealment of explosive, etc. Consider
Antiterrorism/force protection requirements for

Page 11-21
locating similar container types i.e. trash receptacles
which are located a minimum of 10 meters (33 feet)
from inhabited buildings and 25 meters (82 feet) form
billeting and primary gathering areas (Unified
Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD Minimum
Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, Table B-1).

11.3. 5.17.2 The location should be coordinated

with the Postal Services.

11.3. 5.17.3 If group mailboxes are required,

provide central locations for them adjacent to hard-
surface walkways but not to impede pedestrian
movement.

11.3. 5.17.4 Cluster mailbox (Fig. 11.43)

x Regency collection. ED-B-12 Series with
Edward Top and Flame Finial
x Material: Cast and extruded Aluminum
x Color: Bronze
Fig. 11.43 - Mailbox.
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
www.mailboxes.info

11.3. 5.18 Monuments, Memorials, and Military

Equipment Static Displays.

11.3.5.18.1 Monuments and static displays should be

carefully designed and placed in prominent locations
to serve as visual focal points within the installation.
Static displays of equipment should be consolidated in
one location to create a central museum or exhibition Fig. 11.44 - Memorial Space.
facility within the installation.

11.3. 5.18.2 Memorials will conform to the guidance

set forth in Army Regulation (AR) 1-33, Memorial
Programs (Fig. 11.44).

11.3. 5.19 Drinking Fountains.

11.3. 5.19.1 Outdoor drinking fountains should

not be provided, except to support larger playgrounds,
outdoor recreation facility complexes, and outlying
recreation areas if convenient to a potable water
supply line. Steps should be provided for children and
the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility

Page 11-22
Guidelines (ADAAG) and Uniform Federal
Accessibility Standards (UFAS) standards meet.

11.3. 5.19.2 Drinking Fountain (Fig. 11.45)

x 8A. Drinking Fountain
x Material: Cast-iron base, steel standard,
chrome-plated bronze bowl, bubbler, and
mouthguard
x Color: Black finish
x Form/Style: Octagonal base and bowl.
x Application: General use as required in
pedestrian areas.
o Zones: GW, LT, CC, TF, OS
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Murdock, Inc.
o 2488 River Road Fig. 11.45 - Drinking Fountain.
o Cincinnati, Ohio 45204
o 513-471-7700
x Model No.: M-30, , Economy, Anti-freezing

11.3. 5.19.3 Handicap Drinking Fountain (Fig.

11.46)
x 8B. Drinking Fountain for
Handicapped Use
x Material: Cast aluminum
x Color: Black finish
x Form/Style: Octagonal base; handicap-
accessible
x Application: As required
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Murdock, Inc.
o 2488 River Road Fig. 11.46 - Handicap Drinking
o Cincinnati, Ohio 45204 Fountain.
o 513-471-7700
x Model No.: M-43 HOAF, Pedestal Mount
Anti-freezing

11.4 SIGNS

11.4.1 Signs are used to visually communicate

information. They are highly visible features that
should be attractive and compatible with their
surroundings. Careful consideration must be given to
what a sign says, how it is said, its visual appearance
and organization, its location, structural support
system, and relation to other signs within the

Page 11-23
installation. Standardized signage systems facilitate
movement, provide a sense of orientation, and
reinforce standards of excellence. Signage creates a
unifying element throughout the installation that
visually ties the installation themes together and
builds a reference and continuity that translates into
confidence and reassurance when traveling
throughout the installation. The standards to apply for
signage color, type, and sizing is found in Technical
Manual (TM) 5-807-10, Signage.

11.4.2 Sign System Characteristics. There are

several basic design characteristics that, by serving to
convey necessary information clearly and attractively,
are an integral part of any successful signage system.

11.4.2.1 Simplicity. An effective strategy provides

only needed information, avoids redundancy, and
eliminates over-signing with resultant clutter and
visual confusion. Sign messages must be clear,
simple, and easy for motorists to process quickly.

11.4.2.2 Continuity. It is essential that the system be

applied uniformly and consistently throughout the
entire installation. The importance of consistent
implementation extends from the larger issues of sign
type and size down to accurate color continuity and
matching typestyles.

11.4.2.3 Visibility. Sign location is a very important

ingredient within the system. Signs must be located at
significant decision points and oriented to provide
clear sight lines for the intended user. Close
coordination of locations with respect to landscaping,
utilities, adjacent signage, and various other street
design elements is important to ensure long-term
maximum visibility.

11.4.2.4 Legibility. Sign typestyle, line spacing, color,

and size all combine to create the crucial design
characteristics of legibility. This aspect of sign design
should take into consideration users such as motorist,
pedestrians, or bicyclists, and the relative travel
speed at which each type of user will be traveling
when viewing the signs.

11.4.3 Vocabulary-Communications.

Page 11-24
11.4.3.1 A common language has been created for
establishing a signing system. The different
components that create the sign package have been
named and referred to within the total signing system.

11.4.3.2 The creation of a "signing language" helps

generate a unified bond within sign types that make
up a signing family.

x Reference

o Information/Message

o Presentation

o Architectural Influence

o Graphic Architecture

11.4.4 Visual Hierarchy (Fig. 11.47).

11.4.4.1 The entire signing system must

communicate, through a range of sign and typestyle
sizes, the relative importance of the individual activity
that the sign identifies. The system should follow a
logical progression from a point of origin to the Fig. 11.47 - Signs can be
organized into classes within the
desired destination. visual hierarchy.

11.4.4.2 A stated ranking method supports the visual

standard of hierarchy within the signing system. Signs
can be organized within assigned classes with
emphasis on the function and image of the
installation.

11.4.4.3 Within each class, the level of architectural

influence evokes the importance of the sign to the
installation. This is also critical to the idea of
progression. The importance of a sign must be
presented in its size and level of detail.

11.4.4.4 As individuals move closer to their destination

on the installation, the scale of the sign becomes
progressively smaller and the level of the message Fig. 11.48 - Building mounted
more detailed. information sign.

Page 11-25
11.4.5 Types of Signs.

11.4.5.1 Information / Identification Signs (Fig.

11.48).

These are signs that identify entrances to the

installation, areas within the installation, major
tenants, buildings, and organizational or functional
components. They identify a location, and greet the
visitor to that location. They should be compatible in
scale and character with the architecture and also
blend with the natural surroundings. These signs are
designed to include the following:

11.4.5.1.1 Typeface: Lettering is self-adhesive

backing material.

x Building Title: Helvetica Medium, Upper and

lower case

x Building Numbers: Helvetica regular

x Building Addresses: Helvetica Medium,

Upper and lower case

11.4.5.1.2 Color:

x Panel: Dark Brown

x Lettering: Cream

x Post: Dark Brown

x Exposed panel backs and edges: Dark

Brown

x All paint: Semi gloss

11.4.5.1.3 Materials:

x Panel: Double-face 1/8-inch thick aluminum

x Post: Steel Pipe

Page 11-26
 x Foundation: Concrete pier or direct burial

11.4.5.1.4 Building Identification.

11.4.5.1.4.1 Street Addresses. The addressing

procedures prescribed in DoD 4525.8-M, DoD Official
Mail Manual are mandatory for use by all DoD
components. (Fig. 11.49) DoD 4525.8-M, Chapter 3
prescribes the following:

All DoD address shall be assigned so they are

compatible with the U.S. Postal Services automated
delivery point sequencing (C3.3).

The DoD installation is responsible for assigning city- Fig. 11.49 - Use Street addresses on
all building identification signs.
style, street address on the installation (C3.3.2.2).

Street addresses shall be assigned and used even

though a DoD activity may deliver the mail to the
addressee (C3.3.2.2.1) (Fig. 11.50).

Only geographically locatable civilian-style street

address (such as 4102 Cindy Avenue) shall be used
(C3.3.2.2.4).

Installations shall not use one street address for the

entire installation and then use secondary unit
designators such as "Building 123" to designate the
delivery addresses on the installation (C3.3.2.2.5).

Addresses such as "Building 123 Roberts Street" are Fig. 11.50 - Bronze anodized metal
sign at CASCOM.
not a valid address format and shall not be used
(C3.3.2.2.6).

11.4.5.1.4.2 Address Placement.

Place addresses by the front entrance of the building

so they can be seen (C3.3.2.3.1).

Fort Lee buildings have the building number on the

corner of the building structure.

Building identification signs will use street addresses.

Buildings without identification signs shall have the

address number and street name centered above the
main entrance or located to the right side.

Page 11-27
11.4.5.1.5 Housing Areas.

11.4.5.1.5.1 The sign should be complimentary to

the architectural setting of the housing area and
approved by the installation Real Property Planning
Board (Fig. 11.51).

11.4.5.1.5.2 Housing numbers should be placed on

the house where lighting will effectively light the
numbering.

11.4.5.1.6 Installation Identification Signs.

11.4.5.1.6.1 Installation identification signs name the Fig. 11.51 - Brick sign at Jackson
installation and display the official US Army plaque. Circle.
The designation "United States Army" must appear at
the top of the sign in accordance with AR 420-70,
para 2-7h. Every installation entrance shall have an
installation identification sign displaying only the US
Army plaque, with the words "United States Army,
Fort (Name of Fort), and gate name as indicated in
"Figure 11.53 - Installation Entrance Signs". The
placement of Senior Mission Commander logo, unit
crest, and other installation identification signs,
monuments, or displays shall be located inside the
installation beyond the cleared area of the Access
Control Point (ACP) of entry. When used service-
Fig. 11.52 - Fort Lee Installation
wide, these signs convey a uniform image of strength Entrance Sign.
and stability to the public. Emblems, branch colors,
unit mottos, names, and titles of individuals are not to
be displayed (Fig. 11.52).

11.4.5.1.6.2 Installation identification signs consist of

three types:

x Sign type A1, main entrance sign, identifies

the principal visitor entrance (Fig. 11.53).

x Sign type A2, secondary entrance sign,

identifies entry points with relatively high
volumes of visitor traffic.

x Sign type A3, limited access entry gate Fig. 11.53 - Building sign at Fort Lee.
signs, identifies entry points with limited
public access.

Page 11-28
11.4.5.1.6.3 See Technical Manual (TM) 5-807-10,
Signage, paragraph 3-3, for sign
specifications and paragraph 3-11 for sign
placement guidelines.

x Identification signs are those that state the

name of the building or facility at that
location. Permanent signs are installed at
permanent buildings.

x Directional signs point the way to a

destination with an arrow (Fig. 11.54).

x Directory signs are those that list a series of

destinations within a building or in an area
of the post, and may serve as secondary
information to an identification sign (Fig.
11.55).

x Informational signs convey other general

messages such as schedules, policies or
regulations.
Fig. 11.54 - Typical Directional
x Mandatory signs carry imperative regulatory Signage at Fort Lee.
messages such as warnings and
restrictions; and, must have prior approval
from DOL/DPW Traffic Review Board.

x Regulatory signs are to be accomplished by

DOL/DPW only. Overhead Passage signs
are to be accomplished by DOL/DPW only

x Motivational signs are those that carry

inspirational slogans to support training and
morale; and, except for ‘Army Values’
signs, display is limited to 30 days.

11.4.5.1.7 Street Signs.

Street name identification signs should be designed

with the same lettering, color, and materials as other
information signs.
Fig. 11.55 - Direction Sign with
11.4.5.1.8 Wheeled/ Hobo Electrical Signs. Arrows on Left Side Only.

Wheeled electrical signs will have an attractive

presentation. Temporary landscape elements should

Page 11-29
not be used whenever possible. The siting of this type
of sign will be approved by the RPPB. This type of
sign should not be used or used longer than six (6)
months. After which time, the sign will be removed or
turned into a permanent sign.

Page 11-30
Table 11.2 Sign Matrix

Type of Message Required

Mandatory/Prohibitory
Informational Signs
Permitted

Motivational Signs
Directional Signs

Directory Signs
Permitted on

Identification
Secondary Sign Board
Only

Signs
Type of Sign (DC 6.2):

A1

A2

A3

A4

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

B10

C1

C2

Page 11-31
11.4.5.1.9 Directional Signs.

These signs guide the motorist or pedestrian in,

around, and out of the installation. The legibility and
placement of these signs, as well as the ordering of
information, is critical to their effectiveness. These
signs should be placed in central locations and at
major decision points along circulation routes. These
signs are designed to include the following:

11.4.5.1.9.1 Typeface: Lettering is self-adhesive

backing material.

x Helvetica Medium upper and lower case

11.4.5.1.9.2 Arrow:
Fig. 11.56 - Typical Arrow For Use
x Place at end indicating direction On All Destination Signs.
(Fig. 11.56).

x Stoke width: Helvetica Medium cap

x Fort Lee prefers that the arrow be placed

on the left side of the sign.

11.4.5.1.9.3 Color:

x Panel: Dark Brown

x Lettering: White

x Post: Dark Brown

x Exposed panel backs and edges: Dark

Brown

x All paint: Semi gloss

11.4.5.1.9.4 Materials:

x Panel: Double-face 1/8” thick aluminum

x Post: Steel Pipe

x Foundation: Concrete pier or direct burial

11.4.5.1.10 Regulatory Signs.

Page 11-32
These signs provide the rules for travel and parking
on the installation. They include speed signs, turning
and lane use signs, warning signs, parking control
signs, etc. Related to these signs are pavement
markings and traffic signals. These signs are
designed to include the following (Fig. 11.57):

11.4.5.1.10.1 Typeface: Lettering is self-adhesive

backing material.

x Helvetica Medium upper and lower case

11.4.5.1.10.2 Color:

x Panel: Dark Brown

x Lettering: White

x Post: Dark Brown

Fig. 11.57 - Regulatory Sign.
x Exposed panel backs and edges: Dark
Brown

x All paint: Semi gloss

11.4.5.1.10.3 Materials:

x Panel: Double-face 1/8” thick aluminum

x Post: Steel Pipe

x Foundation: Concrete pier or direct burial

11.4.5.1.11 Traffic Control Signs.

11.4.5.1.11.1 CONUS Installations. National highway

standards will be used for signs to regulate vehicular
traffic on CONUS installation (AR 420-72,
Transportation Infrastructure and Dams, Para 2-15f).
These standards are described in the Manual of
Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). Also see
MTMC Pamphlet 55-14, Traffic Engineering for Better
Signs and Markings. This pamphlet clarifies existing
standards and provides definite guidelines for
installation officials to conform to the MUTCD. These Fig. 11.58 - Sign should be Simple,
standards shall be used installation wide to include Legible, and Combined.
installation Access Control Points (Fig. 11.58).

Page 11-33
11.4.5.1.11.2 OCONUS Installations. OCONUS
installation streets and roads are to be considered
extensions of the road system of the host nation and
shall use traffic control device standards and criteria
of the host nation (AR 420-72, Transportation
Infrastructure and Dams, Para 2-15e).

11.4.5.1.11.3 Prohibitory (Warning) Signs. This

category of signage is intended to maintain security
and safety on the installation perimeter and at other
specific secure areas. These signs notify visitors of
restrictions, as well as other security procedures. The
guidelines for design, fabrication, and placement of
warning signs are found in Technical Manual (TM) 5-
807-10, Signage, para 3-9.

11.4.5.1.12 Electronic Exterior Signs

All exterior flashing signs, traveling lights, or signs

animated by lights of changing degrees of intensity or
color are prohibited.

11.4.7 Sign Placement

Placement of signs differs according to the type of

sign and the specific site constraints. The following
guidelines apply to placement of the majority of signs.

Do not place more than one sign at any location.

Traffic rules are the exception to this rule.
Fig. 11.59 - Placement Is Critical
Place signs in areas free of visual clutter and To Ensure Easy Readability.
landscape materials.

Place signs in locations that allow enough time for the

user to read and react to the message (Fig. 11.59).

Signs should not be placed to block sight lines at

intersections.

Place signs approximately 1.2 meters (4 feet) above

ground level to be within 10 degrees the driver’s line
of vision. Provide proper placement to avoid a hazard
to children.

Page 11-34
11.4.8 Sign System Typography.

11.4.8.1 Military Emblems. The Army has a rich

tradition of military heraldry. Military emblems are an
important part of the soldiers' identity and the
emblems have been carefully crafted over the years
to express unit pride and unique history and function
of the unit. The care and use of organizational
emblems in a signage system can add visual interest
as well as build pride and a sense of history.
However, the overuse of miscellaneous emblems can
lead to clutter and a dilution of their importance.
Colors for military emblems must be in accordance
with the Institute of Heraldry.

11.4.8.2 Department of the Army Plaque. The

plaque should be displayed on installation
identification signage to emphasize the heritage and
professionalism of the United States Army. The
design of the plaque must be in accordance with
Army Regulation (AR) 840-1, Department of the Army
Seal, and Department of the Army Emblem and
Branch of Service Plaques, and must be reproduced
in full color.

11.4.8.3 Insignias. The use of branch insignia,

shoulder sleeve insignia, coat of arms and/or
distinctive insignia on headquarters signs is permitted.
All military emblems must appear in full color.
Motivational symbols or motifs will not be used.

11.4.9 Reduce Visual Clutter.

11.4.9.1 Over-signing detracts form a uniform sign

system and if left uncontrolled will eventually destroy
the integrity of the system.

11.4.9.2 Clutter creates confusion and

ineffectiveness. Often motorist and pedestrians are
confused by the bombardment of messages that have
no relationship to each other, or the communication is
Fig. 11.60 - Visual Clutter Causes
on such a minimal level that the sign serves no Confusion.
purpose (Fig. 11.60).

Page 11-35
11.4.10 Location Maps.

11.4.10.1 The location map is an integral element of

an installation entrance. The location map display
provides information and sense of place to the viewer.
The design and construction should be of compatible
architectural materials found throughout the
installation (Fig. 11.61).

11.4.10.2 The location map should contain the Fig. 11.61 Location Maps Provide
following characteristics within the design. a Sense of Place.

x Plexiglas covered map for protection

x Architectural compatible materials used for

the base

x Paved walk-up area

x Litter receptacle

x Provide parking adjacent

x Provide current takeaway maps

11.5 LIGHTING

11.5.1 Lighting is a functional requirement of

installations that also impacts the visual environment.
All exterior street lighting systems are owned and
maintained by Dominion Power of Virginia. The
installation lighting system conveys a sense of order
and organization. There are five primary types of
lighting on military installations. They are:

x Roadway Lighting

x Pedestrian Lighting (Fig. 11.62)

x Parking Lot Lighting

x Outdoor Architectural Lighting Fig. 11.62 - Pedestrian Light Fixture

in a Family Housing Area.

x Security Lighting

11.5.2 The primary visual problem that exists with

exterior lighting on most military installations has been
the lack of overall coordination of a lighting system.

Page 11-36
11.5.3 A lighting system provides the proper type of
lighting for different lighting requirements and
locations. A system is composed of six primary
components – fixtures, light height, type of pole, light
spacing, type of lamp, and level of intensity of lamp.

11.5.4 The exterior lighting system on the installation

provides visual impressions from both a functional as
well as a perceptual point of view. Daytime pedestrian
and vehicular activity is concentrated in certain visual
zones, especially the Living Training, Community
Services and Service/Support zones. Because Fort
Lee is an installation with open spaces infiltrating it
throughout and surrounded by a forest edge, activity
concentration would become more apparent at night
due to differences in required light levels. Some
zones (i.e. Tenant Facilities) would seem separated
from the rest of the post if surrounded by open
spaces. What appears to be an open, campus-like
environment psychologically changes personalities
somewhat in the evening.

11.5.5 As is generally the case in the evening, the

after office-hour syndrome occurs when many of the
operations and facilities are closed and personnel
have left the premises. Additionally, vehicular traffic is
reduced and, what was hours earlier an active
campus now becomes a somewhat vacated
environment.

11.5.6 Compounding this situation is the fact that the

evening brings darkness and a uniform reduction of
post visibility and presence. In recent years, there has
also been a policy of reducing the night time exterior
light levels to conform to energy conservation
directives. In general, at night it is more difficult to
orient oneself around the post than in the daytime
environment.

11.5.7 In the evening, the lighting concentration would

occur in residential areas for both barracks-type
housing and family housing. Community facilities in
use would be lighted and important buildings,
monuments and gateways would be highlighted.
Activity areas would be linked by lighted roadways,
with the lighting level reflecting the roadway hierarchy.

Page 11-37
11.5.8 The street luminaries, which in daylight
receded into the tree and facade backdrop, become
visible at night (as points of light) and set the new
scale for the post. The visual quality of the light (which
is low pressure sodium) is also negatively affected by
the energy concerns. The relatively low light output
and very distorted yellow/orange light quality casts a
peculiar veil over the post at night.

11.5.9 Additional security lighting is needed,

especially in storage areas and within the
Service/Support and Tenant Facility zones. This is
particularly important on an open post with public
highways penetrating its perimeters.

11.5.10 Lighting Lamp Types

11.5.10.1 There exist a number of light sources

available for exterior lighting. The following is a simple
description of each type. This information is general
only; for specific application more detailed design will
be required:

x Low Pressure Sodium - This light source is

very energy-efficient but puts out a very low
level of light. The color rendition from the light
is yellow/ orange and visually reflects plants
and people poorly.

x High Pressure Sodium - This light source is

very efficient, relatively long-lived, with a high
lighting level. The color rendition is pink/
orange which is not particularly flattering to
plants or people. This is recommended for the
public highways going through the post on the
perimeters.

x Mercury Vapor - The mercury vapor lamp is the

longest-lived of any of the sources mentioned
here. It is not as efficient as the high pressure
sodium and produces lower lighting levels. The
color of the light produced is bluish/green and
not complimentary to people or plants,
although it is not as offensive as high pressure
sodium light. Color corrected mercury vapor is
even less offensive and should be used instead
of mercury vapor.

Page 11-38
 x Metal Halide - Metal halide is between mercury
vapor and high pressure sodium in both
efficiency and longevity. It has good color
rendition and is not psychologically offensive to
people.

x Incandescent - This lamp type has the most

pleasing color of all light sources. However, low
efficiency and short life span limit its use
except in special areas where its warm color
rendition characteristics are required.

11.5.10.2 Required illumination levels are

determined by the amount of nighttime activity that
will take place in a given area. Primary streets will be
bright lit than secondary streets.

11.5.10.3 Housing areas should be lit at the

lowest level allowed for safety. Standards for foot-
candle levels should be followed for the different use
areas with allowances for special conditions and will
require specific engineering/ design studies.

11.5.11 Lighting Recommendations

11.5.11.1 Our recommendations at this point in

time are broad brush in nature and discuss solutions
in a generic sense. In an effort to comprehend these
recommendations, it is important to understand a
basic physical requirement which is: light to see by as
distinguished from light you see. This physical
requirement calls for sufficient light without distraction
and with appropriate direction and diffusion. It is a
simple requirement, but within its general framework,
the precise amount and placement of light (not
fixtures) will vary widely according to the demands.

11.5.11.2 Light Source/Lamp Type

Recommendations

x A single light source type should be used

throughout an entire visual zone and preferably
throughout the entire street and roadway
system.

x Color-corrected Mercury Vapor or Metal Halide

is recommended for the entire post but

Page 11-39
 especially the higher visibility areas of the
Gateway, Community Center, Living/Training
and Tenant Facilities areas.

x Incandescent light should be utilized in the

Family Housing Zone associated with a
surface-mounted house light program.

11.5.11.3 Lighting Application

x *Appropriate fixture types are described in

detail in the following pages of this section.

x *In general terms more emphasis should be

placed on illuminating building facades,
especially the more symbolic and significant
architectural structures and portions of the
Headquarters area. This will have both a
symbolic visual improvement effect, as well as
an improved security impact.

x *Lighting should be reflected off building

facades rather than light sources being
mounted on and shining away from building
facades. Reflected light has a much more
beneficial impact and should be carefully
placed to minimize offensive glare.

x All lighting should be located or designed to

prevent undesirable spillover of light into other
areas. Spotlights in particular should be aimed
or screened to prevent glare that could blind
motorists or pedestrians or light sleeping
areas.

11.5.11.4 The proper type of lighting for various

locations is shown in the Summary Lighting Design
Matrix (Table 11.2) and the Lighting Design Matrix
(Table 11.3)

11.5.11.5 Selection of Fixtures

The following matrix table is a summary of the light

fixtures to be used on post within the appropriate
visual zones. The three columns below contain the

Page 11-40
following information: Light Fixture (General
Description), Application, and appropriate Visual
Zone. Though there may be exceptions to Application
and Visual Zone, the matrix may be used as a general
guide followed by more detailed information on
installation and location.

Table 11.2 Summary Lighting Design Matrix

Item Visual Zone Application

G L T
CS IA FH OS
W T F

1. Square

A. Cutoff Luminaries Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ 1A. Roadways and

Walkways

B. Single Luminaries Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ 1B. Parking Lot,

Perimeter and Service
Areas

C. Double Luminaries Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ 1C. Parking Lot Islands

2. Light Bollard Aluminum Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Plaza and Courtyards

3. Flood Lights Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ

Recreational Fields

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Security Lighting
4. Accent Lighting

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ceremonial Areas and

Monuments

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Architectural
Highlighting

Page 11-41
Table 11.3 Light Design Matrix
TYPICAL AREAS OF USE

Secondary Walkways/Bikeways
Primary Walkways/Bikeways

Tertiary Walkways/Bikeways
LIGHT

Secondary Roadways
DESIGN

Signs & Monuments

Primary Roadways

Large Parking Lots

Small Parking Lots

Tertiary Roadways

Fence Parameters
Basketball Courts

Training areas
Tennis Courts
MATRIX

Landscaping
Playgrounds
Entry Gates

Courtyards

Ball fields

Buildings
Incandescent x
Halogen x x
Mercury Vapor x x x x x x x x x x x
LAMP

Florescent

Metal Halide x x x x x x x x x x x x x
High Pressure
Sodium x x x x x x x x x x
LEVEL

Lux (lx) 20 15 10 10 2 50 200 200 50

Foot-candles 2 1.4 0.9 0.9 0.2 5 10 20 5.6 0.2 1 1 1
(fc)

40' Max x x x x x x
HEIGHT

25' Max x x x x x x x
15' Max x x
Varies x x x x x x x

Cutoff x x x x x
Utility x x x
FIXTURE

Bollard

Spot x x
Wall Mount

Metal x x x x x
POLE

Wood x

120' Max x x x x x
SPACED

90' Max x
Varies x x x

Page 11-42
11.5.11.6 Light Fixtures.

11.5.11.6.1 A lighting fixture is the frame or housing

for holding the lamp in position and for protecting it
from damage. Light fixtures should be selected and
located to maintain the minimum foot-candle
requirements for safety and security purposes.
Beyond that, aesthetic considerations should take
precedence.

11.5.11.6.2 Lighting fixtures are grouped into five

general categories as defined below includes
examples of four of the categories.

11.5.11.6.3 Cutoff Lighting. Fig. 11.65 - Example of Cutoff,

Bollard, Wall and Spot Lighting.
Refers to the large shoebox-shaped fixtures placed on
tall poles and used to illuminate streets and parking
lots. They are designed to cut off light traveling to the
top and sides of the fixtures, concentrating it down
onto the parking lot. The fixtures reduce the spillover
of light where it is not wanted (Fig. 11.65).

11.5.11.6.3.1 Single-, Double-mount Cut-off Fixtures

x Description Square, cut-off fixture
x Material: Cast aluminum pole and housing
x Color: Black finish on all parts
x Application: Roadways – single mount
x Parking Lots - single mount on periphery;
double mount within parking lots in curbed
islands as required (Fig. 11.66)
x Walkways – single mount (See Application
Section for height range of fixtures)
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Kim Lighting by Kidde
o 16555 E. Gale Ave.
o P.O. Box 1275
o Industry
o California 91749
o 818-330-3861
x Model No.: Series - CCL 329,325,
o 320 or 529, 525, 520;
o PBCI or PCCL Poles with optional Fig. 11.66 - Single Mount (to 0 and
Lexan Shield Double Mount Cut-Off Fixtures.

Page 11-43
11.5.11.6.4 Utility Lighting.

Refer to simple, inexpensive fixtures that are used in

industrial areas of low visibility.

11.5.11.6.5 Bollard Lighting.

Refer to fixtures that are mounted on or in a short

post to illuminate pedestrian areas. They can also be
used as physical barriers between pedestrian and
vehicular traffic.

11.5.11.6.5.1 Light Bollard.

x Fixture Contemporary, Cylindrical
x Description Light Bollard (Fig. 11.67)
x Material: Cast Aluminum
x Color: Black finish clear Polycarbonate
diffuser
x Application: Pedestrian areas
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Sterner Lighting Systems, Inc.
o Winstead Minnesota 55395
o 612-485-2141
x Model No.: Annapolis Round, ART - 12” Dia.
Fig. 11.67 - Light Bollard.
Bollard, Ht. - 36”

11.5.11.6.5.2 Floodlights
x Description Floodlights
x Application: As required for recreational fields,
high security areas
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o GTF Sylvania
o Lithonia Lighting
o North American
o Phillips
o Prescolite
o Progress Lighting
o Sentry Electric

11.5.11.6.6 Spotlighting.

Refers to high intensity fixtures that concentrate light

into a narrow beam and are used to highlight signs
and other important objects. Spotlights should be
screened by landscaping or other methods so they
are inconspicuous during the day.

Page 11-44
11.5.11.6.6.1 Accent Lights
x Application: Ceremonial areas,
monuments, any site of building feature
requiring highlighting
x As Manufactured by or Equal to:
o Kim Lighting by Kidde
o 16555 E. Gale Ave.
o P.O. Box 1275
o Industry, California 91749
o 818-330-3861

11.5.11.6.6.2 Light fixtures should be selected to

provide accent lighting for significant structures and
monuments. Fixtures should be screened from view
as much as possible.

11.5.11.6.6.3 Wall-Mounted Lighting.

Refers to fixtures attached to the wall of a building or

a wall bordering a walkway or stairway.
Fig. 11.68 - Pole height
11.5.11.7 Light Poles determined by function.

11.5.11.7.1 The light fixture size should be

proportional to the intended pole height (Fig. 11.68).

11.5.11.7.2 Reserved-To be completed when light

poles for Fort Lee are identified.

11.5.11.8 Light Fixtures and Poles.

Light poles should be consistent and provide

uniformity throughout the installation. The pole height
shall be determined by their intended function as
shown below.

11.5.11.9 Lamp Characteristics.

Selection of a lamp involves evaluating its optical

control, efficiency, lamp color rendition, lamp life, cost,
and maintenance. The following is a summary of the
characteristics of typical lamp types (Fig. 11.69).
Fig. 11.69 - Lamp Characteristics.
11.5.11.9.1 Incandescent
x Superior color rendition
x Inexpensive

Page 11-45
 x Good optical control
x Short life span
x Lowest efficiency

11.5.11.9.2 High Pressure Sodium

x Poor color rendition
x Broad application
x Low maintenance
x Superior optical control
x Superior life span
x Excellent efficiency
x Expensive

11.5.11.9.3 Low Pressure Sodium

x Poor color rendition
x Good efficiency
x Superior life span
x Expensive

11.5.11.9.4 Fluorescent
x Good color rendition
x Poor optical control
x Good life span
x Good efficiency in mild climates
x Produces glare

11.5.11.9.5 Metal Halide

x Superior color rendition
x Superior optical control
x Efficiency better than mercury vapor but
poorer than pressure sodium.
x Expensive

11.5.11.9.6 Mercury Vapor

x Good color rendition
x Good foliage lighting
x Good life span
x Good efficiency
x Inexpensive

Page 11-46
11.6 UTILITIES

11.6.1 Utility systems provide the basic

infrastructure of power, communication, water, and
sewer services necessary for the operation of the
installation. Utilities play a key role in the visual quality
on an installation. Their primary impact on the visual
quality is the result of the clutter of overhead utility
lines and poorly designed storm drainage systems.

11.6.2 The visual and environmental impact of

utilities should be minimized on the installation. Also,
the systems should be designed to minimize
maintenance and repair. The result is a more
sustainable utility system that will promote the overall
sustainability of the installation. The primary
components of the utility system and
recommendations for their location and design are
included below (Fig. 11.70).

11.6.3 Overhead Transmission Lines

11.6.3.1 Unsightly overhead utilities should be

relocated underground wherever possible to reduce
negative visual impacts, and reduce maintenance and
repair requirements. Underground utilities are also
desirable for protection from terrorist or other enemy
attack. When underground locations are not possible,
the negative visual impacts should be minimized by
using the following design techniques:
Fig. 11.70 - Screen existing utilities
11.6.3.2 Overhead Transmission Lines Location. to decrease visual impact.

11.6.3.2.1 Overhead transmission lines should be

aligned along edges of land use areas to avoid
dividing an area and creating gaps or unusable areas.
They should conform to natural landforms that can be
utilized to screen them from public view. Hills should
be crossed obliquely rather than at right angles.
Alignments along hillcrests or steep grades should be
avoided (Fig. 11.71).

11.6.3.2.2 Unsightly overhead utilities in high-visibility

areas are to be relocated underground wherever
possible. This program should be implemented as
new development projects provide opportunities for
Fig. 11. 71 - Not Recommended.
relocation of electric and telephone lines.

Page 11-47
11.6.3.2.3 Recommendation A: Underground Lines.

x Lines are to be buried in grass strip along curb,

minimizing conflicts with paving, lighting and
street trees (Fig. 11.72).

x Service to individual buildings underground;

meters (when required) on side or rear walls.

x Transformers to be ground-mounted in low-

visibility locations.
Fig. 11.72 - Recommendation A.
11.6.3.2.4 Recommendation B: Setback behind
street trees, or to rear of buildings (Fig. 11.73).

x Set back utility poles 20-feet to 30-feet from

roadway and screen with row of street trees
(40-feet o.c.).

11.6.4 Roadway Lighting

11.6.4.1 Installation with poles adjacent to a walkway

x Place pole a minimum of 2-feet from edge of
walkway (Fig. 11.74).
x Pole adjacent to curb street
Fig. 11.73 - Recommendation B.
x Place pole a minimum of 3-feet from back of
curb.
x Spacing of poles will be determined by light
source and layout pattern; follow
manufacturer's specifications.

11.6.4.2 Pole Height & Spacing Guidelines

11.6.4.2.1 Varying assumptions of light source and

placement will affect pole placement and height.
Assume here one side of road only, 1.0 footcandles,
single mount and high pressure sodium light source.

x Primary Road or Highway (Road width + 50' )

o Pole Height: 30'- 40'
o Pole Spacing: 130' o.c. Fig. 11.74 - Light Pole Adjacent to
o 250 Watt light source Walkway.

x Secondary Road (Road width +40')

o Pole Height: 25'- 30'
o Pole Spacing: 115' o.c.
o 200 Watt light source

Page 11-48
 x Tertiary Road (Road width +35')
o Pole Height: 15'- 20'
o Pole Spacing: 100' o.c.
o (100 Watt light source)

11.6.5 Parking Lot and Pedestrian Lighting.

11.6.5.1 Place a light pole at perimeter of lot, a

minimum of 3' from edge of curb. Fixtures at
perimeter should be single-mounted (Fig. 11.75).

11.6.5.2 Place double-mounted fixtures on interior

planting islands between parking bays. Pole should
be a minimum of 3' from edge of curb.

11.6.5.3 Where no planting island exists, light pole

should be placed on 3' high round concrete pier or Fig. 11.75 - Light Pole Adjacent to
protected with pipe ballards. Street.

11.6.5.4 Spacing of poles will be determined by

light source and layout pattern; follow manufacturer's
specifications.

11.6.5.5 Pole Height & Spacing Guidelines

11.6.5.5.1 Parking Areas. Varying assumptions on

light source and placement will affect pole placement
and height. Assume here double-mounted fixture,
high pressure sodium, and 2 footcandles.
x Parking Lot
o Pole Height: 25’-30’
o Pole Spacing: 100’-150’ o.c.

11.6.5.5.2 Pedestrian Areas. Varying assumptions on

light source and placement will affect pole placement
and height. Follow manufacturer's specifications.
Assume here a high pressure sodium light source,
single-mounted fixture and 2-5 footcandles.
x Pedestrian Areas
o Pole Height: 10’-15’
o Pole Spacing: 50’-55’ o.c.

Page 11-49
11.6.6 View Screening.

Minimize long views or silhouette views of overhead

transmission lines from along roads and other public
viewing areas (Fig. 11.76). Avoid the “tunnel effect” of
long, straight, uninterrupted views along the alignment
by clearing vegetation only within the right-of-way that
threatens the overhead lines. Jog the alignment at
road crossings and periodically undulate and feature
plant materials along the edges of the right-of-way.

11.6.7 Distribution Lines.

Power distribution lines should also be located

underground to minimize negative visual impact,
Fig. 11.76 - Screen Utilities to
reduce maintenance, and protect from terrorist or
Reduce Negative Impact.
other enemy attack. If overhead, they should be
located out of view from main public visibility areas or
screened to be as unobtrusive as possible. Avoid
alignments of overhead lines along major circulation
corridors. Use minor streets, alleyways, rear lot lines,
and vegetation or topography that provide screening
and minimize visual impact. Minimize the number of
poles and pole height, and use poles that blend into
their surroundings to reduce visual impact. Poles
should also be multi-functional for power, telephone,
cable television, street lighting, etc., to reduce visual
clutter.

11.6.8 Substations and Transformers.

Substations and transformers should be designed and

located to minimize their visual impact and be
compatible with the character of their setting.
Substations are best located in industrial use areas
rather than in major public circulation areas. They
should be screened from public view by using plant
material, berms, and walls.

11.6.9 Sewer and Water.

11.6.9.1 All sewer and water lines should be

underground.

Page 11-50
11.6.9.2 Sewage treatment facilities should be
located 1,250 feet (0.38 Km) distance and in a
downwind direction from all inhabited facilities.

11.6.9.3 Treatment facilities should be screened

from view of major roads and other installation
facilities by plant material, berms, walls, and fences.

11.6.9.4 A water storage tank that has visual

strength in its form can be used as a focal point or
identifying landmark that can provide a sense of
orientation within the installation.

11.6.9.5 Fire hydrants should be highly visible and

free of any screening. They shell be red in color with
luminous paint. Caps shall indicate tested water
pressure (Fig. 11.77).

11.6.9.6 Backflow prevention devices are required on Fig. 11.77 - Fire hydrants shall be
red. caps shall indicate tested Water
all new construction water supply service piping and
pressure.
for areas that exclude building occupants such as
mechanical rooms, testing laboratories, etc. To verify
these locations contact DPWL/DOL Master Planner.

11.6.10 Storm Drainage

11.6.10.1 Installation storm drainage systems should

be appropriate to the character of development they
serve. Storm drainage systems in densely developed
areas require curbs, gutters, and underground lines.
Storm drainage systems in low-density areas can
utilize drainage swales and ditches that are contoured
to be compatible with the natural landform. Low
Impact Development (LID) techniques should be used
where retention ponds are required, and they should
be designed to appear as a natural amenity that is
part of the natural contour of the land, rather than a
square or rectangular hole in the ground. Retention
ponds that are designed to be dry most of the time
can be utilized for recreational purposes or as open
space. In either case, the areas should be designed
to conform to the natural contours of the land.

11.6.10.2 Large hard surfaced parking lots should

have covered drainage at the entry to prevent water
draining into adjacent streets.

Page 11-51
Table 11.5 - Utilities Matrix

This matrix is a brief summary of the existing and

proposed utilities on post, and how they are to be
screened or relocated within each visual zone.

Item Visual Zone Action to be Taken

G L T
CS IA FH OS
W T F

1. Existing Overhead Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ A. Wherever possible,

Utilities place utility lines
underground.

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ B. Where underground
placement is not
possible, relocate to the
rear of buildings and in
service areas.

2. New Utilities Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ A. Locate

underground
wherever feasible.

3. Existing/New Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ A. Near buildings locate

Transformers and to the rear and/or rear
Substation service areas; screen
with walls, fences,
berms, or planting. Size
of unit to be as small as
possible.

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ B. Along roadways,
screen from view with
berms, plantings, and
fencing. Use existing
vegetation for screening
as much as possible.
4. HVAC Units Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ A. Locate within service
areas or to rear of
buildings. Screen

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ B. Window AC units
should be eliminated in
all zones.

Page 11-52
 Item Visual Zone Action to be Taken

G L T
CS IA FH OS
W T F

5. Storm Inlets Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Install bike-proof grates

6. Existing Drainage Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ A. Eliminate where
Ditches possible by
underground piping to
meet drainage
requirements.

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ B. Use grass swales

with lawn inlets where
drainage requirements
are not great

Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ C. Use Low Impact

Development Strategy
in the areas of
significant pavement.

11.7 ARMY STANDARDS

The cited Army Standards shall be met.

x DoD 4525.8-M, DoD Official Mail Manual

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-49, Utility

Services

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-70, Buildings

and Structures

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-72,

Transportation Infrastructure and Dams

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility

Guidelines (ADAAG)

x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

(UFAS)

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-807-10, Signage

Page 11-53
 x Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD)

x MTMC Pamphlet 55-14, Traffic Engineering

for Better Signs and Markings

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01,

DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for
Buildings

11.8 REFERENCES

The following references are provided for guidance.

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01,

Installation Design, Chap 11

x Army Regulation (AR) 1-33, Memorial

Programs

x Army Regulation (AR) 840-1, Department of

the Army Seal, and Department of the Army
Emblem and Branch of Service Plaques

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-663, Child

Development Center, Play Area Inspection
and Maintenance Program

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-803-5, Installation

Design Manual

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-803-11/Air Force

AFJMAN 32-10139, Children's Outdoor
Play Areas

x Low Impact Development (LID)-

http://www.nao.usace.army.mil/

Links
Go to Section 12
Go to Table of
Contents

Page 11-54
SECTION 12

FORCE PROTECTION DESIGN

STANDARDS
12.1 INTRODUCTION

12.1.1 Accommodating the need for security and

antiterrorism is a significant concern for military
facilities design. The security and antiterrorism
requirements must be integrated into the total project.
Design of protective elements should seek to visually
enhance and complement the design of a facility. Site
elements such as fences, courtyards, screen walls,
swales, berms, planters, and retaining walls can be
used effectively for facility protection. These design
elements should be designed to provide visual
harmony with the main facility, producing architectural
compatibility through consistent use and application of
materials, forms, and colors (Figure 12.1).

12.1.2 Final design decisions to meet security and

antiterrorism requirements and resolve conflicts will
require coordination among the design disciplines and
appropriate functional areas to include land planners,
landscape architects, architects, intelligence
personnel, security personnel, Force Protection
Officer, facility users, and engineers. The designers
must work to balance force protection requirements
with all other requirements that impact design and
development. These include the Americans with Fig. 12.1 - Fence along Lee and
Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG), the Adams Avenues separating Fort
Lee from the National Park.
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS),
National Fire Protection Codes (NFPA), and all
applicable local building codes and ordinances. The
design team will also consult security personnel to
determine whether portions of the design documents
are subject to access limitations.

Page 12-1
12.2 BUILDING SITING AND DESIGN
STANDARDS

12.2.1 A primary concern for Army installations

throughout the world is the threat of terrorist attack.
To minimize the likelihood of mass casualties from
terrorist attacks against DoD personnel in the
buildings in which they work and live DoD has
developed the Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-
01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for
Buildings.

12.2.1.1 UFC 4-010-01 establishes the minimum

building antiterrorism standards for all DoD
components.

x Mandatory DoD minimum antiterrorism

standards for new and existing inhabited
buildings are contained in Appendix B.
Fig. 12.2 - TA-5 development
x Mandatory DoD minimum antiterrorism implements mandatory standards
standards for expeditionary and temporary for new construction.
structures are contained in Appendix D.

x Additional recommended measures for new

and existing, inhabited buildings are
contained in Appendix C.

Implementation of the mandatory standards is

obligatory for all new construction regardless of the
funding source. These standards apply to FY 2004,
and all subsequent fiscal years, for projects involving
new construction and major renovations for inhabited
structures. The standards will be reviewed before any
site planning or design is initiated (Fig. 12.2).

12.2.1.2 Minimum Standoff Distances and

Separation for Buildings:

x The minimum standoff distances and

separation for new and existing buildings
are found in Table B-1 of UFC 4-010-01.

x The minimum standoff distances and

separation for expeditionary and temporary

Page 12-2
 structures are found in Table D-1 of UFC 4-
010-01.

12.2.1.3 The DoD minimum standards, when

applicable, may be supplemented by more stringent
force protection building standards to meet specific
threats inherent in the geographical area where the
facility is to be constructed. Those additional
requirements may be established by either standards
for specific Combatant Commanders or based on
Risk and/or Threat Analysis.

12.2.1.4 When the minimum standoff distances can

not be achieved because land is unavailable, the
standards allow for building hardening to mitigate
blast effects. Costs and requirements for building
hardening will be are addressed in the DoD Security
Engineering Manual. (See paragraph 12.2.2 below for
Fig. 12.3 - Existing building
information regarding the DoD Security Engineering
requires hardening due to
Manual) (Fig. 12.3). unobtainable stand off distances.

12.2.2 Implementing Design Guidance. Additional

guidance on applying the DoD Minimum Antiterrorism
Standards for Buildings will be found in UFC 4-010-
02, DoD Security Engineering Manual. Currently, this
document is in draft form. Until the DoD Security
Engineering Manual is published, see the guidance
provided on the Security Engineering Working Group
website.

12.2.2.1 Website Access for Military and

Government Users. This is a password protected
website. To enter the site you must be accessing the
site from either a ".mil" or ".gov" address. Upon initial
entry, you will be prompted with instructions on how to
acquire your password.

12.2.2.2 Website Access for Non Military and

Government Users. Currently, the Protective Design
Center is developing a procedure for e-mailing the
network administrator to receive procedures to enter
the site. If upon initial entry into the site there are no
instructions on this procedures, contact the Protective
Design Center (CENWO-ED-S) at (402) 221-3151 for
instructions.

Page 12-3
12.2.3 Orientation of Buildings on a Site. The
following will be given consideration when determining
the orientation of a building.

12.2.3.1 Deny aggressors a clear "line of sight" to

the facility from on or off the installation where
possible. Protect the facility against surveillance by
locating the protected facility outside of the range or
out of the view of vantage points.

12.2.3.2 Protect against attack by selecting

perimeter barriers to block sightlines such as
obstruction screens, trees, or shrubs. Non-critical
structures or other natural or man-made features can
be used to block sightlines.

12.2.3.3 Create "defensible space" by positioning

facilities to permit building occupants and police to
clearly monitor adjacent areas.

12.2.3.4 If roads are nearby, orient buildings so

there are no sides parallel to vehicle approach routes.

12.2.3.5 Design vehicular flow to minimize vehicle

bomb threats, avoid high-speed approach into any
critical or vulnerable area.

12.2.3.6 Avoid siting the facility adjacent to high

surrounding terrain, which provides easy viewing of
the facility from nearby non-military facilities.

12.3 FENCING

12.3.1 Fences are used as protective measures

against project-specific threats. They are most Fig. 12.4 - Fences offer various
appropriately used to define boundaries and to deter Force Protection measures.
penetration of a secure area. A fence will assist in
controlling and screening authorized access to a
secured area. Fences also serve the purposes listed
below (Fig. 12.4).

12.3.1.1 As a platform for the Intrusion Detection

System.

12.3.1.2 As a screen against explosive projectiles.

Page 12-4
12.3.1.3 To stop moving vehicles if they are
reinforced to do so.

12.3.2 Plants with tall growth habits and/or large

mature growth will be located well away from security
fences.

12.4 LANDSCAPE CONSIDERATIONS

12.4.1 Landscaping guidelines for buildings should

not be ignored because of standoff distances. The
landscape design should enhance the overall
attractiveness of the facility while still providing or
enhancing the objective level of security level of
security.

12.4.2 Establish clear zones along both sides of

security fencing. Vegetation in the clear zone should
not exceed four inches in height. (DoD 0-2000.12-H,
Protection of DoD Personnel and Activities Against
Acts of Terrorism and Political Turbulence, Appendix
EE, Table EE-4).

12.4.3 Strategically locate trees and planters to

prevent penetration of an attack vehicle into the
secure area perimeter.

12.4.4 Vegetative groupings and earth sheltering

berms provide inherent blast effect reduction from
external blast forces (Fig. 12.5).

12.4.5 Plant material that can provide concealment

will not be used adjacent to high security structures or
12.5 - Cross-section of a planted
fence lines. earth sheltered berm for parking.

12.4.6 Use dense, thorn-bearing plant material to

create natural barriers to deter aggressors.

12.4.7 Screen play and outdoor recreation areas

from public (off-installation) view.

12.4.8 Designers need to balance the need for signs

that identify, locate, and direct residents and
supported personnel to installation assets, versus the
need to discourage and frustrate hostile intelligence
gathering and access. One method of achieving this

Page 12-5
balance could be to direct people to a community
support or information center to obtain directions to
high security activities. Another could be to require all
incoming personnel and visitors report to a specific
building for screening.

12.4.9 Place trash containers as far away from the

facility as possible. Antiterrorism/force protection
requirements restrict the location of dumpsters to a
minimum of 10 meters (33 feet) from inhabited
buildings and 25 meters (82 feet) from billeting and
primary gathering areas (Unified Facilities Criteria
[UFC] 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism
Standards for Buildings, Table B-1).

12.4.10 Unobstructed Space. Ensure that vegetation

and site features within 10 meters (33 feet) of
inhabited buildings do not conceal form observation
objects of 150mm (6 inches) in height. (UFC 4-010-
01, Appendix B, Para B-1.3). This does not preclude
landscaping within the unobstructed space, but it will
affect the design and may affect plant selection.

12.5 LIGHTING

Lighting systems for security operations provide

illumination for visual and closed-circuit television
(CCTV) surveillance of boundaries, sensitive inner Fig. 12.6 - Lighting creates a
areas, and entry points. When CCTV is used as part deterrent.
of security operations, the lighting system will be
coordinated with the CCTV system. The specific
installation environment and the intended use
determine lighting system requirements. Often two or
more types of lighting systems are used within a
single area. Guidance on the use of security lighting
may be obtained from TM 5-811-1, Electrical Power
Supply and Distribution (Fig. 12.6).

12.6 BERMS

12.6.1 Use of berms for force protection can fulfill

one of more of the following functions.
Fig. 12.7 - Berms can serve many
x Define boundaries of property or boundary Force Protection functions.
limits.

Page 12-6
 x Provide a barrier to moving vehicles (Fig.
12.7).

x Hinder pedestrian movement.

x Intercept projectiles.

x Obstruct lines of sight.

12.6.2 Berms used to block lines of sight or

projectiles must be high enough to achieve those
objectives or may be combined with landscaping or
other construction elements. Detailed design
guidance is contained in Army Technical Manual (TM)
5-853-3/AFMAN 32-1071, Vol. 3, Security
Engineering Final Design.

NOTE: This Army Technical Manual is a "For Official

Use Only" document and is not accessible on the
Army Corps of Engineers publications website. A copy
of the manual can be acquired by ordering it through
your standard publications account.

12.7 GATES AND ENTRANCES (ACCESS CONTROL

POINTS [ACP])

12.7.1 Installation entry points are key components

in the force protection security program. The most
effective entrances accommodate the functions of
observation, detection, inspection, access control,
and disablement of hostile personnel and vehicles,
while containing the vehicles and pedestrians until
access is granted. These areas are one of the most
important installation features in the creation of a
sense of arrival for both installation personnel and
visitors. It is important that these areas present a
positive public image (Fig. 12.8).

12.7.2 The Headquarters Department of the Army,

Deputy Chief of Staff for Operations and Plans,
DAMO-ODL, office in coordination with the Protective Fig. 12.8 - Conceptual Entrance
Design and Electronic Security Centers of Expertise Gate to Meet “ATFP” Requirements.
are currently developing standards for Army Access
Control Points (ACP). These standards will be
published in the near future. Contact number for the

Page 12-7
current status of the Access Control Point standards
is (703) 693-2906.

12.7.2.1 Canopies for ACPs. ACPs will have a

canopy, which will cover the full width of incoming
lanes at the Guard Booth. The canopy shall have a
minimum clearance of 14.5 feet and shall have a
minimum length of 50 feet. Supporting structure of
roof will consist of columns sized and located to
create peripheral vision for the guards with minimal
obstructions. Lighting will provide a minimum of 10 ft-
candles with a Color Rendition Index of 65. Measures
will be taken to protect the canopy from the threat of
an over-height vehicle (Fig. 12.9).

12.7.2.2 The Interim Army Standard for Canopies at

Army Installation Access Points, Feb. 2004.

12.7.3 Physical Security Equipment.

Fig. 12.9 - ACP must meet AT/FP
Requirements.
12.7.3.1 The Product Manager, Physical Security
Equipment (PM-PSE) under DoD Directive 3324.3 is
assigned the mission of developing, fielding, and
supporting Physical Security Equipment (PSE)
throughout its life cycle for the Army, Joint Services,
and other Government agencies.

12.7.3.2 The DoD Directive assigns specific areas of

responsibility which include: interior PSE, Command
and Control Systems, security lighting, force
protection systems, barrier and systems, and interior
and exterior robotics. The PM-PSE homepage and
the DA-approved equipment Blank Purchase
Agreements (BPAs) are listed below.

x Product Manager - Physical Security

Equipment Homepage

x DA-approved PSE Equipment Blanket

Purchase Agreements (BPAs)

12.8 ADDITIONAL FORT LEE SPECIFIC

STANDARDS

None

Page 12-8
12.9 ARMY STANDARDS

The cited Army Standards shall be met.

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01,

DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for
Buildings

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-10,

DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff
Distances for Buildings. (This document is a
"For Official Use Only (FOUO)" publication.
Users may contact the Point of Contact
posted at the noted website for inquires
regarding this document).

x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

(UFAS)

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility

Guideline (ADAAG)

x DoD Instruction 2000.16, DoD Antiterrorism

Standards

12.10 REFERENCES

The following references are provided for guidance.

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01,

Installation Design, Chap 12

x DoD Handbook 2000.12-H, Protection of

DoD Personnel and Activities Against Acts
of Terrorism and Political Turbulence,
February 1993 (This Handbook is a "For
Official Use Only (FOUO)" publication.
Users may contact the Point of Contact
posted at the following website to obtain a
copy of the Handbook).
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/corres/ht
ml/o200012h.htm

x Army Regulation (AR) 525-13, The Army

Force Protection Program (Available only

Page 12-9
 through the Army Knowledge Online web
portal).

x UFC 4-010-02, DoD Security Engineering

Manual, (This document is in draft form.
See the Security Engineering Working
Group website.

x U.S. Air Force, Installation Force Protection

Guide: (Contains information on installation
planning, engineering design, and
construction techniques that will preclude or
minimize the effect of a terrorist attack).

x Technical Manuals/Air Force Manual series

TM 5-853/AFMAN) 32-1071, Security
Engineering, 3 volume series: (Volumes 2
and 3 are "For Official Use Only [FOUO]"
and are not available on the Army Corps of
Engineers publications website. A copy of
the manuals can be acquired via your
standard publications account. The three
volumes cover, Project Development,
Concept Design, and Final Design
respectively).

Links
Go to Section 1
Go to Table of
Contents

Page 12-10
 APPENDIX A

DESIGN TEAM IDG CHECKLIST

A.1 A completed Design Team Installation Design Guide (IDG) Checklist should be
completed for all Fort Lee projects that impact the appearance of the Installation. The
Master Planner shall provide the checklist to all teams designing new facilities,
additions, or renovations to existing facilities, or maintenance on the installation. The
Design Team IDG Design Checklist is to be completed by the design team to assure the
guidelines and standards have been considered and complied with in the design
process, and by the Master Planner in project review.

A.2 The Designer of Record or Design Agent will provide a copy of the completed
checklist, together with a signed certification statement with each design submittal (10
percent [pre-concept], 35 percent, 60 percent, and 90 percent for each MILCON
projects). The Designer of Record will complete the checklist and verify compliance in
the space provided. In the case of Design Build, all agents i.e. the Corps of Engineers,
NAF, AFFES, Host Nation, tenants, etc. shall have the perspective design build
contractors submit a completed IDG Checklist as part of their proposal. The completed
checklist will be provided to the Master Planner for review with concurrence or denial.
Upon a determination of concurrence by the Master Planner, the plan and checklist with
signatures will then be provided to the Real Property Planning Board for final
acceptance or denial. The accepted checklist will become a part of the project record
files.

A.3 If plans are denied for non-compliance at the installation or command level
(where applicable) of review, an explanation of the denial will be provided to the
Designer of Record. The plan and checklist can be resubmitted with revisions as
indicated in the explanation of denial.

Links
Go to Appendix B
Go to Table of
Contents

Page A-1
A.4 ARMY INSTALLATION DESIGN GUIDE (IDG) COMPLIANCE CHECKLIST

1. PROJECT TITLE AND DESCRIPTION.

Title:

Description:

2. PROJECT JUSTIFICATION:

3. SUSTAINABLE DESIGN:

a. Has LEED Checklist been attached? (If not, obtain completed checklist)

b. Does LEED meet or exceed Silver level? ("Silver" is the standard for all FY08
MILCON vertical construction projects currently under design (as of March 18,
2003). For all other FY06 and future-year MILCON projects the minimum
LEED rating requirement is "Gold".)

Yes - Review project as submitted.

No - Return submittal to design team for revisions to meet LEED.

4. SITE PLANNING

a. Was a site plan prepared for the proposed project utilizing the IDG Design
Process included in Sections 2, 3 and 5 of the IDG?

Yes _____ No _____

b. Does the site plan include Site Planning Design Component guidelines of the
IDG?

Yes _____ No _____

c. Does the site plan meet AT/FP requirements identified in Section 12 of the
IDG?

Yes _____ No _____

d. Designer Comments on Site Planning:

Page A-2
 e. Does Site Planning comply with the IDG? If not, provide justification.

f. Does Site Planning meet approved installation master plan siting compliance?

Yes No If not, provide justification.

g. Has NEPA been initiated for the construction effort in accordance with AR
200-2?

Yes No

h. Has airspace criteria been consider relative to airfield accident potential

zones?

Yes No

5. BUILDINGS

a. Does the building exterior design meet the Building Design objectives defined
in the IDG?

Yes No

b. Is the exterior building designed to meet the Structural Characteristics defined

in the IDG?

Yes No

c. If the project is a renovation or addition, does the proposed renovation or

addition meet IDG building design and structural characteristics?

Yes No

d. If the project is a renovation or addition to a historic building, does the

renovation or addition maintain the design integrity of the original building or
meet Historical Approval Agencies' requirements for any deviations?

Yes No

Page A-3
 e. Does the building exterior design meet AT/FP requirements (if applicable)?

Yes No

f. Designer Comments on exterior Building Design:

g. Does Building design comply with the IDG? If not, provide justification.

6. CIRCULATION

a. If the project includes roadway construction, does the proposed plan meet
Federal Highway and/or local guidelines defined in the IDG?

Yes No

b. If the project includes roadway construction, does the proposed plan meet
AT/FP roadway setback requirements defined in the IDG?

Yes No

c. If the project includes roadway construction, does the proposed plan include
applicable roadway alignment and intersection guidelines defined in the IDG?

Yes No

d. If the project is an entrance gate, does the proposed plan include entrance
gate guidelines and standards defined in the IDG?

Yes No

e. If the project includes parking, does the proposed plan meet the Parking Lot
Location/Design guidelines defined in the IDG?

Yes No

f. If the project includes pedestrian circulation, does the proposed plan meet the
Walkways and Pedestrian Circulation Guidelines in the IDG?

Yes No

Page A-4
 g. If the project includes bicycle circulation, does the proposed plan meet the
Bikeway Guidelines in the IDG?

Yes No

h. Designer Comments on Circulation Design:

i. Does Circulation Design comply with the IDG? If not, provide justification.

7. PLANT MATERIAL

a. All projects for new construction should include the planting of trees shrubs
and/or groundcover. Does the proposed planting plan include a project plan?

Yes No

c. Does the proposed planting plan meet AT/FP requirements defined in the
IDG?

Yes No

d. Does the proposed planting plan include plant material recommended in the
selected Plant Palette Matrix included in the IDG?

Yes No

e. Designer Comments on Landscape Design:

f. Does Landscape Design comply with the IDG? If not, provide justification.

Page A-5
8. SITE ELEMENTS

a. If the project includes Site Furnishings, does the proposed plan follow the
guidelines in the IDG?

Yes No

b. If the project includes Signs, does the proposed plan meet the Signs
standards in the IDG?

Yes No

c. If the project includes exterior Lighting, does the proposed plan meet the
exterior Lighting guidelines defined in the IDG?

Yes No

d. Will all power and other distribution lines to be located underground?

Yes No

e. Will all substations and transformers be designed as to be screened from

view?

Yes No

f. Will all sewer and water lines to be located underground?

Yes No

g. Are all storm drain systems designed to meet the guidelines defined in the
IDG?

Yes No

h. Designer Comments on Site Elements Design:

i. Does Site Elements Design comply with IDG? If not, provide justification.

Page A-6
9. ANTITERRORISM (SECURITY)

a. Have installation boundary setbacks been included?

Yes No

b. Have building setbacks from roads, parking, other buildings been included?

Yes No

c. Do site plans and landscape plans include the criteria outlined for AT/FP?

Yes No

d. Designer Comments on AT/FP Compliance:

e. Does AT/FP Design comply with the IDG? If not, provide justification.

I hereby certify that the information provided is in compliance with the guidelines
of the installation or applicable IDG, except as justified as non-compliance.

Designer of Record Date

Concur Deny , Explanation of denial is attached.

IDG Coordinator Date

Page A-7
Accept Deny , Explanation of denial is attached.

Command Review (Where Applicable) Date

Page A-8
 APPENDIX B

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
IDG CHECKLIST

B.1 The following checklist is designed for use on major projects.

Page B-1
 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS CHECKLIST

For Completion by Installation Personnel for Use in Preparation of the Request for
Proposals (RFP).

PROJECT LOCATION

DOL/DPW/DIS POC PH#

ADDRESS:

E-MAIL

DATE CHECKLIST COMPLETED BY

When completing this form it is important to remember that it is the responsibility of the
installation to resolve any conflicts between the different “users” (i.e. DPCA, DOL/DPW,
etc.) about wants, needs, etc. The A/E that prepares the RFP must have the specific
guidance contained herein to get you what you want. If there is information you wish to
provide that is not specifically requested or you are unable to make your desires clear
within the confines of this checklist then add those comments at the end. Overseas
installations consider compliance with Host Nation codes.

1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION

A. Maps and plans available: (Provide copies with completed checklist)

1. Basic Information Maps (BIMs): (List Drawing Numbers)

(Maps should be provided in Spatial Data Standards (SDS) compatible

GIS format whenever possible.)

Site topography
Site Sanitary Sewer
Site Storm Sewer
Site Electrical
Site Water
Site Plan Extract - from RPMP (Future Development Site Plan)
Other
Project Location Plans
Area Map
a) Site Map

2. Aerial Photograph (Preferred to Topographic)

3. USGS Map

Page B-2
 4. Project Siting Plan (Proposed)

5. Environmental Constraints

a) Jurisdictional wetlands designation

b) Other historical concerns:

B. Project Building Plans: (If renovation/addition or prior design, provide

available information and plans)

1. Foundation 7. Electrical
2. Basement 8. Mechanical
3. Floor 9. Plumbing
4. Structural 10. Site Utilities
5. Roof 11. Specifications
6. Elevations 12. Other

C. Applicable Codes and Standards:

List all known applicable codes and regulations. Generally, NAF construction
will not follow Federal or Military Specifications.

Department of Defense (DoD) Governing criteria is UFC 1-200-01, Design:

General Building Requirements, 31 July 2002

Local Building Codes:

State and County Codes:

Environmental Regulations:

Installation Regulations:

Cultural Regulations:

Anti-terrorism / Force Protection (AT/FP)

Other:

National Fire Protection Codes (NFPA), Military Handbook 1008C

Page B-3
1.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AVAILABLE TO THE CONTRACTOR

A. Facilities available to contractor during construction:

1. General Site Plan has been annotated to show limits of construction

site: Yes, No. If the contractor requires the use of
additional area, he must obtain written approval from the Contracting
Officer.

2. Construction Office available: Yes, No.

3. Covered materials storage available: Yes, No.

4. Uncovered materials storage available: Yes, No.

NOTE: Security of construction site and materials is the Contractor’s

responsibility.

5. Select fill borrow areas, spoil areas, sanitary fill and haul routes are
shown on attached Installation map: Yes, No.

List any restrictions or notes on the use of those areas:

NOTE: Disposition of scrap and salvageable materials resulting from

construction is the responsibility of the contractor unless otherwise noted
and agreed.

B. Utilities available to contractor during construction:

1. Potable Water: Yes, No; Metering required: Yes, No;

Cost $ per .

2. Non-Potable Water (Irrigation, Machine Washing, etc.): Yes, No;

Metering required: Yes, No; Cost $ per .

3. Electricity: Yes, No; Metering required: Yes, No;

Cost $ per .

4. Natural gas: Yes, No; Metering required: Yes, No;

Cost $ per .

5. Sanitary sewer: Yes, No

NOTE: Utilities used at the construction may be metered and/or

charged to the contractor. The rate schedule for utilities will be provided as

Page B-4
 part of this completed checklist and shall be the basis by which the
installation will bill the utility usage. Installation of temporary meters where
required and temporary tie-ins to the utility systems shall be the
responsibility and at the cost of the contractor.

1.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS

Facilities for demolition, relocation, or retention.

Provide description, size, type construction, and location of any existing facilities
on the site that must be demolished, relocated or retained. Consider all
structures, foundations, pavements, communications, and utilities (whether active
or abandoned). Consider demolition hazards (i.e. lead, asbestos, etc.). Every
effort shall be made by the installation to ensure compliance with the clean site
policy. Provide the date when the clean site will be available. Recycle building
demolition and debris material when ever possible.

1.3 PAVING REQUIRMENTS

A. Parking area (s) required: Yes, No.

1. Location and brief description:

2. Number of parking spaces for passenger vehicles:

(including spaces for the handicapped).

3. Type of pavement:

4. Perimeter of parking area (s) to have concrete curb: Yes, No.

5. Striping of parking spaces required: Yes, No.

a) Width of stripes:

b) Type of paint to be used:

1. Special signage required:

2. Concrete wheel stops required: Yes, No.

3. Handicapped ramps/depressed curbs required: Yes, No.

B. Service road (s) required: Yes, No.

1. Location:

2. Type pavement:

Page B-5
 3. Concrete curbing required on both sides of road: Yes, No.

4. Minimum roadway width: Feet .

List any other special paving considerations or needs:

C. Sidewalks required: Yes, No.

1. Type of paving material:

2. Location:

3. Minimum width:

4. Minimum thickness shall be 4” with welded wire fabric.

D. Concrete dumpster pads required: Yes, No.

1. Number of pad (s): each. See note below.

2. Size of each pad: feet by feet.

3. Provide bumper stops at rear of pads: Yes, No.

4. Provide architectural screening of pads: Yes, No.

Type:

NOTE: Building orientation or design may eliminate need for screening.

Screening shall be in accordance with the Army Installation Design Guide
(IDG).

1.4 UTILITIES SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Service: Meter required: Yes, No,

Type:

1. Type system to be installed: underground, aerial.

2. Type transformer (s) to be installed: Pole mtd., Pad mtd.,

Page B-6
 NOTE: Screen in accordance with Army Installation Design Guide
(IDG).

3. Available Voltage:

4. Location of tie-in point:

B. Water Service: Meter required: Yes, No.

1. Size and location of tie-in point:

2. Additional fire hydrant (s) required:

Note: For Backflow prevention refer to Section 11.6.6.5.

C. Sanitary Sewer Service: Size and location of tie-in point:

D. Storm Drainage:

1. Design for year occurrence.

2. Type System: Surface, Underground

3. Location of tie-in point for existing underground storm drainage system

if incorporated in contractor design: See Site Plan.

4. Low Impact Development (LID) Checklist. Approved by DOL/DPW.

E. Gas Service: Natural, Propane;

Meter required: Yes, No.

1. For Heating: Yes, No.

2. For domestic hot water: Yes, No.

3. For laundry dryers: Yes, No.

4. For kitchen equipment: Yes, No.

5. Size and location of tie-in point:

NOTE: Contractor (Offeror) shall be responsible to determine that all of

the existing service utilities are of sufficient capacity to accommodate all of
the design loads for this total facility. Should a Contractor (Offeror)
determine that one or more of the existing service utilities are not
adequate to accommodate the Contractor’s (Offeror’s) design loads for

Page B-7
 this total facility, then the Contractor (Offeror) shall submit with his initial
and any subsequent proposal (Best & Final Offer), the requirements,
design data and the price for increasing the capacity of each existing
service utility system or for providing a new service utility system. Design
loads for this facility shall be calculated in accordance with the criteria
specified in this Request for Proposals (RFP), with the most stringent
criteria governing. The responsibility for verification and field location of
any and all information provided in the RFP and on any attached or
enclosed drawings, or other documents shall be and is the responsibility of
the Contractor (Offeror).

F. Coordination and Notification Required for Utilities Tie-in:

1. Point of contact for coordination:

Tel. Email

2. Road Closing:

a) Can both lanes be closed to traffic: Yes, No.

b) Maximum time road can be closed:

c) Can road be closed over a holiday or weekend: Yes, No.

3. Minimum notification time required for utilities outages and road

closing:

a) Electric Power: working days.

b) Water: working days.

c) Gas: working days.

d) Steam: working days.

e) Central AC lines: working days.

f) Roads: working days.

NOTE: Enclose underground primary electrical service in

concrete from the new utility tie-in points to the pad mounted
transformer and/or mechanical room panel boxes. Provide one
spare conduit for each service sealed at both ends. The conduit
may be PVC provided it conforms to NFPA 70, current edition.

Page B-8
 NOTE: If existing sidewalk, curbs, gutters, or paving are
disturbed or removed during construction, the paving or concrete
must be replaced by the Contractor.

NOTE: At overseas installations, utility work must meet Host

Nation codes. Notably, in Europe utilities connections shall comply
with the supplier's local codes. Contractors in Europe shall meet
local utilities provider's conditions.

G. Coordination and Notification Required for Railroad Track Work:

1. Point of contact for coordination:

Tel. Email

2. Road Closing:

a) Can both lanes of traffic be closed: Yes, No.

b) Maximum time road can be closed:

c) Can road be closed over a holiday or weekend: Yes, No.

3. Railroad Track Closing:

a) Can track be closed to traffic: Yes, No.

b) Maximum time track can be closed:

c) Can track be closed over holiday of weekend: Yes, No.

4. Minimum notification time required for railroad track and road closing:

a) Railroad track: working days.

b) Road: working days.

5. Are used track components to be sorted and properly stored:

Yes, No.

6. Are samples, ultra-sonic inspections, temperature recordings, and

certificates to be submitted for ties, rail track components, or ballast:
Yes, No.

7. Are RAILER markings and reporting required: Yes, No.

8. Are there special radio or communication requirements:

Yes, No.

Page B-9
 NOTE: If existing sidewalk, curbs, gutters, drainage, ballast, or paving
are disturbed or removed during construction, the paving, drainage,
ballast, or concrete must be replaced by the Contractor.

1.5 ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL BUILDING DESIGN REQUIRMENTS

A. Seismic Design Zone: . Structural design shall be in

accordance with codes specified in the RFP.

B. Basic wind speed: mph.

C. Ground Snow Load: PSF (Plus code live load).

D. Maximum Frost Penetration: inches.

E. Heat Transmission: “U” Factors:

1. Walls: .

2. Floor (slab-on-grade) at perimeter foundation wall: .

3. Floor over ventilated crawl spaces: .

4. Ceiling and/or roofs: .

F. Roof:

1. Minimum pitch:

2. Type:

3. Scuppers and drains are required: Yes, (If a parapet type roof is
proposed); No.

4. Gutters and downspouts: Yes, No, Type:

5. Drainage carry off: Splash Blocks; or

Underground drainage system (internal roof drains not permitted.)

6. Access to roof: .

NOTES: Catwalks to and around rooftop HVAC units and other

equipment are required (Cary tread or equal). Where, possible
architectural screening of visible rooftop equipment is required.

G. Site Conditions:

1. Environmental Assessment required: Yes, No.

Page B-10
 Completion Date: .

EIS Required: Yes, No.

Completion Date: .

Record of Environmental Consideration (REC):_____ Yes, _____ No.

Completion Date: .

(Provide copies of actions to date.)

2. Cultural Resources Compliance Completed: Yes, No.

3. Site Conditions:

Topographical feature description:

Confirm or identify subterranean hazards:

Fill area
Old foundations
Unexploded ordnance
Existing/abandoned utility line
Tunnels/mines
Other

4. Soil investigation data available: Yes, No.

At project location: Yes, No.

Other:

5. Soil bearing capacity: PFS. Actual test ,

Assumed .

NOTE: The successful Offeror shall be responsible for accomplishing

additional necessary testing to verify soil characteristics at the site and
design of the foundation system to meet these requirements.

H. Building Exterior: Brick: Yes, No.

Other:

Page B-11
NOTE: Where brick is required, the exterior walls shall be finished with face
brick with through body integral color and shall match the brick currently in place
in Building No’s .

NOTE: The final floor plan as designed by Offerors shall include all functional
areas outlined subsequently in this section. Gross building areas shall not exceed
that specified in the RFP, including the mechanical room.

I. Barrier Free Requirements: (Where applicable) as minimum, guest units

shall be barrier free.

NOTE: Where required, “Barrier Free Requirements” shall be designed and

constructed to provide for the Physically Handicapped (interior and exterior), in
accordance with Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) and the
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

J. Kickplates required on interior wood doors: Yes, No.

K. Approximate total maximum occupancy:

1. Female: Adults Children

2. Male: Adults Children

3. TOTAL:

Comments:

L. Landscape Requirements:

List any special requirements:

NOTE: Offerors will provide a Landscaping Plan for the project area as
required in the RFP. Surface area disturbance and tree removal will be
minimized. Trees determined to be retained will be incorporated in the
Landscaping Plan. Landscaping shall refer to the planting of trees, shrubs,
plants, etc. and shall not be associated with establishment of turf as defined
below. Trees, shrubs, plants, etc. shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year
from time of planting.

M. Establishment of Turf:

Page B-12
N. Soil Poisoning: For termite protection is , is not required.

NOTE: It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to protect all existing turf and
landscaping affected by the construction and to replace any turf or landscaping
that has been damaged, for the term of the contract.

O. Paint Color:

List standard paint colors:

P. Finishes:

List standard finishes:

Page B-13
1.6 ELECTRICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Exterior lighting:

1. Parking area (s) lighting required: Yes, No.

a) Type of lighting: High Pressure Sodium

Low Pressure Sodium

Mercury

Halogen

Other

b) Average Intensity: foot candles per sq. yd. with a

uniformity ratio of 4:1 , Other . (Avg. to min.)

c) Type pole: .

d) Special mounting requirements:

e) Switching:

Type: Manual

Clock 7 day 7 day

Astronomical

Photo Electric

Combination of above as
indicated.

Other

2. Exterior building lighting required: Yes, No.

a) Type of lighting: High Pressure Sodium

Low Pressure Sodium

Mercury

Halogen

Other

Page B-14
 b) Average Intensity: foot candles per sq. yd.

c) To be mounted on the building structure: Yes, No.

d) Switching:

1) Type: Manual

Clock 7 day 7 day

Astronomical

Photo Electric

Combination of above as
indicated.

Other

2) Location: .

3) Lighting for plumbing and electrical chases required:

Yes, No.

NOTE: All electrical wiring (exterior and interior) shall be

copper.

B. Outside weather proof receptacles: shall be installed every feet along

the building exterior. Outside weather proof receptacles should be RCD
(GFCI) protected.

NOTE: The building shall have emergency light fixtures and exit lights in
accordance with NFPA requirements. Both shall have battery powered back-up,
charge level meters and test buttons.

C. Electromagnetic Shielding:

List any electromagnetic shielding requirements.

D. Standby/Backup Power Requirements:

List and standby/backup power requirements.

Page B-15
1.7 MECHANICAL/PLUMBING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Heating design data:

1. Below is the outside dry bulb temperature that is equaled or exceeded

97 ½ percent of the time, on the average, during the coldest 3
consecutive months (Dec., Jan., and Feb.). Heating design shall be
based on the dry bulb temperature equaled or exceeded 97 ½ percent
of the time.

a) Dry bulb temperature: .

b) Wind velocity: .

c) Degree days: .

2. Interior design temperatures: 68 degrees.

B. Air conditioning design data:

1. Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures that are equaled or
exceeded 2 ½ percent of the time, on the average, during the warmest
4 consecutive months (Jun. thru Sep.) are given below. Air
conditioning design shall be based on the 2 ½ percent dry bulb, wet
bulb temperature.

a) Dry bulb temperature: .

b) Wet bulb temperature: .

2. Interior design temperatures: .

a) Dry bulb temperature: .

b) Wet bulb temperature: .

C. Heating and air conditioning system: shall be designed to provide a

relative humidity of 50% + 10% or -10%.

D. Mechanical Systems: Economy cycle. The air conditioning system except

where room fan coil units are located, if located where the winter design dry
bulb temperature is 35 degrees F (97 ½% basis) or less, shall be designed so
that 100% outside air may be used in the system during those cool weather
periods when the outside air temperature is sufficiently low to provide all the
cooling needed, or reduce the load on the air conditioning refrigeration
equipment. Use of the economy cycle in areas above 35 F shall be provided
when it can be clearly shown that use of the economy cycle is cost effective.

Page B-16
E. Install humidity control override: Yes, No.

F. Automatic timer controls required for:

1. Heating System: Yes, No.

2. Air Conditioning System: Yes, No.

G. Heating and Air Conditioning Source:

1. Self contained plant: Heat, AC.

2. Supply lines from central plant: Heat, AC.

3. Purchased heat:

H. Low profile roof mounted HVAC units are permissible: Yes, No.

I. Automatic timer controls required for:

1. Heating System: Yes, No.

2. Air Conditioning System: Yes, No.

J. Heating fuel to be used:

Fuel: Natural gas, #2 Fuel oil, Propane.

K. Dual fuel heating plant required: Yes, No.

Primary Fuel , Secondary Fuel .

L. Outside air supply intake: to close when building is unoccupied:

Yes, No.

M. Outside air supply intake: to close when building is unoccupied:

Yes, No.

N. Type heating and air conditioning filters required:

( ) Permanent ( ) Throw away

O. Covers and locks: required on interior utilities controls: Yes, No.

P. Plumbing Design Data:

Page B-17
1. Exterior hose bibs: Minimum of each with ¾” hose connection on
building exterior.

a) Frost protection required: Yes, No.

b) Removable cutoff handles required: Yes, No.

2. Interior hose bibs: See Functional Requirements

3. Grease trap (s) required: Yes, No.

Location (s):

4. Commodes shall be floor mounted flush valve type.

5. Lift station required: Yes, No.

6. Hot water heater (s) required: Yes, No.

a) Energy source: Natural gas, #2 Fuel oil.

b) Required minimum temperature:

c) System:

NOTE: All domestic water piping below grade shall be type K copper.
All domestic water piping above grade shall be either type L copper in
accordance with appropriate codes. All joints shall be soldered with 95/5
Tin/Antimony solder. The entire potable water system shall be lead free.
Vent piping shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel or DWV weight copper.

7. Provide a minimum of floor drain (s) in the laundry and

mechanical room.
8. Insulate all water pipes (hot & cold) above slab: Yes, No.

NOTE: The domestic hot and cold water piping below grade shall be
kept to a minimum, and below the frost line if located outside the building
perimeter.
9. All domestic water pipes (hot & cold) shall be stenciled HW or CW. If
pipes have been insulated then the pipe insulation shall also be
stenciled.
10. Provide grease interceptor: Yes, No.
Location:
11. Provide a water filtration system: Yes, No.
Location:

Page B-18
 Type:
12. Other plumbing considerations or requirements:

Page B-19
2.0 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR RESTROOMS
The following criteria are for minimal requirements only and may be superseded in
quantities and/or finishes, providing that changes are an upgrading of the minimal
requirements.
A. General: MALE and FEMALE
ITEM QUANTITY SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Lavatory
Commode
Faucets chrome finish.
Expose pipes/valves chrome finish.
Pipe penetrations chrome finish escutcheons.
Clean outs chrome covers.
Mirrors mech. wall fasteners.
Lighting
Floor drain each restroom.
Hose bib under lavatory in each restroom.
Wall finish ceramic tile to 5’ height
Ceiling moisture resistant DW.
Floors ceramic tile w/ceramic tile base,
or
quarry tile w/quarry tile base.
Tile shall be MUD-SET.
Toilet Partitions at all commodes and urinals.
overhead braced w/door bumpers
baked enamel w/skirts.
Skirts 18” stainless steel.
watertight top edge.
Duplex receptacle GFCI type over vanity.
Paper towel dispenser
with trash receptacle recessed in wall.
Hand dryer over each lavatory.
Soap dispenser liquid pump.
Toilet paper dispenser each commode stall.
Ash receptacle recessed, each restroom.
B. Specific: WOMENS
Sanitary napkin disposal each commode stall.
Sanitary napkin disposal each restroom, coin operated.
C. Specific: MENS
Urinal porcelain wall mounted
w/stainless steel part.
NOTE: Each restroom shall be designed and constructed with provisions for
the handicapped and shall conform to the latest edition of the National Standard
Plumbing Code and the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards published in the
Federal Register, August 7, 1984 (Current Edition).

Page B-20
3.0 FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Sprinkler system required: Yes, No.

1. Type system to be installed: Wet, Dry.

2. Complete coverage throughout the structure: Yes, No.

If no, describe proposed system, layout, etc.:

3. Exterior Siamese connections are required.

B. Detection System:

1. Smoke detectors required: Yes, No.

NOTE: Radium type shall not be used.

2. Heat detectors required: Yes, No.

(Rate of Rise Heat Detectors shall not be permitted.)

NOTE: When smoke and heat detectors are specific, full coverage of
the building is required. In addition, heat detectors are also to be installed
in conjunction with potential fire producing equipment such as furnaces,
electric motors, etc. All detection devices shall be spaced and installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and the latest edition of the
NFPA in effect at the time of installation. Heat detectors shall be set to
trigger at 135 F. The heat and smoke detectors shall be the combination
type. The smoke detection unit shall alarm locally and the heat detection
unit shall alarm the facility and transmit the alarm to the fire department
via a dedicated telephone line or appropriate transmission media, i.e.
radio transmission equipment. Automatic cutoff of air handling equipment
is required when smoke or heat detectors, sprinkler systems, or any other
automatic/manual fire alarm suppression system are activated.

C. Manually Activated Fire Alarm System: installed in accordance with the

latest edition of the NFPA in effect at the time of installation, is required. Also
provide manual pull stations at the ends of the building. The pull stations shall
be tied into a central panel box that will signal the fire department via a
dedicated telephone line or appropriate transmission media, i.e. radio
transmission equipment.

D. Special fire suppression system (s) required: Yes, No.

Describe type, location, and justification:

Page B-21
 E. Fire extinguishers (manually operated) are required.

1. Government furnished: Yes, No.

2. Quantity and locations shall be based upon building design, NFPA,

requirements, and coordinated with Installation’s fire department.

3. Recessed cabinet mounted: Yes, No.

NOTE: The Contractor (Offeror) shall furnish and install the recessed
fire extinguisher cabinets. The cabinets shall be at a minimum 24 1½”tall,
7” deep and 8 ½” wide w/glass doors.

F. All interior finish materials shall be per NFPA standards and Military
Handbook 1008C.

G. Water supply lines: for the sprinkler system shall be black steel pipe.

H. The installation's standard fire alarm panels shall be specified for ease
of maintenance and sustainability.

I. Emergency Lighting Requirements:

4.0 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Building physical security:

1. Intrusion detection system required: Yes, No.

a) Type system to be installed.

b) Desired location of detectors:

c) Exterior door alarm requirements:

d) Exterior window alarm requirements:

2. Duress alarm system (s) required: Yes, No.

1. Type system to be installed.

2. Location (s):

Page B-22
B. Safe (s) required: Yes, No.

1. Type and Number:

2. Size:

3. Location (s):

4. Secure to building: Yes, No, if yes, how:

5. Connect to main intrusion alarm system: Yes, No.

C. Remote transmission of the intrusion alarm system: to the installations

master system required: Yes, No. If yes, provide and install the
transmitter, all conduit, wiring, hookups from the intrusion alarm devices to
the transmitter, as well as all exterior underground conduit, required wiring,
panel boxes and all other ancillary equipment to bring the system to the
existing communication transmission lines. The final connection at the
communication line will be made by the government. All systems proposed
shall be compatible with the existing system (s) installed at the installation.
Point of coordination is Provost Marshall’s Physical Security Officer. Specify
the installation's standard intrusion alarm system if required.

D. Keying requirements:

1. Rooms requiring card readers:

2. Rooms requiring cipher locks:

3. Rooms requiring individual keys:

4. Rooms requiring master keys:

5. Exterior keying requirements:

6. At least six (6) keys shall be provided for each lock. An additional
twelve (12) sub master and six (6) master keys shall be provided.

7. The Offeror shall provide fifty (50) key blanks in addition to the above
keying requirements.

E. All exterior doors shall have non-removable hinge pins.

F. Panic hardware shall be in accordance with NFPA requirements.

G. Hardened secure area (s) required: Yes, No

Location (s):

Page B-23
 H. Fencing Requirements:

1. Location:

2. Type and height:

3. Gate requirements:

I. Antiterrorism Requirements:

1. Blast resistant windows:

2. Setbacks:

3. Barriers:

4. Others:

J. Risk/Threat Analysis Requirements:

1. Installation: Fill in unclassified pieces of risk/threat analysis.

2.

3.

5.0 COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS

A. Intercom system required: Yes, No.

Give a brief description of the requirements for the system:

B. Music/Paging system required: Yes, No.

Give a brief description of the requirements for the system:

C. Telephone system required: Yes, No.

Location:

Type:

Page B-24
 Pay telephone required: Yes, No. If required, unit (s) will be wall
hung. Contractor shall run wire and conduit from pay phone outlets to the
main panel. Phones shall be provided by Contractor.

NOTE: Contractor shall provide all conduit, wire, junction boxes and pull
wires for the telephone system as required. Hookup of the telephone system
will be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate all the
telephone requirements with the installation's Directorate of Public Works
(DOL/DPW) office and the local telephone company to determine
requirements and provide space for communication equipment, panels, etc.,
in the mechanical room of where otherwise designed.

The basic telephone system shall be the “Centrax System” as provided by:

They system functions shall include the following:

1. Direct in dialing, with restrictions on receiving collect calls.

2. Direct out dialing to local exchange number only.

3. Restrictions on placing chargeable calls outside the local exchange,

except for calls charged to credit card or calls made with the charges
reversed.

D. Television system required: Yes, No.

1. The technical and installation requirements of the television system

shall be coordinated with the local cable
television provider.

2. Locations/number of internal outlets:

3. Wiring and grounding shall be in accordance with the National Electric

Code.

E. Mass Notification System (Required per UFC 4-010-01, Standard 23: for
New Inhabited Buildings and for Existing Buildings (Primary Gathering and
Billeting), also for Existing Buildings, Recommended for all Inhabited
Buildings)

Type of Mass Notification System Required:

Page B-25
Page B-26
6.0 SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS

(Excluding those required by NFPA and OSHA)

D. Interior signage:

E. Exterior Signage:

All exterior signage shall conform to the Army Installation Design Guide (IDG)
and Post Wide Paint/Exterior Finish Standards and color charts.

7.0 OTHER COMMENTS

Page B-27
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Appendix C
Go to Table of Contents

Page B-28
 APPENDIX C

INTERIOR DESIGN REVIEW CHECKLIST

C.1 The following checklist is designed for use on major projects. The installation
interior design evaluator will fill in each category. The evaluator can be a contractor or
installation personnel.

Links
Go to Appendix D
Go to Table of
Contents

Page C-1
 INTERIOR DESIGN REVIEW CHECKLIST
1. Installation Project Date
Job Description
Building No. Building Cost$
Evaluator Furnishing Cost$
Using Agency Coordinator Phone#
Designer Phone#

ITEM YES NO N/A

2. Is the interior design integral to the facility design?
- Interior design is specified by the using agency.
- Scope of work includes building related interior design.
- Scope of work includes furniture related interior design.
- Design incorporates Army Installation Design Guide and
Standards criteria.
- DPW representative was a member of Pre-selection and/or
Selection Boards.
Pre-selection member:
Selection member:

3. Was the designer provided interior design criteria?

- Designed Guide for Interiors DG 1110-3-122.
- Design Guide for facility type designed.
- Army Installation Design Guide and Standards.
- Sustainability- LEED

4. The design has been reviewed and the following are

acceptable?
For building related interior design?
- Statement of Design Objective
- Sketches

Page C-2
 ITEM YES NO N/A
- Color Board
- Furniture Plan
- Exterior Materials and Finishes
- Graphic Design
Hand Drawn Sketches
Digital image files (JPG, BMP, etc.)
3D Model
Animation (AVI, etc.)
- Interior Design Finish Schedule
- Government Furnished Material List
Items for Installation of Furniture and Accessories
-Pre-design Evaluation:
Maintenance Data
Floor Systems
Electrical Equipment and Task/Supplemental Lighting
- Interior Element Specification
Cost Estimates:
Maintenance and Repair
New Work
Equipment-in-place and Furnishings
For furniture related interior design:
- Typical furniture layout
- Furnishing, fabrics and finishes board
- Furnishings plan
- Sketch perspectives
- Colored rendering
- Photographs
- Catalog Cuts
- Furnishing illustration sheets
- Furnishing placement lists

Page C-3
 ITEM YES NO N/A
- Furnishing order forms
- Furnishing contract specifications

5. Does the interior design address the following functions?

- Communications
- Storage/filing
- Display surfaces
- Work surfaces
- Conference Space(s)
- Privacy
- Lighting
- Planting
- Spatial considerations
- Color/texture characteristics
- Reflectance values
- Acoustical considerations
- Mechanical fixture placement
- Electronic support
- Furnishings/accessories
- Work, training or paper flow
- Hardware selection
- Graphics/signage
- Force Protection
- Physical Security
- Fire Safety

6. Construction and installation phase

- Positive first impression is created
- Coordinated color scheme, interior reflecting exterior

Page C-4
 ITEM YES NO N/A
- Area & shape of spaces match function & support mission
- Furnishings support function of space
- Creative use of interior design spaces
- Retained designer to review and approve contractor submittals
- Retained designer to oversee the installation of furnishings
- Color boards were required and reviewed
- Interior appearance policy is implemented

Describe actions taken to ensure quality interior design to all negative responses on an
attached sheet. Maintain a copy of this interior design review checklist and all negative
responses in the DPW project file.

I hereby certify that the information provided is in compliance with the guidelines
of the installation or applicable IDG, except as justified as non-compliance.

Designer of Record Date

Concur
Deny (Explanation of denial is attached.)

Master Planner Date

Accept
Deny (Explanation of denial is attached.)

Command Review (Where Applicable) Date

Page C-5
ITEM YES NO N/A

Page C-6
 APPENDIX D

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN

D.1 WHAT IS SUSTAINABLE DESIGN?

D.1.1 Sustainable design and development is an integrated

approach to planning, designing, building, operating, and
maintaining facilities in a collaborative and holistic manner
among all stakeholders (Fig. D.1). It is a systematic process
and engineering practice with how to do it guidance,
checklist, tools, and scoring systems. Sustainable design
integrates the decision-making across the installation, basing
every decision on the greatest long-term benefits and
recognizing the interrelationship of installation actions with
the natural environment. In the content of Army installations
Sustainable Design is the design, construction, operation,
and reuse/removal of the built environment in an
environmentally and energy efficient manner (Fig. D.2). The
basic objectives of sustainability are:

D.1.1.1 Reduce the consumption of energy, land, materials,

water, and other non-renewable resources.
Fig. D.1 – Sustainable Site
D.1.1.2 Minimize the waste of energy, land, materials, Design.
water, and other limited resources.

D.1.1.3 Protect the natural environment that is the source of

all resources.

D.1.1.4 Create livable, healthy, and fiscally productive

manmade environments for existing and future generations.

D.1.2 Designing for sustainability ultimately increases

quality of life through better resource protection and use.
The design process must incorporate a change in mind-set
that embraces less consumptive lifestyles. This mind-set
change must include global interdependence, stewardship of
the environment, social responsibility, and economic viability. Fig. D.2 – Sustainable
Design Process.
The new design mind-set must change from the traditional
approach to recognize the impacts of every design choice on
natural and cultural resources and on local, regional, and
global environments.

Page D-1
D.2 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

D.2.1 Practicing the principles of sustainable design in the

planning, design, construction, and operation of
infrastructure and facilities is a smart business practice.
Protecting our natural resources and reducing our impact on
the natural environment is achievable when we create
energy efficient (Fig. D.3), healthy (Fig. D.4), high-
performance (Fig. D.5), and safe buildings. Fig. D.3 - Energy Efficient
Lighting Contributes to
D.2.2 The Integrated Design Process. Critical to the Sustainability.
success of sustainable design and development is the
organization and commitment of the team to engage in the
Integrated Design Process. To effect change in building
design and operation, the project delivery process itself must
become a collaborative effort to integrate design strategies
among all disciplines and all players in the project delivery
process. Integrated design demands a more inclusive team,
working closer together than is traditionally the case. Future
building users and facility managers must be invited to join
architects, engineers, and planners in developing the vision
and goals for new facilities. (Adapted from the HOK
Guidebook to Sustainable Design)

D.2.3 Appendix D, Sustainable Design, discusses the

sustainable design concept and its application to Army Fig. D.4 - CO2
projects. The LEED rating system has replaced the SPiRiT Measurements of Indoor Air
Quality Assisting in Creating
rating system and will be used by design professionals in all a Healthy Environment.
new construction, additions, or renovations of Army facilities.

D.2.3.1 The U.S. Green Building Council LEED 2.0

(Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) Green
Building Rating System will be used for all ’08 construction
projects. The United States Green Building Council
(USGBC) web site contains the rating system
documentation.

D.2.3.2 Army Rating Standard

D.2.3.2.1 The LEED rating of "Silver" is the standard for all

FY08 MILCON vertical construction projects currently under
design (as of 2006). For all other FY06 and future-year
MILCON projects, the minimum SPiRiT rating requirement is
Fig. D.5 - Efficient Water
"Gold". See Assistant Secretary of the Army Memorandum
Usage Contributes to a High
Subject: Sustainable Design and Development Performance Facility.
Requirements, dated 18 March 2003.

Page D-2
D.2.4 Further information on sustainable design can be
obtained at the following websites:

D.2.4.1 Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation Management,

Sustainable Design and Development Website This site
provides information on the following topics: documentation
and references; sustainable process, tools, products and
materials; Sustainable Design and Development Training;
and links to various sustainable design and development
informational website.

D.2.4.2 U.S Army Corps of Engineers, Engineering

Research and Development Center, Construction
Engineering Research Laboratory (CERL), Sustainable
Design and Development Website.

D.2.4.3 Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG) This site

provides comprehensive and current information on
sustainable design strategies and technologies.

D.3 SUSTAINABILITY AND THE FEDERAL

GOVERNMENT

D.3.1 The Federal Government has led the nation in the

energy efficient, resource-conserving building design,
construction, and operation. Executive Order (EO) 13123,
“Greening the Government through Efficient Energy
Management”, was issued June 3, 1999. This Order
establishes that sustainable design principles shall be
applied to all Federal projects in order to reduce pollution
and other environmental costs associated with facility
construction, operation, and eventual decommissioning. The
principles of sustainable design for Federal Agencies
established by EO 13123 include siting, design, and Fig. D.6 – Sustainable
Design Principles.
construction, as follows (Fig. D.6):

D.3.1.1 Site - Optimize site potential.

D.3.1.2 Energy – Minimize nonrenewable energy

consumption.

D.3.1.3 Materials – Use environmentally preferable

products.

D.3.1.4 Water – Protect and conserve water.

D.3.1.5 Indoor Environmental Quality – Enhance indoor

environmental quality.

Page D-3
D.3.1.6 Facility Delivery – Holistic delivery of facility.

D.3.1.7 O&M – Optimize operational and maintenance

practices.

D.3.1.8 Future Missions – Functional life of facility and

support systems.

D.4 SPiRiT/ LEED

D.4.1 The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) has

developed a checklist for sustainability to be used by design
professionals in all new construction, additions, or renovation
of Army facilities. Projects to be constructed before FY 2008
may use the SPiRiT checklist. After FY 2008 the LEED point
system will be used with a minimum requirement of silver.

D.4.2 This checklist is the “Sustainable Project Rating Tool

(SPiRiT)”. The SPiRiT/LEED document was derived from the Sustainable Sites.........14 pts. max.
U.S. Green Building Council LEED 2.0 (Leadership in
Energy and Environmental Design) Green Building Rating
System. SPiRiT/ LEED is a rating tool that offers a checklist, Water Efficiency........... 5 pts. max.
strategies, and scores to provide sustainable facilities to the
Army. SPiRiT/ LEED allows environmentally responsible Energy /
practices to be integrated into the process of facility delivery Atmosphere..................17 pts. max.
from the very beginning of the project. By using a "whole
building" perspective, the SPiRiT/ LEED rating tool (See
Appendix E, SPiRiT/ LEED Checklists) helps in preserving Materials /
the environment and improving facility life-cycle Resources.....................13 pts. max.
management. SPiRiT/LEED is based on accepted energy
and environmental principles. Indoor Enviro. Quality.15 pts. max.

D.4.3 The SPiRiT document includes eight (8) categories of

Innovation/ Design… 5pts. max.
design concerns which are the principles of sustainable
design previously discussed (The LEED document includes
six (6) categories) (Fig. D.7). A facility point summary is TOTAL 69 pts. max.
included at the end of the document for LEED only. Points
are achieved based upon the sustainable design issues
addressed in the building, site and infrastructure design.
Fig. D.7 – LEED Checklist
(Consult the entire LEED document during point analysis.) Points Summary.
The design is certified by the designer and design review
personnel based upon the following certification levels.

x SPiRiT Bronze – 25 to 34 Points

x SPiRiT Silver – 35 to 49 Points
x SPiRiT Gold – 50 to 74 Points

Page D-4
 x SPiRiT Platinum – 75 to 100 Points

x LEED Basic- 26 to 32 Points

x LEED Silver- 33 to 38 Points
x LEED Gold- 39 to 51 Points
x LEED Platinum- 52 to 69 Points

D.5 ARMY STANDARDS

D.5.1 The cited Army Standards shall be met.

x The SPiRiT rating of "Silver" is the standard for all

FY06 MILCON vertical construction projects
currently under design (as of March 18 2003). For
FY08 and future-year MILCON projects, the
minimum LEED rating requirement is "Silver".

x Ref. Assistant Secretary of the Army

Memorandum Subject: Sustainable Design and
Development Requirements, dated 18 March
2003.

D.6 REFERENCES

D.6.1 The following references are provided for guidance.

x Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation

Management memorandum Subject: Sustainable
Project Rating Tool, dated 21 December 2002

x Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation

Management, Sustainable Design and
Development Website

x U.S Army Corps of Engineers, Engineering

Research and Development Center, Construction
Engineering Research Laboratory (CERL),
Sustainable Design and Development Website

x Air Force Sustainable Facilities Guide

x Whole Building Design Guide

Page D-5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Appendix E
Go to Table of
Contents

Page D-6
APPENDIX E

LEED CHECKLIST

Links
Go to Appendix F
Go to Table of
Contents

Page E-1
 Project Max
LEED Checklist
Points Points

1.0 Sustainable Sites 14

SS.R1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Required Required

Intent: Reduce pollution from construction activities by controlling soil erosion, waterway
sedimentation and airborne dust generation.
Requirement: Create and implement an Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC) Plan for all construction
activities associated with the project. The ESC Plan shall conform to the erosion and
sedimentation requirements of the 2003 EPA Construction General Permit OR local erosion
and sedimentation control standards and codes, whichever is more stringent. The Plan shall
describe the measures implemented to accomplish the following objectives:
ƒ Prevent loss of soil during construction by storm water runoff and/or wind erosion,
including protecting topsoil by stockpiling for reuse.
ƒ Prevent sedimentation of storm sewer or receiving streams

ƒ Prevent polluting the air with dust and particulate matter.

Technologies Create an Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan to satisfy government regulations during
/Strategies: the design phase. The entire site must comply with this requirement where construction is
performed.
SS.1 Site Selection (1 point)

Intent: Avoid developing inappropriate sites, and reduce the environmental impact from the location
of the building on a site. Select site based on functional adjacencies/relationships and land
use compatibility.
Requirement: Do not develop buildings, hardscape, roads or parking areas on portions of sites that meet
any one of the following criteria:

ƒ Prime farmland as defined by the United States Department of Agriculture

ƒ Previously undeveloped land whose elevation is lower than 5 feet above the
elevation of the 100-year flood
ƒ Land that is specifically identified as habitat for any species on Federal or State
threatened or endangered lists
ƒ Within 100 feet of any wetlands as defined by United States Code of Federal
Regulations40 CFR
ƒ Previously undeveloped land that is within 50 feet of a water body, defined as seas,
lakes, rivers, streams and tributaries which support or could support fish, recreation
or industrial use
ƒ Land which prior to acquisition for the project was public parkland, unless land of
equal or greater value as parkland is accepted in trade by the public landowner
Technologies During the site selection process, give preference to those sites that do not include sensitive
/Strategies: site elements and restrictive land types. Select a suitable building location and design the
building with the minimal footprint to minimize site disruption of those environmentally
sensitive areas identified above.
SS.2 Development Density & Community Connectivity (1 point)

Intent: Channel development to urban areas with existing infrastructure, protect Greenfield sites and
preserve habitat and natural resources.
Requirement: OPTION 1- Development Density- Construct or renovate building on a previously developed
site AND in a community with minimum density of 60,000 square feet per acre net (Note:
density calculation must include the area of the project being built and is based on a typical
two-story downtown development)

Page E-2
 OPTION 2 — Community Connectivity- Construct or renovate building on a previously
developed site AND within 1/2 mile of a residential zone or neighborhood with an average
density of 10 units per acre net AND within 1/2mile of at least 10 Basic Services AND with
pedestrian access between the building and the services
Technologies During the site selection process give preference to urban sites with pedestrian access to a
/Strategies: variety of services.

SS.3 Brownfield Redevelopment (1 point)

Intent: Rehabilitate damaged sites where development is complicated by environmental

contamination, reducing pressure on undeveloped land.

Requirement: Develop on a site documented as contaminated (by means of an ASTM E1903-97 Phase II
Environmental Site Assessment or a local Voluntary Cleanup Program) OR on a site defined
as a Brownfield by a local, state or federal government agency.
Technologies During site selection process, give preference to brownfield sites. Identify tax incentives and
/Strategies: property cost saving. Coordinate site development plans with remediation activity as is
appropriate. Utilize EPA OSWER Directive 9610.17 and ASTM Standard Practice E1739 for
site remediation where required.
SS.4.1 Alternative Transportation: Public Transportation (1 point)

Intent: Reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use.

Requirement: Locate project within 1/2 mile of an existing, or planned and funded, commuter rail, light rail or
subway station.
OR
Locate project within 1/4 mile of one or more stops for two or more public or campus bus lines
usable by building occupants.

Technologies Perform a transportation survey of future building occupations to identify transportation

/Strategies: needs. Sit the buildings near mass transit.

SS.4.2 Alternative Transportation- Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms (1 point)

Intent: Reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use.

Requirement: Provide secure bicycle racks and/or storage (within 200 yards of a building entrance) for 5%
of all building users (measured at peak periods) AND, provide shower and changing facilities
in the building, or within 200 yards of a building entrance, for 0.5% of maximum full-time
equivalent shift occupants.

Technologies Design the building with transportation amenities such as bicycle racks and shower/changing
/Strategies: facilities.

SS.4.3 Alternative Transportation- Low Emit. and Fuel Efficient Vehicles (1 point)

Intent: Reduce pollution and land development impacts from automobile use.

Requirement: Implement a stormwater management plan that results in:

OPTION 1- Provide low-emitting and fuel-efficient vehicles for 3% of the maximum full time
equivalent shift occupants AND provide preferred parking for these vehicles.
OR
OPTION 2- Provide preferred parking for low-emitting and fuel-efficient vehicles for 5% of the
total vehicle parking capacity of the site.
OR
OPTIONS 3- Install alternative-fuel refueling stations for 3% of the total vehicle parking
capacity of the site (liquid or gaseous fueling facilities must be separately ventilated or
located outdoors).
Technologies Provide transportation amenities such as alternative fuel refueling stations. Consider sharing
/Strategies: the costs and benefits of refueling stations with neighbors.

Page E-3
SS.4.4 Alternative Transportation- Parking Capacity (1 point)

Intent: Reduce heat islands (thermal gradient differences between developed and undeveloped
areas) to minimize impact on microclimate and human and wildlife habitat.

Requirement: Reduce pollution and land development impacts from single occupancy vehicle use.

OPTIONS 1- Non-residential: Size parking capacity to meet, but not exceed, minimum local
zoning requirements, AND, provide preferred parking for carpools or vanpools for 5% of the
total provided parking spaces.
OPTIONS 2- Non-residential For projects that provide parking for less than 5% of FTE
building occupants: Provide preferred parking for carpools or vanpools, marked as such, for
5% of total provided parking spaces
OPTIONS 3- Residential Size parking capacity to not exceed minimum local zoning
requirements, AND, provide infrastructure and support programs to facilitate shared vehicle
usage such as carpool drop-off areas, designated parking for vanpools, or car-share services,
ride boards, and shuttle services to mass transit.
OPTIONS 4- All: Provide no new parking

Technologies Minimize parking lot/garage size. Consider sharing parking facilities with adjacent buildings.
/Strategies: Consider alternatives that will limit the use of single occupancy vehicles.

SS.5.1 Site Development: Protect or Restore Habitat (1 point)

Intent: Conserve existing natural areas and restore damaged areas to provide habitat and promote

Biodiversity.

Requirement: OPTION 1- On Greenfield sites, limit all site disturbance to 40 feet beyond the building
perimeter; 10 feet beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking and utilities less than 12
inches in diameter; 15 feet beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches;
and 25 feet beyond a constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving
areas, storm water detention facilities and playing fields) that require additional staging areas
in order to limit compaction in the constructed area.
OPTION 2- On previously developed or graded sites restore or protect a minimum of 50% of
the site area (excluding the building footprint) with native or adapted vegetation.
Native/adapted plants are plants indigenous to a locality or cultivars of native plants that are
adapted to the local climate and are not considered invasive species or noxious weeds.
Projects earning SS Credit 2 and using vegetated roof surfaces may apply the vegetated roof
surface to this calculation if the plants meet the definition of native/adapted.

Technologies On Greenfield sites, perform a site survey to identify site elements and adopt a master plan
/Strategies: for developing the project site. Carefully site buildings and mark construction boundaries.
Develop a native species resource for selection and identify prohibited plant materials. Native
adaptive plants should require little or no irrigation and active maintenance.

SS.5.2 Site Development: Maximize Open Space (1 point)

Intent: Provide a high ratio of open space to development footprint to promote biodiversity.

Requirement: OPTION 1- Reduce the development footprint (defined as the total area of the building
footprint, hardscape, access roads and parking) and/or provide vegetated open space within
the project boundary to exceed the local zoning’s open space requirement for the site by
25%both of the following.

OPTION 2- For areas with no local zoning requirements (e.g., some university campuses,
military bases); provide vegetated open space area adjacent to the building that is equal to

Page E-4
 the building footprint.

OPTION 3- Where a zoning ordinance exists, but there is no requirement for open space
(zero), provide vegetated open space equal to 20% of the project’s site area. land facility,
parking and roadways to “fit” existing site contours and limit cut and fill.

ALL OPTIONS:

• For projects located in urban areas that earn SS Credit 2, vegetated roof areas can

contribute to credit compliance.

• For projects located in urban areas that earn SS Credit 2, pedestrian oriented hardscape
areas can contribute to credit compliance. For such projects, a minimum of 25% of the
open space counted must be vegetated.
• Wetlands or naturally designed ponds may count as open space if the side slope gradients

average 1:4 (vertical: horizontal) or less and are vegetated.

Technologies Perform a site survey to identify site elements and adopt a master plan for development of the
/Strategies: project site. Select a suitable building location and design the building with a minimal footprint
to minimize site disruption. Strategies are: stack the building program, tuck under parking,
and shared facilities.

SS.6.1 Stormwater Design- Quantity Control (1 point)

Intent: Limit disruption of natural water hydrology by reducing impervious cover, increasing on-site
infiltration, reducing or eliminating pollution from storm water runoff, and eliminating
contaminants.
Requirement: CASE 1 — EXISTING IMPERVIOUSNESS IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 50%
Implement a storm water management plan that prevents the post-development peak
discharge rate and quantity from exceeding the pre-development peak discharge rate and
quantity for the one- and two-year 24-hour design storms.
OR
Implement a storm water management plan that protects receiving stream channels from
excessive erosion by implementing a stream channel protection strategy and quantity
control strategies.
OR
CASE 2 — EXISTING IMPERVIOUSNESS IS GREATER THAN 50%
Implement a storm water management plan that results in a 25% decrease in the volume of
storm water runoff from the two-year 24-hour design storm.
Technologies Design the project site to maintain natural stormwater flows by promoting infiltration. Specify
/Strategies: vegetated roofs, pervious paving, and other measures to minimize impervious surfaces.
Reuse stormwater volumes for non-potable uses.

SS.6.2 Stormwater Design- Quality Control (1 point)

Intent: Limit disruption and pollution of natural water flows by managing storm water runoff.

Requirement: Implement a storm water management plan that reduces impervious cover, promotes
infiltration, and captures and treats the storm water runoff from 90% of the average annual
rainfall1 using acceptable best management practices (BMPs) develop site environmental
management and mitigation plan.
Technologies Use alternative surfaces to reduce imperviousness and promote filtration. Use sustainable
/Strategies: design strategies to create integrated natural and mechanical treatment systems such as
constructed wetlands, vegetated filters, and open channels to treat stormwater runoff.
SS.7.1 Heat Island Effect: Non-Roof (1 point)

Intent: Reduce heat islands (thermal gradient differences between developed and undeveloped
areas) to minimize impact on microclimate and human and wildlife habitat.

Page E-5
Requirement OPTION 1- Provide any combination of the following strategies for 50% of the site hardscape
(including roads, sidewalks, courtyards and parking lots):
• Shade (within 5 years of occupancy)
• Paving materials with a Solar Reflectance Index (SRI)2 of at least 29
• Open grid pavement system
OPTION 2- Place a minimum of 50% of parking spaces under cover (defined as under
ground, under deck, under roof, or under a building). Any roof used to shade or cover parking
must have an SRI of at least 29.
Technologies Shade constructed surfaces on the site with landscape features and utilize high reflectance
/Strategies: materials for hardscape. Consider replacing constructed surfaces with vegetated surfaces
such as vegetated roofs and open grid paving or specify high albedo materials to reduce
heart absorption.

SS.7.2 Heat Island Effect: Roof (1 point)

Intent: Reduce heat islands (thermal gradient differences between developed and undeveloped
areas) minimizing impacts on microclimate and human and wildlife habitat.

Requirement OPTION 1- Use roofing materials having a Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) 3 equal to or
greater than the values in the table below for a minimum of 75% of the roof surface.

OPTION 2- Install a vegetated roof for at least 50% of the roof area.

OPTION 3- Install high albedo and vegetated roof surfaces that, in combination, meet the
following criteria:
(Area of SRI Roof / 0.75) + (Area of vegetated roof / 0.5) >= Total Roof Area
Roof Type Slope SRI; Low-Sloped Roof ” 2:12 78; Steep-Sloped Roof > 2:12 29
Technologies Consider installing high albedo and vegetated roofs to reduce heat absorption. Use ASTM
/Strategies: documentation E 1980, E 903, E 1918, C 1549, E 408, C1371.

SS.8.0 Light Pollution Reduction (1 point)

Intent: Minimize light trespass from the building and site, reduce sky-glow to increase night sky
access, improve nighttime visibility through glare reduction, and reduce development impact
on nocturnal environments.
Requirement FOR INTERIOR LIGHTING-
The angle of maximum candela from each interior luminaries as located in the building
shall intersect opaque building interior surfaces and not exit out through the windows
OR
All non-emergency interior lighting shall be automatically controlled to turn off during
non-business hours. Provide manual override capability for after hours use.

FOR EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Only light areas as required for safety and comfort. Do not exceed 80% of the lighting power
densities for exterior areas and 50% for building facades and landscape features as defined
in ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2004, Exterior Lighting Section, without amendments.
All projects shall be classified under one of the following zones, as defined in IESNA RP-33,
and shall follow all of the requirements for that specific zone:
LZ1 — Dark (Park and Rural Settings)
Design exterior lighting so that all site and building mounted luminaries produce a maximum
initial illuminance value no greater than 0.01 horizontal and vertical foot-candles at the site
boundary and beyond. Document that 0% of the total initial designed fixture lumens are
emitted at an angle of 90 degrees or higher from nadir (straight down).
LZ2 — Low (Residential areas)
Design exterior lighting so that all site and building mounted luminaries produce a maximum
initial illuminance value no greater than 0.10 horizontal and vertical foot-candles at the site
boundary and no greater than 0.01 horizontal foot-candles 10 feet beyond the site boundary.
Document that no more than 2% of the total initial designed fixture lumens are emitted at an
angle of 90 degrees or higher from nadir (straight down). For site boundaries that abut public
rights-of-way, light trespass requirements may be met relative to the curb line instead of the
site boundary.
LZ3 — Medium (Commercial/Industrial, High-Density Residential)
Design exterior lighting so that all site and building mounted luminaries produce a maximum
initial illuminance value no greater than 0.20 horizontal and vertical foot-candles at the site
boundary and no greater than 0.01 horizontal foot-candles 15 feet beyond the site. Document
that no more than 5% of the total initial designed fixture lumens are emitted at an angle of 90

Page E-6
 degrees or higher from nadir (straight down). For site boundaries that abut public rights-of-
way, light trespass requirements may be met relative to the curb line instead of the site
boundary.
LZ4 — High (Major City Centers, Entertainment Districts)
Design exterior lighting so that all site and building mounted luminaries produce a maximum
initial illuminance value no greater than 0.60 horizontal and vertical foot-candles at the site
boundary and no greater than 0.01 horizontal foot-candles 15 feet beyond the site. Document
that no more than 10% of the total initial designed site lumens are emitted at an angle of 90
degrees or higher from nadir (straight down). For site boundaries that abut public rights-of-
way, light trespass requirements may be met relative to the curb line instead of the site
boundary.
Technologies Adopt site lighting criteria to maintain safe light levels while avoiding off-site lighting and night
/Strategies: sky pollution. Minimize site lighting where possible and model the site lighting using a
computer model. Employ technologies to reduce light pollution to include cutoff luminaires,
low reflectance surfaces, and low angle spotlights.

2.0 Water Efficiency 5

WE 1.0 WE Credit 1.1: Water Efficient Landscaping: Reduce by 50% (1 point)

Intent: Limit or eliminate the use of potable water, or other natural surface or subsurface water
resources available on or near the project site, for landscape irrigation.
Requirement: Reduce potable water consumption for irrigation by 50% from a calculated mid-summer
baseline case. Reductions shall be attributed to any combination of the following items:
• Plant species factor
• Irrigation efficiency
• Use of captured rainwater
• Use of recycled wastewater
• Use of water treated and conveyed by a public agency specifically for non-potable uses
Technologies Perform a soil and climate analysis to determine appropriate plant material and design the
/Strategies: landscape with native or adapted plants to reduce or eliminate irrigation requirements.

WE 1.2 Water Efficient Landscaping: No Potable Water Use or No Irrigation (1 point)

Intent: Eliminate the use of potable water, or other natural surface or subsurface water resources
available on or near the project site, for landscape irrigation.
Requirement: Achieve WE Credit 1.1.and:
Use only captured rainwater, recycled wastewater, recycled greywater, or water treated and
conveyed by a public agency specifically for non-potable uses for irrigation.
OR
Install landscaping that does not require permanent irrigation systems. Temporary irrigation
systems used for plant establishment are allowed only if removed within one year of
installation.
Technologies Perform a soil and climate analysis to determine appropriate plant material and design the
/Strategies: landscape with native or adapted plants to reduce or eliminate irrigation requirements.
Consider using stormwater, greywater, and or condensate water for irrigation.
WE 2 Innovative Wastewater Technologies (1 point)

Intent: Reduce generation of wastewater and potable water demand, while increasing the local
aquifer recharge.
Requirement: OPTION 1

Reduce potable water use for building sewage conveyance by 50% through the use of water
conserving fixtures (water closets, urinals) or non-potable water (captured rainwater, recycled
grey water, and on-site or municipally treated wastewater)
OPTION 2

Treat 50% of wastewater on-site to tertiary standards. Treated water must be infiltrated or
used on-site.
Technologies Specify high efficiency fixtures and dry fixtures such as composting toilet systems and non-
/Strategies: water using urinals to reduce wastewater volumes. Reuse stormwater or greywater for
sewage conveyance or on-site wastewater treatment systems.
WE 3.1 Water Use Reduction: 20% Reduction (1 point)

Page E-7
Intent: Maximize water efficiency within buildings to reduce the burden on municipal water supply
and wastewater systems.
Requirement: Employ strategies that in aggregate use 20% less water than the water use baseline
calculated for the building (not including outdoor irrigation for landscaping) after meeting the
Energy Policy Act of 1992 fixture performance requirements and the commercial equipment
performance requirements as listed in the Table below. For equipment not addressed by
EPACT 92 or the table below, additional equipment performance requirements may be
proposed, provided that documentation supporting the proposed benchmark or industry
standard is provided. Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and shall include
only the following fixtures (as applicable to the building): water closets, urinals, lavatory
faucets, showers and kitchen sinks.
Requirement: Commercial Equipment Baseline
Commercial Clothes Washer – less than 80 lbs. 9 gallon/CF/cycle
Commercial Dishwasher 1.5 gallon/rack
Commercial Ice Machine 25 gallon/100 lbs ice
Food Steamer - Boiler Types 30 gallon/hr
Pre-Rinse Spray Valves 3.5 gpm
Other equipment See submittal requirements under Submittal section below

Technologies Use high efficiency fixtures, dry fixtures such as composting toilet systems and non water
/Strategies: urinals, and occupant sensors to reduce the potable water demand. Consider reuse of
stormwater or greywater for non-potable water applications such as toilet and urinal flushing.

WE 3.2 Water Use Reduction: 30% Reduction 1 Point in addition to WE Credit 3.1 (1 point)

Intent: Maximize water efficiency within buildings to reduce the burden on municipal water supply
and wastewater systems.
Requirement: Employ strategies that in aggregate use 30% less water than the water use baseline
calculated for the building (not including outdoor irrigation for site landscaping) after meeting
the Energy Policy Act of 1992 fixture performance requirements and the commercial
equipment performance requirements as listed in the Table below. For equipment not
addressed by EPACT 92 or the table below, additional equipment performance requirements
may be proposed, provided that documentation supporting the proposed benchmark or
industry standard is provided. Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and shall
include only the following fixtures (as applicable to the building): water closets, urinals,
lavatory faucets, showers and kitchen sinks.

Commercial Equipment Baseline

Commercial Clothes Washer – less than 80 lbs. 9 gallon/CF/cycle
Commercial Dishwasher 1.5 gallon/rack
Commercial Ice Machine 25 gallon/100 lbs ice
Food Steamer - Boiler Types 30 gallon/hr
Pre-Rinse Spray Valves 3.5 gpm
Other equipment See submittal requirements under Submittal section below
Technologies Use high efficiency fixtures, dry fixtures such as composting toilet systems and non water
urinals, and occupant sensors to reduce the potable water demand. Consider reuse of
/Strategies:.0 28
stormwater or greywater for non-potable water applications such as toilet and urinal flushing,
mechanical systems and custodial uses. and Atmosphere

3.0 Energy and Atmosphere 17

EA.R1 Fundamental Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems Required Required

Intent: Verify that the building’s energy related systems are installed, calibrated and perform
according to the owner’s project requirements, basis of design, and construction documents.

Requirement: The following commissioning process activities shall be completed by the commissioning
team, in accordance with the LEED-NC 2.2 Reference Guide
Designate an individual as the Commissioning Authority

Page E-8
 ƒ The CxA shall have documented commissioning authority experience in at least two
building projects.
ƒ The individual serving as the CxA shall be independent of the project’s design and
ƒ construction management.
ƒ The CxA shall report results, findings and recommendations directly to the Owner.

ƒ For projects smaller than 50,000 gross square feet, the CxA may include qualified
ƒ persons on the design or construction teams who have the required experience.
The Owner shall document the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR)

Develop and incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents.

Develop and implement a commissioning plan.

Verify the installation and performance of the systems to be commissioned.

Complete a summary commissioning report

Technologies Owners are required to use a qualified individual to lead the commissioning process. They
/Strategies: must have a high level of expertise with energy systems, the commissioning process, field
experience, and energy systems automation controls. The commissioning of the systems
includes: HVAC, refrigeration, lighting and day lighting, hot water systems, and renewable
energy systems.

EA.R2 Minimum Energy Performance Required Required

Intent: Establish the minimum level of energy efficiency for the proposed building and systems.

Requirement: Design the building project to comply with both—

• the mandatory provisions (Sections 5.4, 6.4, 7.4, 8.4, 9.4 and 10.4) of ASHRAE/IESNA
Standard 90.1-2004 (without amendments); and
• The prescriptive requirements (Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5 and 9.5) or performance
requirements (Section 11) of ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2004 (without amendments).
Technologies Design the building envelope, HVAC, lighting, and other systems to maximize energy
/Strategies: performance. ASHRAE 90.1-2004 Users Manual contains worksheets that can be used to
document compliance. Local codes must meet or exceed the U.S. Department of Energy
standard process for commercial energy code determination.

EA.R3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management Required Required

Intent: Reduce ozone depletion.

Requirement: Zero use of CFC-based refrigerants in new base building HVAC&R systems. When reusing
existing base building HVAC equipment, complete a comprehensive CFC phase-out
conversion prior to project completion. Phase-out plans extending beyond the project
completion date will be considered on their merits.

Technologies When reusing existing HVAC systems, conduct an inventory to identify equipment that uses
/Strategies: CFC refrigerants and provide replacement schedule for these products. For new buildings,
specify new HVAC equipment in the base building that uses no CFC refrigerants.

EA.1 Optimize Energy Performance (10 points)

Intent: Achieve increasing levels of energy performance above the baseline in the prerequisite
standard to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with excessive energy
use
Requirement: OPTION 1- Whole Building Energy Simulation (1-10 points)

Reduce the proposed building performance rating compared to the baseline building

Page E-9
 performance rating per ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2004 (without amendments), for the
total energy consumption within and associated with the building project, as demonstrated by
a whole building project simulation using the Building Performance Rating Method in
Appendix G of the Standard. All building energy loads associated with the project must be
included in the energy simulation model. Improvements to non-regulated loads must be
documented as described below. Regulated energy systems include HVAC (heating, cooling,
fans, and pumps), service water heating, and general interior lighting. Process loads for retail
may include display lighting, refrigeration equipment, cooking and food preparation, and other
major support appliances. Merchandise for sale that is plugged in, and small moveable
appliances are not candidates for improved energy performance.

% Energy Cost Savings (minimum)

New Building Existing Building Points

10.5% 5.5% - 1
14.0% 9.0% - 2
17.5% 12.5% - 3
21.0% 16.0% - 4
24.5% 19.5% - 5
28.0% 23.0% - 6
31.5% 26.5% - 7
35.0% 30.0% - 8
38.5% 33.5% - 9
42.0% 37.0% - 10

OPTION 2- Prescriptive Compliance Path (4 points)Buildings must be 20,000 SF or less, they

must be office occupancy, fully comply with the ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guide. (4
points)
OPTION 3- Prescriptive Compliance Path (1 point) Comply with the Basic Criteria and
Prescriptive Measures of the Advanced Building Benchmark ™ Version 1.1, with the
exception of sections: 1.7 Monitoring and Trend logging, 1.11 Indoor Air Quality, and 1.14
Networked Computer Monitor Control. Comply with the criteria for the building climate zone.
(1 point)
Technologies Design the building envelope and systems to maximize energy performance. Use a computer
/Strategies: simulation model to assess the energy performance and identify the most cost- effective
energy efficient systems. Local code shall meet or exceed the U.S. Department of Energy
requirements and perform in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1-2004.

EA.2 On-Site Renewable Energy (3 points)

Intent: Encourage and recognize increasing levels of on-site renewable energy self-supply in order

to reduce environmental and economic impacts associated with fossil fuel energy use

Requirement: Use on-site renewable energy systems to offset building energy cost. Calculate project
performance by expressing the energy produced by the renewable systems as a percentage
of the building annual energy cost and using the table below to determine the number of
points achieved. Use the building annual energy cost calculated in EA Credit 1 or use the
department of Energy (DOE) Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS)
database to determine the estimated electricity use. (Table of use for different building types
is provided in the Reference Guide.)

% of Total Annual Energy Usage in Renewables

2.5%

7.5%

12.5%

Page E-10
Technologies Asses the project for non-polluting and renewable energy potential including solar, wind,
/Strategies: geothermal, low impact hydro, biomass, and biogas strategies. When applying these
strategies, take advantage of net metering with local utility.

EA.3 Enhanced Commissioning (1 point)

Intent: Begin the commissioning process early during the design process and execute additional
activities after systems performance verification is completed.
Requirement: Implement, or have a contract in place to implement, the following additional commissioning
process activities in addition to the requirements of EA Prerequisite 1 and in accordance with
the LEED-NC 2.2 Reference Guide
1. Prior to the start of the construction documents phase, designate an independent
Commissioning Authority (CxA) to lead, review, and oversee the completion of all
commissioning process activities.
2 The CxA shall conduct, at a minimum, one commissioning design review of the Owner’s
Project Requirements (OPR), Basis of Design (BOD), and design documents prior to
mid-construction documents phase and back-check the review comments in the
subsequent design submission
3.The CxA shall review contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned
for compliance with the OPR and BOD. This review shall be concurrent with A/E reviews and
submitted to the design team and the Owner.
4. Develop a systems manual that provides future operating staff the information needed to
understand and optimally operate the commissioned systems.
5. Verify that the requirements for training operating personnel and building occupants are
completed.
Technologies It is preferable that the CxA be contracted by the Owner, however, the CxA may also be
/Strategies: contracted through design or contracting firms not holding construction contracts.

EA.4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management (1 point)

Intent: Reduce ozone depletion and support early compliance with the Montreal Protocol while
minimizing direct contributions to global warming.
Requirement: OPTION 1- Do not use refrigerants

OPTION 2- Select refrigerants and HVAC&R that minimize or eliminate the emission of
compounds that contribute to ozone depletion and global warming. The base building
HVAC&R equipment shall comply with the following formula, which sets a maximum threshold
for the combined contributions to ozone depletion and global warming potential: Reference
applicable formulas.

Technologies Design and operate the facility without mechanical cooling and refrigeration equipment. If
/Strategies: mechanical equipment is used select equipment with reduced refrigerant charge and
increased system life. Maintain equipment to prevent refrigeration leakage and utilize fire
suppression systems that do not contain HCFCs or Halons.

EA.5 Measurement and Verification (1 point)

Intent: Provide for the ongoing accountability of building energy consumption over time.

Requirement: Develop and implement a Measurement & Verification (M&V) Plan consistent with
Option D: Calibrated Simulation (Savings Estimation Method 2), or Option B: Energy
Conservation Measure Isolation, as specified in the International Performance
Measurement & Verification Protocol (IPMVP) Volume III: Concepts and Options for
Determining Energy Savings in New Construction, April, 2003.
The M&V period shall cover a period of no less than one year of post-construction occupancy.

Technologies Develop an M&V Plan to evaluate building and/or energy system performance. Develop
/Strategies: energy simulation or engineering analysis, and install necessary metering equipment to
measure energy use, measure energy use to track performance. Compare energy efficiency
between actual performance and baseline performance. The LEED credit requirements
expand upon typical IPMVP M&V objectives.

Page E-11
EA.6 Green Power (1 point)

Intent: Encourage the development and use of grid-source, renewable energy technologies on a net
zero pollution basis.

Requirement: Provide at least 35% of the building’s electricity from renewable sources by engaging in at
least a two-year renewable energy contract. Renewable sources are as defined by the Center
for Resource Solutions (CRS) Green-e products certification requirements.
DETERMINE THE BASELINE ELECTRICITY USE
Use the annual electricity consumption from the results of EA Credit 1.
OR
Use the Department of Energy (DOE) Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey
(CBECS) database to determine the estimated electricity use.
Technologies Determine the energy needs of the building and investigate opportunities to engage in green
/Strategies: power contract. Green power is derived from solar, wind, geothermal, biomass, or low impact
hydro sources. Green-E program eligible sources include: renewable energy certificates,
tradable renewable certificates, green tags, and other forms of green power that comply with
technical requirements.

4.0 Materials and Resources 13

MR.R1 Storage & Collection of Recyclables Required Required

Intent: Facilitate the reduction of waste generated by building occupants that is hauled to and
disposed of in landfills.

Requirement: Conduct a waste stream audit of a similar retail establishment to identify the top 5 recyclable
waste streams by either weight or volume. The Waste Study shall categorize all waste
streams consistently by either weight or volume, identify which waste streams are recyclable,
and list the 3 waste streams for which collection and storage space will be provided. Provide
an easily accessible area that serves the retail project and is dedicated to the separation,
collection and storage of materials for the minimum of the top 3 recyclable waste streams as
identified by a Waste Study.

Technologies Utilizing the information gathered in your waste study, designate an area for recyclable
/Strategies: collection and storage that is appropriately sized and located in a convenient area. Small
projects may consider stacked storage cabinets to accommodate recycling in small spaces.
Glass, plastic and metal recycling would be appropriate in employee break rooms. Issues
surrounding sorting activities, designated storage space, and access for haulers need to be
addressed in the project design.

MR.1.1 Building Reuse: Maintain 75% of Existing Walls, Floors & Roof (1 point)

Intent: Extend the life cycle of existing building stock, conserve resources, retain cultural resources,
reduce waste, and reduce environmental impacts of new buildings as they relate to materials
manufacturing and transport.
Requirement: Maintain at least 75% (based on surface area) of existing building structure (including
structural floor and roof decking) and envelope (exterior skin and framing, excluding window
assemblies and non-structural roofing material). Hazardous materials that are remediated as
a part of the project scope shall be excluded from the calculation of the percentage
maintained. If the project includes an addition to an existing building, this credit is not
applicable if the square footage of the addition is more than 2 times the square footage of the
existing building.

Technologies Consider reuse of existing, previously occupied buildings, including structure, envelope and
/Strategies: elements. Remove elements that pose contamination risk to building occupants and upgrade
components that would improve energy and water efficiency such as windows, mechanical
systems and plumbing fixtures. Quantify the extent of building reuse.

Page E-12
MR.1.2 Building Reuse: Maintain 95% of Existing Walls, Floors & Roof (1 point)

Intent: Extend the life cycle of existing building stock, conserve resources, retain cultural resources,
reduce waste and reduce environmental impacts of new buildings as they relate to materials
manufacturing and transport.
Requirement: Maintain an additional 20% (95% total, based on surface area) of existing building structure
(including structural floor and roof decking) and envelope (exterior skin and framing,
excluding window assemblies and non-structural roofing material). Hazardous materials that
are remediated as a part of the project scope shall be excluded from the calculation of the
percentage maintained. If the project includes an addition to an existing building, this credit is
not applicable if the square footage of the addition is more than 2 times the square footage of
the existing building:

Technologies Consider reuse of existing, previously occupied buildings, including structure, envelope and
/Strategies: elements. Remove elements that pose contamination risk to building occupants and upgrade
components that would improve energy and water efficiency such as windows, mechanical
systems and plumbing fixtures. Quantify the extent of building reuse.

MR.1.3 Building Reuse: Maintain 50% of Interior Non-structural Elements (1 point)

Intent: Extend the life cycle of existing building stock, conserve resources, retain cultural resources,
reduce waste and reduce environmental impacts of new buildings as they relate to materials
manufacturing and transport.

Requirement: Use existing interior non-structural elements (interior walls, doors, floor coverings and ceiling
systems) in includes an addition to an existing building, this credit is not applicable if the
square footage of the addition is more than 2 times the square footage of the existing
building. Potential Technologies & Strategies

Specify salvaged or refurbished materials for 10% of building materials.

Technologies Consider reuse of existing buildings, including structure, envelope and interior nonstructural
/Strategies: elements. Remove elements that pose contamination risk to building occupants and upgrade
components that would improve energy and water efficiency, such as mechanical systems
and plumbing fixtures. Quantify the extent of building reuse.

MR.2.1 Construction Waste Management: Divert 50% From Disposal (1 point)

Intent: Divert construction, demolition and land-clearing debris from disposal in landfills and
incinerators. Redirect recyclable recovered resources back to the manufacturing process.
Redirect reusable materials to appropriate sites.

Requirement: Recycle and/or salvage at least 50% of non-hazardous construction and demolition debris.
Develop and implement a construction waste management plan that, at a minimum, identifies
the materials to be diverted from disposal and whether the materials will be sorted on-site or
co-mingled. Excavated soil and land-clearing debris do not contribute to this credit.
Calculations can be done by weight or volume, but must be consistent throughout.

Technologies Establish goals for diversion from disposal in landfills and incinerators and adopt a
/Strategies: construction waste management plan to achieve these goals. Consider recycling cardboard,
metal, brick, acoustical tile, concrete, plastic, clean wood, glass, gypsum wallboard, carpet,
and insulation. Designate materials collection areas, identify haulers, and recyclers. Diversion
may include donation of materials to a charitable organizations and salvage of materials on-
site.

MR.2.2 Construction Waste Management: Divert 75% From Disposal (1 point)

Page E-13
Intent: Divert construction and demolition debris from disposal in landfills and incinerators. Redirect
recyclable recovered resources back to the manufacturing process. Redirect reusable
materials to appropriate sites.

Requirement: Recycle and/or salvage an additional 25% beyond MR Credit 2.1 (75% total) of non-
hazardous construction and demolition debris. Excavated soil and land-clearing debris do not
contribute to this credit. Calculations can be done by weight or volume, but must be
consistent throughout.

Technologies Establish goals for diversion from disposal in landfills and incinerators and adopt a
/Strategies: construction waste management plan to achieve these goals. Consider recycling cardboard,
metal, brick, acoustical tile, concrete, plastic, clean wood, glass, gypsum wallboard, carpet,
and insulation. Designate materials collection areas, identify haulers, and recyclers. Diversion
may include donation of materials to a charitable organizations and salvage of materials on-
site.

MR.3.1 Materials Reuse: 5% (1 point)

Intent: Reuse building materials and products in order to reduce demand for virgin materials and to
reduce waste, thereby reducing impacts associated with the extraction and processing of
virgin resources.

Requirement: Use salvaged, refurbished or reused materials such that the sum of these materials
constitutes at least 5%, based on cost, of the total value of materials on the project.
Mechanical, electrical and plumbing components and specialty items such as elevators and
equipment shall not be included in this calculation. Only include materials permanently
installed in the project. Furniture may be included, providing it is included consistently in MR
Credits 3–7.

Technologies Identify opportunities to incorporate salvaged materials into building design and research
/Strategies: potential material suppliers. Consider salvaged materials such as beams, posts, flooring,
paneling, doors, and frames, cabinetry and furniture, brick and decorative items.

MR.3.2 Materials Reuse: 10% (1 point)

Intent: Reuse building materials and products in order to reduce demand for virgin materials and to
reduce waste, thereby reducing impacts associated with the extraction and processing of
virgin resources.

Requirement: Use salvaged, refurbished or reused materials for an additional 5% beyond MR Credit 3.1
(10% total, based on cost). Mechanical, electrical and plumbing components and specialty
items such as elevators and equipment shall not be included in this calculation. Only include
materials permanently installed in the project. Furniture may be included, providing it is
included consistently in MR Credits 3–7.

Technologies Identify opportunities to incorporate salvaged materials into building design and research
/Strategies: potential material suppliers. Consider salvaged materials such as beams, posts, flooring,
paneling, doors, and frames, cabinetry and furniture, brick and decorative items.

MR.4.1 Recycled Content: 10% (post-consumer + ½ pre-consumer) (1 point)

Intent: Increase demand for building products that incorporate recycled content materials, thereby
reducing impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virgin materials.

Requirements Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content
plus one-half of the pre-consumer content constitutes at least 10% (based on cost) of the total
value of the materials in the project.

Technologies Establish a project goal for recycled content materials and identify material suppliers that can
/Strategies: achieve this goal. During construction, ensure that the specified recycled content materials
are installed. Consider a range of environmental, economic and performance attributes when
selecting products and materials.

Page E-14
MR.4.2 Recycled Content: 20% (post-consumer + ½ pre-consumer) (1 point)

Intent: Increase demand for building products that incorporate recycled content materials, thereby
reducing impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virgin materials.

Requirement: Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content
plus one-half of the pre-consumer content constitutes an additional 10% beyond MR Credit
4.1 (total of 20%, based on cost) of the total value of the materials in the project.

Technologies Establish a project goal for recycled content materials and identify material suppliers that can
/Strategies: achieve this goal. During construction, ensure that the specified recycled content materials
are installed. Consider a range of environmental, economic and performance attributes when
selecting products and materials.

MR.5.1 Regional Materials: 10% Extracted, Processed & Mfg. Regionally (1 point)

Intent: Increase demand for building materials and products that are extracted and manufactured
within the region, thereby supporting the use of indigenous resources and reducing the
environmental impacts resulting from transportation.

Requirement: Use building materials or products that have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well
as manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for a minimum of 10% (based on cost) of
the total materials value. If only a fraction of a product or material is
extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by
weight) shall contribute to the regional value. Mechanical, electrical and plumbing
components and specialty items such as elevators and equipment shall not be included in
this calculation. Only include materials permanently installed in the project. Furniture may be
included, providing it is included consistently in MR Credits 3–7

Technologies Establish a project goal for locally sourced materials, and identify materials and material
/Strategies: suppliers that can achieve this goal. During construction, ensure that the specified local
materials are installed and quantify the total percentage of local materials installed. Consider
a range of environmental, economic, and performance attributes when selecting products and
materials.
MR.5.2 Regional Materials: 20% Extracted, Processed & Mfg. Regionally (1 point)

Intent: Increase demand for building materials and products that are extracted and manufactured
within the region, thereby supporting the use of indigenous resources and reducing the
environmental impacts resulting from transportation.
Requirements Use building materials or products that have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well
as manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for an additional 10% beyond MR Credit
5.1 (total of 20%, based on cost) of the total materials value. If only a fraction of the material
is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by
weight) shall contribute to the regional value.

Technologies Establish a project goal for locally sourced materials, and identify materials and material
/Strategies: suppliers that can achieve this goal. During construction, ensure that the specified local
materials are installed and quantify the total percentage of local materials installed. Consider
a range of environmental, economic, and performance attributes when selecting products and
materials.

MR.6 Rapidly Renewable Materials (1 point)

Intent: Reduce the use and depletion of finite raw materials and long-cycle renewable materials by
replacing them with rapidly renewable materials.

Requirement: Use rapidly renewable building materials and products (made from plants that are typically
harvested within a ten-year cycle or shorter) for 2.5% of the total value of all building
materials and products used in the project, based on cost.

Technologies Establish a project goal for rapidly renewable materials and identify products and suppliers
/Strategies: that can support achievement of this goal. Consider materials such as bamboo, wool, cotton
insulation, agrifiber, linoleum, wheatboard, strawboard and cork. During construction, ensure

Page E-15
 that the specified renewable materials are installed.

MR.7 Certified Wood (1 point)

Intent: Encourage environmentally responsible forest management. Project POC: Architect and
Mechanical Engineer

Requirement: Use a minimum of 50% of wood-based materials and products, certified in accordance with
the Forest Stewardship Council’s (FSC) Principles and Criteria, for wood building components
including, but not limited to, structural framing and general dimensional framing, flooring,
subflooring, wood doors, furnishings, finishes, and non-rented temporary construction
applications such as bracing, concrete form work and pedestrian barriers.

Technologies Establish a project goal for FSC-certified wood products and identify suppliers that can
/Strategies: achieve this goal. During construction, ensure that the FSC-certified wood products are
installed and quantify the total percentage of FSC-certified wood products installed

5.0 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ)

EQ.R1 Prerequisite 1: Minimum IAQ Performance Required Required Required

Intent: Establish minimum indoor air quality (IAQ) performance to enhance indoor air quality in
buildings, thus contributing to the comfort and well-being of the occupants.

Requirement: Meet the minimum requirements of Sections 4 through 7 of ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Ventilation
for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. Mechanical ventilation systems shall be designed using the
Ventilation Rate Procedure or the applicable local code, whichever is more stringent.
Naturally ventilated buildings shall comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, paragraph 5.1.

Technologies Design ventilator systems to meet or exceed the minimum outdoor air ventilation rates as
/Strategies: described in the ASHRAE standard. Balance the impacts of ventilation rates on energy use
and indoor air quality to optimize for energy efficiency and occupant health. Use ASHRAE 62
Users Manual for detailed guidance on meeting the referenced requirements.

EQ.R2 Prerequisite 2: Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control Required Required

Intent: Minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces, and ventilation air distribution
systems to Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS).

Requirement: OPTION 1- Prohibit smoking in the building. Locate any exterior designated smoking areas
at least 25 feet away from entries, outdoor air intakes and operable windows.

OPTION 2- Prohibit smoking in the building except in designated smoking areas.

Locate any exterior designated smoking areas at least 25 feet away from entries, outdoor
air intakes and operable windows.
Locate designated smoking rooms to effectively contain, capture and remove ETS from
the building. At a minimum, the smoking room must be directly exhausted to the
outdoors with no re-circulation of ETS-containing air to the non-smoking area of the
building, and enclosed with impermeable deck-to-deck partitions. With the doors to the
smoking room closed, operate exhaust sufficient to create a negative pressure with
respect to the adjacent spaces of at least an average of 5 Pa (0.02 inches of water gauge)
and with a minimum of 1 Pa (0.004 inches of water gauge).
Performance of the smoking room differential air pressures shall be verified by
conducting 15 minutes of measurement, with a minimum of one measurement every 10
seconds, of the differential pressure in the smoking room with respect to each adjacent
area and in each adjacent vertical chase with the doors to the smoking room closed. The
testing will be conducted with each space configured for worst case conditions of
transport of air from the smoking rooms to adjacent spaces with the smoking rooms doors

Page E-16
 closed to the adjacent spaces.
OPTION 3- Residential Buildings Only. Prohibit smoking in all common areas of building.
Locate exterior smoking areas 25’ away from entries, outdoor intakes, and operable windows
opening to common areas.
Minimize pathways for ETS transfer between residential units.
Weather strip all doors in the residential units leading to common hallways.
Technologies Prohibit smoking in commercial buildings or effectively control the ventilation air in smoking
/Strategies: rooms. For residential buildings, prohibit smoking in common areas, design building envelope
and systems to minimize ETS transfer among dwelling units.

EQ.1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring (1 point)

Intent: Provide capacity for ventilation system monitoring to help sustain occupant comfort and
wellbeing.

Requirement: Install permanent monitoring systems that provide feedback on ventilation system
performance to ensure that ventilation systems maintain design minimum ventilation
requirements. Configure all monitoring equipment to generate an alarm when the conditions
vary by 10% or more from set point, via either a building automation system alarm to the
building operator or via a visual or audible alert to the building occupants.
FOR MECHANICALLY VENTILATED SPACES
Monitor carbon dioxide concentrations within all densely occupied spaces (those with a
design occupant density greater than or equal to 25 people per 1000 sq.ft.). CO2
monitoring locations shall be between 3 feet and 6 feet above the floor.
For each mechanical ventilation system serving non-densely occupied spaces, provide a
direct outdoor airflow measurement device capable of measuring the minimum outdoor
airflow rate with an accuracy of plus or minus 15% of the design minimum outdoor air
rate, as defined by ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
FOR NATURALLY VENTILATED SPACES

Monitor CO2 concentrations within all naturally ventilated spaces. CO2 monitoring shall be
located within the room between 3 feet and 6 feet above the floor. One CO2 sensor may be
epresent multiple spaces if the natural ventilation design uses passive stack(s) or other means
to induce airflow through those spaces equally and simultaneously without intervention by
building occupants.
Technologies Install carbon dioxide and airflow measurements equipment and feed the information to the
/Strategies: HVAC system and/or Building Automation System (BAS) to trigger corrective action, if
applicable. If such automatic controls are not feasible with the building systems, use the
measurement equipment to trigger alarms that inform building operators or occupants of a
possible deficiency in outdoor air delivery.

EQ.2 Increase Ventilation (1 point)

Intent: Provide additional outdoor air ventilation to improve indoor air quality for improved occupant
comfort, well-being and productivity.

Requirement: FOR MECHANICALLY VENTILATED SPACES Increase breathing zone outdoor air
ventilation rates to all occupied spaces by at least 30% above the minimum rates required by
ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004 as determined by EQ Prerequisite 1.

FOR NATURALLY VENTILATED SPACES

Design natural ventilation systems for occupied spaces to meet the recommendations set
forth in the Carbon Trust “Good Practice Guide 237” [1998]. Determine that natural ventilation
is an effective strategy for the project by following the flow diagram process shown in Figure
1.18 of the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual
10: 2005, Natural ventilation in non-domestic buildings.
AND
Use diagrams and calculations to show that the design of the natural ventilation systems
meets the recommendations set forth in the CIBSE Applications Manual 10: 2005,
Natural ventilation in non-domestic buildings.
OR
Use a macroscopic, multi-zone, analytic model to predict that room-by-room airflows
will effectively naturally ventilate, defined as providing the minimum ventilation rates
required by ASHRAE 62.1-2004 Chapter 6, for at least 90% of occupied spaces.

Page E-17
Technologies Potential Technologies & Strategies For Mechanically ventilated Spaces: Use heat recovery,
/Strategies: where appropriate, to minimize the additional energy consumption associated with higher
ventilation rates. Follow the Good Practice Guide 237 requirements.
EQ.3.1 Construction IAQ Management Plan- During Construction (1 point)

Intent: Reduce indoor air quality problems resulting from the construction/renovation process in
order to help sustain the comfort and well-being of construction workers and building
occupants.

Requirement: Develop and implement an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan for the construction
and pre-occupancy phases of the building as follows:
• During construction meet or exceed the recommended Control Measures of the Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ
Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.
• Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
• If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a
Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 shall be used at each return air grille,
as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999. Replace all filtration media immediately prior to
occupancy.
Technologies Adopt and IAQ management plan to protect the HVAC system during construction, control
/Strategies: pollutant sources and interrupt contamination pathways. Sequence the installation of
materials to avoid contamination of absorptive materials such as insulation, carpeting, ceiling
tile and gypsum wallboard. Coordinate with EQ Credits 3.2 and 5 to determine the appropriate
specifications and schedules for filtration media. Avoid using permanently installed air
handlers for temporary heating/cooling during construction.

EQ.3.2 Construction IAQ Management Plan- Before Occupancy (1 point)

Intent: Reduce indoor air quality problems resulting from the construction/renovation process in
order to help sustain the comfort and well-being of construction workers and building
occupants.
Requirement: Develop and implement an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan for the pre-occupancy
phase as follows:
OPTION 1 — Flush-Out
After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed,
perform a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cu.ft. of outdoor
air per sq.ft. of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 degrees
F and relative humidity no higher than 60%.
OR
If occupancy is desired prior to completion of the flush-out, the space may be occupied
following delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cu.ft. of outdoor air per sq.ft. of floor area to
the space. Once a space is occupied, it shall be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30
cfm /sq.ft. of outside air or the design minimum outside air rate determined in EQ
Prerequisite 1, whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation
shall begin a minimum of three hours prior to occupancy and continue during occupancy.
These conditions shall be maintained until a total of14,000 cu.ft./sq.ft. of outside air has
been delivered to the space.
OR
OPTION 2 — Air Testing
Conduct baseline IAQ testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy with all
furnishings, fixtures, equipment and interior finishes installed, using testing protocols
consistent with the United States Environmental Protection Agency Compendium of Methods
for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air and as additionally detailed in the
Reference Guide. Demonstrate that the contaminant maximum concentrations listed below
are not exceeded.
Technologies Prior to occupancy, perform a building flush-out or test the air contaminant levels in the
/Strategies: building. The flush out is often used where occupancy is not required immediately upon
substantial completion of construction. IAQ testing can minimize schedule impacts but may
be more costly. Coordinate with EQ Credits 3.1 and 5 to determine the appropriate
specifications and schedules for filtration media.

EQ.4.1 Low-Emitting Materials- Adhesives & Sealants (1 point)

Intent: Reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to

Page E-18
 the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants

Requirement: All adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (defined as inside of the
weatherproofing system and applied on-site) shall comply with the requirements of the
following reference standards:
Adhesives, Sealants and Sealant Primers: South Coast Air Quality Management District
(SCAQMD) Rule #1168. VOC limits are listed in the table contained in the LEED table and
correspond to an effective date of July 1, 2005 and rule amendment date of January 7, 2005.
Technologies Specify low-VOC materials in construction documents. Ensure that VOC limits are clearly
/Strategies: stated in each section of the specifications where adhesives and sealants are addressed.
Common products to evaluate include general construction adhesives, flooring adhesives, fire
stopping sealants, caulking, duct sealants, plumbing adhesives, and cove base adhesives.

EQ.4.2 Low-Emitting Materials- Paints and Coatings (1 point)

Intent: Reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to
the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants.
Requirement: Paints and coatings used on the interior of the building (defined as inside of the
weatherproofing system and applied on-site) shall comply with the following criteria:
Architectural paints, coatings and primers applied to interior walls and ceilings: Do not
exceed the VOC content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, First
Edition, May 20, 1993.
o Flats: 50 g/L
o Non-Flats: 150 g/L
Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates: Do not
exceed the VOC content limit of 250 g/L established in Green Seal Standard GC-03,
Anti-Corrosive Paints, Second Edition, January 7, 1997
Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, and shellacs applied to interior elements: Do
not exceed the VOC content limits established in South Coast Air Quality Management
District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.
Clear wood finishes: varnish 350 g/L; lacquer 550 g/L; Floor coatings: 100 g/L
Sealers: waterproofing sealers 250 g/L; sanding sealers 275 g/L; all other sealers 200 g/L
o Shellacs: Clear 730 g/L; pigmented 550 g/L; Stains: 250 g/L
Technologies Specify low VOC paints and coatings in construction documents. Ensure that VOC limits are
/Strategies: clearly stated in each section of the specification where paints and coatings are addressed.
Track the VOC content of all interior paints and coatings during construction.

EQ.4.3 Low-Emitting Materials- Carpet Systems (1 point)

Intent: Reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to
the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants.
Requirement: All carpet installed in the building interior shall meet the testing and product requirements of
the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus program.
All carpet cushion installed in the building interior shall meet the requirements of the Carpet
and Rug Institute Green Label program. All carpet adhesive shall meet the requirements of
EQ Credit 4.1: VOC limit of 50 g/L. Potential Technologies & Strategies Clearly specify
requirements for product testing and/or certification in the construction documents. Select
products that are either certified under the Green Label Plus program or for which testing has
been done by qualified independent laboratories in accordance with the appropriate
requirements. The Green Label Plus program for carpets and its associated VOC emission
criteria in micrograms per square meter per hour, along with information on testing method
and sample collection developed by the Carpet & Rug Institute (CRI) in coordination with
California’s Sustainable Building Task Force and the California Department of Health
Services (DHS), are described in Section 9, Acceptable Emissions Testing for Carpet, DHS
Standard Practice CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174, dated 07/15/04. This document is available at
www.dhs.ca.gov/ps/deodc/ehlb/iaq/VOCS/Section01350_7_15_2004_FINAL_PLUS_ADDEN
DUM-2004-01.pdf. (also published as Section 01350 Section 9 [dated 2004] by the
Collaborative for High Performance Schools.
Technologies Clearly specify requirements for product testing and/or certification in the construction
/Strategies: documents. Select products that are either certified under the Green Label Plus program or
for which testing has been done by qualified independent laboratories in accordance with the
appropriate requirements. Use the Green Label Plus program for carpets and associated
VOC content and emissions criteria.

Page E-19
EQ.4.4 Low-Emitting Materials- Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products (1 point)

Intent: Reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to
the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants.

Requirement: Composite wood and agrifiber products used on the interior of the building (defined as inside
of the weatherproofing system) shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. Laminating
adhesives used to fabricate on-site and shop-applied composite wood and agrifiber
assemblies shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. Composite wood and agrifiber
products are defined as: particleboard, medium density fiberboard (MDF), plywood,
wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates and door cores. Materials considered fit-out,
furniture, and equipment (FF&E) are not considered base building elements and are not
included.

Technologies Specify wood and agrifiber products that contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. Specify
/Strategies: laminating adhesives for field and shop applied assemblies that contain no added urea-
formaldehyde resins.

EQ.5 Indoor Chem. & Pollutant Source Control (1 point)

Intent: Minimize exposure of building occupants to potentially hazardous particulates and chemical
pollutants.
Requirement: Design to minimize and control pollutant entry into buildings and later cross-contamination of
regularly occupied areas:
Employ permanent entryway systems at least six feet long in the primary direction of
travel to capture dirt and particulates from entering the building at all entryways that are
directly connected to the outdoors. Acceptable entryway systems include permanently
installed grates, grilles, or slotted systems that allow for cleaning underneath. Roll-out
mats are only acceptable when maintained on a weekly basis by a contracted service
organization. Qualifying entryways are those that serve as regular entry points for
building users.
Where hazardous gases or chemicals may be present or used (including garages,
housekeeping/laundry areas and copying/printing rooms), exhaust each space sufficiently
to create negative pressure with respect to adjacent spaces with the doors to the room
closed. For each of these spaces, provide self-closing doors and deck to deck partitions
or a hard lid ceiling. The exhaust rate shall be at least 0.50 cfm/sq.ft., with no air recirculation.
The pressure differential with the surrounding spaces shall be at least 5 Pa
(0.02 inches of water gauge) on average and 1 Pa (0.004 inches of water) at a minimum
when the doors to the rooms are closed.
In mechanically ventilated buildings, provide regularly occupied areas of the building
with air filtration media prior to occupancy that provides a Minimum Efficiency
Reporting Value (MERV) of 13 or better. Filtration should be applied to process both
return and outside air that is to be delivered as supply air.
Technologies Design facility cleaning and maintenance areas with isolated exhaust systems for
/Strategies: contaminants. Maintain physical isolation from the rest of the regularly occupied areas of the
building. Install permanent architectural entryway systems such as grilles or grates to prevent
occupant borne contaminants from entering the building. Install high level filtration systems in
air handling units processing both return air and outside supply air. Ensure that air handling
units can accommodate required filter sizes and pressure drops.

EQ.6.1 Controllability of Systems- Lighting (1 point)

Intent: Provide a high level of lighting system control for retail employees to promote the productivity,
comfort, and well-being of building occupants.
Requirement: Provide individual lighting controls for 90% of stationary retail employees, enabling
adjustments to suit individual task needs and preferences.
AND
Provide lighting system controllability for all shared multi-occupant spaces to enable lighting
adjustment that meets group needs and preferences. Regularly occupied retail stations and
areas are defined as any station or area that is either regularly occupied by one employee
during their shift, or used by multiple employees regularly throughout their shift for sales
and/or for support tasks. Examples of regularly occupied retail stations and areas include, but
are not limited to, the following: service desks, transaction counters, individual staff offices
and shared offices. Retail sales floor areas are considered exempt from EQc6.1 requirements

Page E-20
Technologies Design the building with occupant controls for lighting. Strategies to consider include lighting
/Strategies: controls and task lighting. Integrate lighting systems controllability into the overall lighting
design, providing ambient and task lighting while managing the overall energy use of the
building.

EQ.6.2 Controllability of Systems- Thermal Comfort (1 point)

Intent: Provide a high level of thermal comfort system control for retail employees to promote the
productivity, comfort and well-being of building occupants.

Requirement: Provide individual comfort controls for 50% of stationary retail employees to enable
adjustments to suit individual task needs and preferences. Operable windows can be used in
lieu of comfort controls for occupants of areas that are 20 feet inside of and 10 feet to either
side of the operable part of the window. The areas of operable window must meet the
requirements of ASHRAE 62.1- 2004 paragraph 5.1 Natural Ventilation.
AND
Provide comfort system controls for all shared multi-occupant spaces where transient groups
share the space, to enable adjustments to suit group needs and preferences.
Regularly occupied retail stations and areas are defined as any station or area that is either
regularly occupied by one employee during their shift, or used by multiple employees
regularly throughout their shift for sales and/or support tasks. Examples of regularly occupied
retail stations and areas include but are not limited to the following: service desks, transaction
counters, individual staff offices, and shared offices. Retail sales floor areas are considered
exempt from EQc6.2 requirements.
Conditions for thermal comfort are described in ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 to include the
primary factors of air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed and humidity
Comfort system control for the purposes of this credit is defined as the provision of control
over at least one of these primary factors in the occupant’s local environment.
Technologies Design the building and systems with comfort controls to allow adjustments to suit individual
/Strategies: needs or those of groups in shared spaces. ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 identifies the factors
of thermal comfort and a process for developing comfort criteria for building spaces that suit
the needs of the occupants involved in their daily activities. Control strategies can be
developed to expand on the comfort criteria to allow adjustments to suit individual needs and
preferences. These may involve system designs incorporating operable windows, hybrid
systems integrating operable windows and mechanical systems, or mechanical systems
alone. Individual adjustments may involve individual thermostat controls, local diffusers at
floor, desk or overhead levels, or control of individual radiant panels, or other means
integrated into the overall building, thermal comfort systems, and energy systems design. In
addition, designers should evaluate the closely tied interactions between thermal comfort (as
required by ASHRAE Standard 55-2004) and acceptable indoor air quality (as required by
ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, whether natural or mechanical ventilation).
EQ.7.1 Thermal Comfort- Design (1 point)

Intent: Provide a comfortable thermal environment that supports the productivity and well-being of
buildings occupants.

Requirement: Design HVAC systems and the building envelope to meet the requirements of ASHRAE
Standard 55-2004, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy. Demonstrate design
compliance in accordance with the Section 6.1.1 Documentation.

Technologies Establish comfort criteria per ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 that support the desired quality and
/Strategies: occupant satisfaction with building performance. Design building envelope and systems with
the capability to deliver performance to the comfort criteria under expected environmental and
use conditions. Evaluate air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed, and relative
humidity in an integrated fashion and coordinate these criteria with EQ Prerequisite 1, EQ
Credit 1 and EQ Credit 2.

EQ.7.2 Thermal Comfort- Verification (1 point)

Intent: Provide for the assessment of building thermal comfort over time.

Requirement: Agree to implement a thermal comfort survey of building occupants within a period of six to 18
months after occupancy. This survey should collect anonymous responses about thermal
comfort in the building including an assessment of overall satisfaction with thermal
performance and identification of thermal comfort-related problems. Agree to develop a plan
for corrective action if the survey results indicate that more than 20% of occupants are

Page E-21
 dissatisfied with thermal comfort in the building. This plan should include measurement of
relevant environmental variables in problem areas in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 55-
2004.

Technologies ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 provides guidance for establishing thermal comfort criteria and
/Strategies: the documentation and validation of building performance to the criteria. While the standard is
not intended for purposes of continuous monitoring and maintenance of the thermal
environment, the principles expressed in the standard provide a basis for design of monitoring
and corrective action systems.

EQ.8.1 Daylight and Views- Daylight 75% of Spaces (1 point)

Intent: Provide for the building occupants a connection between indoor spaces and the outdoors
through the introduction of daylight and views into the regularly occupied areas of the
building.

Requirement: OPTION 1 — CALCULATION

Achieve a minimum glazing factor of 1% in a minimum of 75% of all sales and customer
service areas and any employee administration spaces occupied for critical visual tasks. The
glazing factor is calculated as follows:
OPTION 2 — SIMULATION
Demonstrate, through computer simulation, that a minimum daylight illumination level of 25
foot-candles has been achieved in a minimum of 75% of all sales and customer service areas
and any employee administration spaces occupied for critical visual tasks. Modeling must
demonstrate 25 horizontal foot-candles under clear sky conditions, at noon, on the equinox,
at 30 inches above the floor.
OR
OPTION 3 — MEASUREMENT
Demonstrate, through records of indoor light measurements, that a minimum daylight
illumination level of 25 foot-candles has been achieved in at least 75% of all regularly
occupied areas. Measurements must be taken on a 10-foot grid for all occupied spaces and
must be recorded on building floor plans.
In all cases, only the square footage associated with the portions of rooms or spaces meeting
the minimum illumination requirements can be applied towards the 75% of total area
calculation required to qualify for this credit.
In all cases, provide daylight redirection and/or glare control devices to avoid high-contrast
situations that could impede visual tasks. Exceptions for areas where tasks would be
hindered by the use of daylight will be considered on their merits.
Technologies Design the building to maximize interior daylighting. Strategies to consider include building
/Strategies: orientation, shallow floor plates, increased building perimeter, exterior and interior permanent
shading devices, high performance glazing and automatic photocell based controls. Predict
daylight factors via manual calculations or model daylighting strategies with a physical or
computer model to assess footcandle levels and daylighting factors achieved.
EQ.8.2 Daylight and Views- Views for 90% of Spaces (1 point)

Intent: Provide for the building occupants a connection between indoor spaces and the outdoors
through the introduction of daylight and views into the regularly occupied areas of the building

Requirement: Achieve direct line of sight to the outdoor environment via vision glazing between 2'6" and
7'6" above finish floor for building occupants in 90% of all areas regularly occupied by
stationary retail staff. Determine the area with direct line of sight by totaling the regularly
occupied square footage that meets the following criteria:
In plan view, the area is within sight lines drawn from perimeter vision glazing.
In section view, a direct sight line can be drawn from the area to perimeter vision glazing.
Line of sight may be drawn through interior glazing. For private offices, the entire square
footage of the office can be counted if 75% or more of the area has direct line of sight to
perimeter vision glazing. For multi-occupant spaces, the actual square footage with direct line
of sight to perimeter vision glazing is counted.
Regularly occupied retail stations and areas are defined as any station or area that is either
regularly occupied by one employee during their shift, or used by multiple employees
regularly throughout their shift for sales and/or for support tasks. Examples of regularly
occupied retail stations and areas include but are not limited to the following: service desks,
transaction counters, individual staff offices and shared offices.
Technologies Design the space to maximize daylighting and view opportunities. Strategies to consider
/Strategies: include lower partition heights, interior shading devices, interior glazing, and automatic

Page E-22
 photocell based controls.

6.0 Innovation and Design Process 5

ID.1-4 Innovation in Design (1-4 points)

Intent: To provide design teams and projects the opportunity to be awarded points for exceptional
performance above the requirements set by the LEED-NC Green Building Rating System
and/or innovative performance in Green Building categories not specifically addressed by the
LEED-NC Green Building Rating System.
Requirement: In writing, identify the intent of the proposed innovation credit, the proposed requirement for
compliance, the proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance, and the design approach
(strategies) that might be used to meet the requirements.
Technologies Substantially exceed a LEED for New Construction performance credit such as energy
/Strategies: performance or water efficiency. Apply strategies or measures that demonstrate a
comprehensive approach and quantifiable environment and/or health benefits.

ID.5 LEED Accredited Professional (1 point)

Intent: To support and encourage the design integration required by a LEED-NC green building
project and to streamline the application and certification process.
Requirement: At least one principal participant of the project team shall be a LEED Accredited Professional.

Technologies Educate the project team members about green building design and construction and
/Strategies: application of the LEED Rating System early in the life of the project. Consider assigning the
LEED AP as a facilitator of an integrated design & construction process.

Page E-23
 Maximum
LEED Facility Points Summary Project Points
Points

1.0 Sustainable Sites (S) Score Max 14

SS.R1 ‰ Prerequisite.- Construction Activity Pollution Prevent [Required] [Required]
SS.1 ‰ Site Selection- 1 pt
SS.2 ‰ ҏ Develop Density & Com. Connect- 1 pt
SS.3 ‰ Brownfield Re-development- 1 pt
SS.4.1 ‰ Alt. Transportation: Public Transportation- 1 pt
SS.4.2 ‰ Alt. Transportation: Bicycle Storage and Changing rooms- 1 pt
SS.4.3 ‰ Alt. Transportation: Low Emitting and Fuel Efficient Vehicles- 1 pt
SS.4.4 ‰ ҏ Alt. Transportation: Parking Capacity- 1 pt
SS.5.1 ‰ Site Development: Protect and Restore Habitat- 1 pt
SS.5.2 ‰ Site Development: Maximize Open Space- 1 pt
SS.6.1 ‰ Storm water Design: Quantity Control- 1 pt
SS.6.2 ‰ Storm water Design: Quality Control- 1 pt
SS.7.1 ‰ Heat Island Effect: Non-roof- 1 pt f
SS.7.2 ‰ Heat Island Effect: Roof- 1 pt
SS.8 ‰ Light Pollution Reduction- 1 pt

2.0 Water Efficiency (W) Score Max 5

WE.1 ‰ Water Efficient Landscaping: Reduce by 50%- 1 pt
WE.1.2 ‰ Water Efficient Landscaping: No Potable water use or Irrigation- 1 pt
WE.2 ‰ Innovative Wastewater Technologies- 1 pt
WE.3.1 ‰ Water Use Reduction: 20% Reduction- 1 pt
WE.3.2 ‰ Water Use Reduction: 30% Reduction- 1 pt

3.0 Energy and Atmosphere (E) Score Max 17

EA.R1 ‰ Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems [Required] [Required]
EA.R2 ‰ Prerequisite 2: Minimum Energy Performance [Required] [Required]
EA.R3 ‰ Prerequisite 3: Fundamental Refrigeration Management [Required] [Required]
EA.1 ‰ Optimize Energy Performance- 1- 10 pts
EA.2 ‰ On Site Renewable Energy- 1-3 pts
EA.3 ‰ Enhanced Commissioning- 1 pt
EA.4 ‰ Enhanced Refrigerant Management
EA.5 ‰ Measurement and Verification- 1 pt
EA.6 ‰ Green Power- 1 pt

4.0 Materials and Resources (M) Score Max 13

MR.R1 ‰ Prerequisite 1: Storage & Collection of Recyclables [Required] [Required]
MR.1.1 ‰ Building Reuse- Maintain 75% of Existing Walls, Floors and Roof- 1 pt
MR.1.2 ‰ Building Reuse- Maintain 95% of Existing Walls, Floors and Roof- 1 pt
MR.1.3 ‰ Building Reuse- Maintain 50% of Interior Non-Structural Elements- 1
MR.2.1 ‰ Construction Waste Management- Divert 50% from Disposal- 1 pt
MR.2.2 ‰ Construction Waste Management- Divert 75% from Disposal- 1 pt
MR.3.1 ‰ Materials Reuse- 5%- 1 pt
MR.3.2 ‰ Materials Reuse- 10%- 1 pt
MR.4.1 ‰ Recycled Content- 10% (post consumer + ½ pre-consumer) - 1 pt
MR.4.2 ‰ Recycled Content- 20% (post consumer + ½ pre-consumer) - 1 pt
MR.5.1 ‰ Regional Materials- 10% Extracted, Processed & Manufactured Regionally- 1 pt
MR.5.2 ‰ Regional Materials- 20% Extracted, Processed & Manufactured Regionally- 1 pt
MR.6 ‰ Rapidly Renewable Materials- 1 pt

Page E-24
MR.7 ‰ Certified Wood- 1 pt

5.0 Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) Score Max 15

EQ.R1 ‰ Prerequisite 1: Minimum IAQ Performance [Required] [Required]
EQ.R2 ‰ Prerequisite 2: Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control [Required] [Required]
EQ.1 ‰ Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring- 1 pt 1
EQ.2 ‰ Increase Ventilation-1 pt 1
EQ.3.1 ‰ Construction IAQ Management Plan- During Construction-1 pt 1
EQ.3.2 ‰ Construction IAQ Management Plan- Before Occupancy-1 pt 1
EQ.4.1 ‰ Low- Emitting Materials- Adhesives & Sealants- 1pt 1
EQ.4.2 ‰ Low- Emitting Materials- Paints and Coatings- 1 pt 1
EQ.4.3 ‰ Low- Emitting Materials- Carpet Systems- 1 pt 1
EQ.4.4 ‰ Low- Emitting Materials- Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products- 1 pt 1
EQ.5 ‰ Indoor Chem. & Pollutant Source Control- 1 pt 1
EQ.6.1 ‰ Controllability of Systems- Lighting- 1 pt 1
EQ.6.2 ‰ Controllability of Systems- Thermal Comfort- 1 pt 1
EQ.7.1 ‰ Thermal Comfort- Design- 1 pt 1
EQ.7.2 ‰ Thermal Comfort- Verification- 1 pt 1
EQ.8.1 ‰ Daylight and Views- Daylight 75% of Spaces- 1 pt 1
EQ.8.2 ‰ Daylight and Views- Views for 90% of Spaces- 1 pt 1

6.0 Innovation and Design Process Score Max 5

ID.1-4 ‰ 1.0-1.4: Innovation in Design- 4 pts 4
ID.5 ‰ 2: LEED Accredited Professional- 1 pt 1

Total Score Max 69

LEED Sustainable Project Certification Levels

LEED Basic 26 to 32 Points

LEED Silver 33 to 38 Points

LEED Gold 39 to 51 Points

LEED Platinum 52 to 69 Points

Page E-25
LEED Checklist Documentation

LEED N.C. Requirements Documentation located at: www.leedbuilding.org

Page E-26
APPENDIX F

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE

Links
Go to Appendix G
Go to Table of Contents

Page F-1
Page F-2
 SEPTEMBE
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
R

Include
activities
in the
vertical
columns
that take
place
in the
particular
month.

LAWNS
TREES AND SHRUBS
SEPTEMBE
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
R

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Name of Installation

Page F-3
To setup the shaded block across the month columns do the
following.
1. Block the area you would like to setup using your mouse.
2. Using fill color icon, choose the color to fill in the blocked
area.
3. Block the area again and right click on the box. Choose
format cells then choose the border tab.
4. Delete all of the borderlines and press the outline button.

Complete these blocks with activities

that occur during the identified
time duration.

Page F-4
APPENDIX G

PRIORITIZED IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECTS LIST

Links
Go to Appendix H
Go to Table of Contents

Page G-1
 Prioritized Improvements Projects List
INSTALLATION:
x Cost Estimate Next Submittal
Fort Lee, Virginia

DOL/DPW or EQUIVALENT - MASTER PLANNER

NAME: PHONE: ADDRESS:
EMAIL:

PRIORITY RECOMMENDED ALTERNATIVE

PROJECT TITLE COST ESTIMATE IDG PARA NO. POINT OF CONTACT
NO. FUNDING SOURCE FUNDING SOURCE

1 Convert Byrd Avenue to a central $1,751,833

troop movement spine.

2 Upgrade Adams Avenue- Crescent $397,470

From Sisisky to 19th Ave

3 Upgrade Adams Avenue- $344,980

From 19th to 27th Street

4 Upgrade Adams Avenue- $339,060

From 27th to 34th Street.

5 Upgrade Adams Avenue- $440,238

From 34th to 41st Street.

6 Upgrade barracks grounds with $611,695

landscaping for buildings 8401 and
8402.
7 Update the facades on the PXtra $1,067,639
and other buildings

8 Upgrade appearance of the Lee $1,646,802

Club front elevation

9 Upgrade the central PXtra complex $1,564,392

parking lot to improve circulation
and access roads.
10 Realign Battle Drive away from $1,401,825
PXtra building to increase the
setback distance.
Define and develop pedestrian
11 linkages between the various $461,880
destinations in the central
Community Services area
12 Enlarge the pedestrian area in front $708,569
of the PXtra to increase the
standoff from vehicles
13 Add landscaping to the $364,979
Commissary and PX parking lots.

14 Museum campus site $1,063,520

improvements to include existing
and women’s museum.
Develop a troop movement
15 pathway flanking Sisisky $136,239
Boulevard. Between Shop Road
and Carver Ave

Page G-2
Cost Estimate - PIP #1 Convert B Avenue Between Sisisky Boulevard and 22nd
street to a Central Troop Movement Spine
- Map 6.1

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 100,000 SF 2.00 $200,000
Sidewalk Demolition 30000 SF 2.50 $75,000
Utility Relocation/New Utility 5% % Construction $43,436
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $43,436

Subtotal $361,873

Signage 20 EA 500.00 $10,000

Pergola 4 EA 30000.00 $120,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 63,000 SF 3.00 $189,000

Pavers 6,500 SF 12.50 $81,250

Outdoor Exhibit 1 EA 10000.00 $10,000

Pavement Striping
Lane Markings 12,000 LF 1.00 $12,000
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 6 EA 150.00 $900

Water Feature 1 EA 10000.00 $10,000

Tree Grates 4 EA 1600.00 $6,400

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 245 EA 300.00 $73,500
Evergreen Tree 16 EA 200.00 $3,200
Shrubs/Groundcover 125 EA 25.00 $3,125
Turf (Seed) 2,500 SY 0.30 $750
Irrigation LS $30,000

Site Furnishings
Gazebo 1 EA 15000.00 $15,000
Benches 32 EA 550.00 $17,600
Bicycle Rack 12 EA 1000.00 $12,000
Bollards 20 EA 400.00 $8,000
Trash Receptacles 20 EA 500.00 $10,000
Lighting 64 LS 4000.00 $256,000

Subtotal $868,725

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $347,490

Contingency (20%) 20% % $173,745

Estimated Project Budget $1,751,833

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-3
Cost Estimate - PIP #2 Upgrade A Avenue- Crescent
From Sisisky to 19 Street
- Map 6.2

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 2,000 SF 2.00 $4,000
Sidewalk Demolition 5,000 SF 2.50 $12,500
Utility Relocation/New Utility 5% % Construction $11,205
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $11,205

Subtotal $38,910

Signage 12 EA 500.00 $6,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 27,000 SF 3.00 $81,000

Pavement Striping
Lane Marking 4,000 LF 1.00 $4,000
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 10 EA 150.00 $1,500

Curbs 300 LF 12.00 $3,600

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 75 EA 300.00 $22,500
Shrubs/Groundcover 100 EA 25.00 $2,500
Turf (Seed) 5,000 SY 0.30 $1,500

Irrigation LS $30,000

Site Furnishings
Benches 10 EA 550.00 $5,500
Bollards 20 EA 400.00 $8,000
Trash Receptacles 20 EA 500.00 $10,000
Lighting 12 LS 4000.00 $48,000

Subtotal $224,100

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $89,640

Contingency (20%) 20% % $44,820

Estimated Project Budget $397,470

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-4
Cost Estimate - PIP #3 Upgrade A Avenue- Crescent
From 19th to 27th Street
- Map 6.3

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 1,000 SF 2.00 $2,000
Sidewalk Demolition 5,000 SF 2.50 $12,500
Utility Relocation/New Utility 5% % Construction $9,720
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $9,720

Subtotal $33,940

Signage 12 EA 500.00 $6,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 22,500 SF 3.00 $67,500

Pavement Striping
Lane Marking 4,000 LF 1.00 $4,000
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 18 EA 150.00 $2,700

Curbs 1,000 LF 12.00 $12,000

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 9 EA 300.00 $2,700
Ornamental Tree 20 EA 300.00 $6,000
Shrubs/Groundcover 100 EA 25.00 $2,500
Turf (Seed) 5,000 SY 0.30 $1,500
Irrigation LS $30,000

Site Furnishings
Benches 10 EA 550.00 $5,500
Bollards 20 EA 400.00 $8,000
Trash Receptacles 12 EA 500.00 $6,000
Lighting 10 LS 4000.00 $40,000

Subtotal $194,400

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $77,760

Contingency (20%) 20% % $38,880

Estimated Project Budget $344,980

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-5
Cost Estimate - PIP #4 Upgrade A Avenue- Crescent
From 27th to 34th Street
- Map 6.4

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 1,000 SF 2.00 $2,000
Sidewalk Demolition 1,000 SF 2.50 $2,500
Utility Relocation/New Utility 5% % Construction $9,840
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $9,840

Subtotal $24,180

Signage 12 EA 500.00 $6,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 24,000 SF 3.00 $72,000

Pavement Striping
Lane Marking 4,000 LF 1.00 $4,000
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 18 EA 150.00 $2,700

Curbs 1,000 LF 12.00 $12,000

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 22 EA 300.00 $6,600
Shrubs/Groundcover 100 EA 25.00 $2,500
Turf (Seed) 5,000 SY 0.30 $1,500
Irrigation LS $30,000

Site Furnishings
Benches 10 EA 550.00 $5,500
Bollards 20 EA 400.00 $8,000
Trash Receptacles 12 EA 500.00 $6,000
Lighting 10 LS 4000.00 $40,000

Subtotal $196,800

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $78,720

Contingency (20%) 20% % $39,360

Estimated Project Budget $339,060

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-6
Cost Estimate - PIP #5 Upgrade A Avenue Troop Movement Trail Between
Sisisky Boulevard and 41st Street
- Map 6.5

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Sidewalk Demolition 500 SF 2.50 $1,250
Utility Relocation/New Utility 10% % Construction $25,085
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $12,543

Subtotal $38,878

Signage 12 EA 500.00 $6,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 42,000 SF 3.00 $126,000

Pavement Striping
Lane Marking 4,000 LF 1.00 $4,000
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 17 EA 150.00 $2,550

Curbs 600 LF 12.00 $7,200

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 15 EA 300.00 $4,500
Ornamental Trees 7 EA 300.00 $2,100
Turf (Seed) 5,000 SY 0.30 $1,500
Irrigation 2,500 SY 15.00 $37,500

Site Furnishings
Benches 10 EA 550.00 $5,500
Bollards 20 EA 400.00 $8,000
Trash Receptacles 12 EA 500.00 $6,000
Lighting 10 LS 4000.00 $40,000

Subtotal $250,850

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $100,340

Contingency (20%) 20% % $50,170

Estimated Project Budget $440,238

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-7
Cost Estimate - PIP #6 Building 8401 And 8402 Site And Landscape
Improvements
- Map 6.6

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 0 SF 2.00 $0
Sidewalk Demolition 1000 SF 2.50 $2,500
Building Demolition 0 CF 0.30 $0
Utility Relocation/New Utility 5% % Construction $17,918
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $17,918

Subtotal $38,335

Signage 8 EA 500.00 $4,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 12,000 SF 3.00 $36,000

Pavers 0 SF 12.50 $0

Asphalt Parking Lot and Road 0 SF 2.40 $0

Pavement Striping
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 0 EA 150.00 $0

Volley Ball Courts 2 EA 15000.00 $30,000

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 32 EA 300.00 $9,600
Ornamental Tree 76 EA 300.00 $22,800
Turf (Seed) 2,500 SY 0.30 $750
Irrigation 4,000 SY 15.00 $60,000
Tree Grate 28 EA 1600.00 $44,800

Site Furnishings
Gazebo/Pavilion 3 EA 20000.00 $60,000
Benches 48 EA 550.00 $26,400
Bicycle Rack 8 EA 1000.00 $8,000
Picnic Table 26 EA 500.00 $13,000
Trash Receptacles 6 EA 500.00 $3,000
Lighting 10 LS 4000.00 $40,000

Subtotal $358,350

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $143,340

Contingency (20%) 20% % $71,670

Estimated Project Budget $611,695

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-8
Cost Estimate - PIP #7 Lee Club Site And Building Improvements
- Map 6.4

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 11,000 SF 2.00 $22,000
Sidewalk Demolition 2500 SF 2.50 $6,250
Building Demolition 2000 SF 5.00 $10,000
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $30,755
Utility Relocation/New Utility 10% % Construction $14,468
Subtotal $83,473
Lee Club Building
Foundation 900 SF 5.5 $4,950
Structural- Columns 1 LS 7500 $7,500
Roofing- Standing Seam 24,000 SF 8.8 $211,200
Roofing Low Slope 550 LF 3.01 $1,656
Brick Veneer 1,590 SF 10.85 $17,252
Concrete 1 LS 15000 $15,000
Siding- Sandwich Aluminum 8,200 SF 13.85 $113,570
Glazing- Store Front Door 160 SF 34.85 $5,576
Glazing- Store Front 930 SF 34.85 $32,411
Glazing- Curtain Wall 1,786 SF 34.85 $62,242
Metal Trim 3,626 SF 4.35 $15,773
Hand Rail 1 LS 6500 $6,500
Dormers 10 EA 750 $7,500
Sun Screen 1 LS 5400 $5,400
Electric Lighting 1 LS 1250 $1,250

Signage 5 EA 500.00 $2,500

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 10,800 SF 3.00 $32,400
Asphalt Parking Lot and Road 17,000 SF 2.40 $40,800
Pavement Striping
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 4 EA 150.00 $600
Curbs 1,000 LF 12.00 $12,000
Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 50 EA 300.00 $15,000
Ornamental Tree 9 EA 300.00 $2,700
Shrubs 50 EA 25.00 $1,250
Turf (Seed) 250 SY 0.30 $75
Irrigation 250 SY 15.00 $3,750
Subtotal $615,104

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% $246,041

Contingency (20%) 20% % $123,021

Estimated Project Budget $1,067,639

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007, BNI

Page G-9
Cost Estimate - PIP #8 PXtra Complex Buildings Improvements
- Map 6.8A, 6.8B, 6.8C

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 1 LS 2000.00 $2,000
Sidewalk Demolition 1000 SF 2.50 $2,500
Building Demolition 1 LS 25000.00 $25,000

General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $64,692

Subtotal $94,192
PXtra Building Complex
Foundation 3,200 SF 5.5 $17,600
Structural- Columns 1 LS 25000 $25,000
Structural- Mansard 1 LS 150000 $150,000
Roofing- Standing Seam 58,500 SF 8.8 $514,800
Roofing Trim Metal 35,450 LF 3.01 $106,705
Brick Veneer 13,000 SF 10.85 $141,050
Concrete 1 LS 10000 $10,000
Siding- Steel Pre Finished 26,452 SF 6.85 $181,196
Glazing- Store Front Door 546 SF 34.85 $19,028
Glazing- Store Front 1,260 SF 34.85 $43,911
Glazing- Curtain Wall 711 SF 34.85 $24,778
Metal Trim 3,626 SF 4.35 $15,773
Electric Lighting 1 LS 40000 $40,000

Signage 4 EA 1000.00 $4,000

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree EA 300.00 $0
Evergreen Tree EA 200.00 $0
Shrubs/Groundcover EA 25.00 $0
Turf (Seed) SY 0.30 $0
Irrigation SY 15.00 $0

Grading
Cut and Fill Grading CY 10.00 $0

Site Furnishings
Benches EA 550.00 $0
Bicycle Rack EA 1000.00 $0
Bollards EA 400.00 $0
Trash Receptacles EA 500.00 $0
Lighting LS 4000.00 $0

Subtotal $1,293,841

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 0% % $0

Contingency (20%) 20% % $258,768

Estimated Project Budget $1,646,802

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007, BNI

Page G-10
Cost Estimate - PIP #9 PXtra Complex Site Circulations Improvements
- Map 6.8

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 6,268 SF 2.00 $12,536
Sidewalk Demolition 20000 SF 2.50 $50,000
Building Demolition 0 CF 0.30 $0
Utility Relocation/New Utility 20% % Construction $162,363
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $40,591

Subtotal $265,490

Signage 20 EA 500.00 $10,000

Dumpster Enclosure 12 EA 5000.00 $60,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 1,488 SF 3.00 $4,464

Asphalt Parking Lot and Road 137,000 SF 2.40 $328,800

Pavement Striping
Parking Stall 700 EA 15.00 $10,500
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 5 EA 150.00 $750

Curbs 10,000 LF 12.00 $120,000

Controlled Access Gates 2 EA 2000.00 $4,000

ADA Ramp Access Bldg 4 EA 15000.00 $60,000

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 84 EA 300.00 $25,200
Turf (Seed) 5,000 SY 0.30 $1,500
Irrigation 2,000 SY 15.00 $30,000

Grading
Cut and Fill Grading 7,500 CY 10.00 $75,000

Site Furnishings
Bollards 4 EA 400.00 $1,600
Lighting 20 LS 4000.00 $80,000

Subtotal $811,814

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $324,726

Contingency (20%) 20% % $162,363

Estimated Project Budget $1,564,392

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-11
Cost Estimate - PIP #10 Realign Battle Drive Away from PXtra Building to Increase the
Setback Distance.
- Map 6.7

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 215,527 SF 2.00 $431,054
Sidewalk Demolition 8000 SF 2.50 $20,000
Building Demolition 0 CF 0.30 $0
Utility Relocation/New Utility 20% % Construction $102,786
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $25,697

Subtotal $579,537

Signage 12 EA 500.00 $6,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 20,000 SF 3.00 $60,000

Asphalt Parking Lot and Road 85,200 SF 2.40 $204,480

Pavement Striping
Lane Markings 200 EA 15.00 $3,000
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 30 EA 150.00 $4,500

Curbs 4,600 LF 12.00 $55,200

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 140 EA 300.00 $42,000
Shrubs/Groundcover 100 EA 25.00 $2,500
Turf (Seed) 2,500 SY 0.30 $750
Irrigation 2,500 SY 15.00 $37,500

Grading
Cut and Fill Grading 5,000 CY 10.00 $50,000

Site Furnishings
Lighting 12 LS 4000.00 $48,000

Subtotal $513,930

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $205,572

Contingency (20%) 20% % $102,786

Estimated Project Budget $1,401,825

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-12
Cost Estimate - PIP #11 Develop Pedestrian Linkages Between the Various
Destinations in the Central Community Services Area

- Map 6.8

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Utility Relocation/New Utility 15% % Construction $38,490
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $12,830

Subtotal $51,320

Signage 10 EA 500.00 $5,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 46,500 SF 3.00 $139,500

Pavement Striping
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 4 EA 150.00 $600

Tree Grate 8 EA 1600.00 $12,800

Plant Material
Ornamental Trees 74 EA 300.00 $22,200
Irrigation 4,600 SY 15.00 $69,000

Grading
Cut and Fill Grading 750 CY 10.00 $7,500

Subtotal $256,600

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $102,640

Contingency (20%) 20% % $51,320

Estimated Project Budget $461,880

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-13
Cost Estimate - PIP #12 Enlarge the Pedestrian Area in Front of the PXtra to
Increase the Standoff Distance from Vehicles
- Map 6.9

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Utility Relocation/New Utility 5% % Construction $20,840
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $20,840

Subtotal $41,681

Signage 4 EA 500.00 $2,000

Dumpster Enclosure 2 EA 5000.00 $10,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 8,500 SF 3.00 $25,500

Plaza 20,000 SF 12.50 $250,000

ADA Ramp Access Bldg 1 EA 15000.00 $15,000

Tree Grates 8 EA 1600.00 $12,800

Plant Material
Ornamental Tree 35 EA 300.00 $10,500
Shrubs/Groundcover 125 EA 25.00 $3,125
Turf (Seed) 100 SY 0.30 $30
Irrigation 35 LS 150.00 $5,250

Site Furnishings
Benches 12 EA 550.00 $6,600
Bicycle Rack 4 EA 1000.00 $4,000
Bollards 50 EA 400.00 $20,000
Planters 35 EA 200.00 $7,000
Trash Receptacles 10 EA 500.00 $5,000
Lighting 10 LS 4000.00 $40,000

Subtotal $416,805

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $166,722

Contingency (20%) 20% % $83,361

Estimated Project Budget $708,569

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-14
Cost Estimate - PIP #13 Commissary and PX Parking Lots Landscape
Improvements
- Map 6.9

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Utility Relocation/New Utility 2% % Construction $4,371
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $10,928

Subtotal $15,299

Signage 4 EA 500.00 $2,000

Dumpster Enclosure 4 EA 5000.00 $20,000

Pavement Striping
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 4 EA 150.00 $600

Screen Wall 350 LF 140.00 $49,000

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 200 EA 300.00 $60,000
Ornamental Tree 100 EA 300.00 $30,000
Evergreen Tree 28 EA 200.00 $5,600
Shrubs/Groundcover 150 EA 25.00 $3,750
Turf (Seed) 2,000 SY 0.30 $600
Irrigation 3,000 SY 15.00 $45,000

Site Furnishings
Trash Receptacles 4 EA 500.00 $2,000

Subtotal $218,550

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $87,420

Contingency (20%) 20% % $43,710

Estimated Project Budget $364,979

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-15
Cost Estimate - PIP #14 Museum Campus Site Improvements
- Map 6.10

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Asphalt Pavement Demolition 92,000 SF 2.00 $184,000
Sidewalk Demolition 6732 SF 2.50 $16,830
Building Demolition 0 CF 0.30 $0
Utility Relocation/New Utility 15% % Construction $71,891
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $23,964

Subtotal $296,684

Signage 8 EA 500.00 $4,000

Dumpster Enclosure 6 EA 5000.00 $30,000

Gate 1 EA 7500.00 $7,500

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 20,000 SF 3.00 $60,000

Fence and Guard Rail 900 LF 60.00 $54,000

Asphalt Parking Lot and Road 34,216 SF 2.40 $82,118

Pavement Striping 1,000 LF 1.00 $1,000

Curbs 5,000 LF 12.00 $60,000

Pergola 1 EA 50000.00 $50,000

Pavement Markings 6,000 LF 1.00 $6,000

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 96 EA 300.00 $28,800
Ornamental Tree 54 EA 301.00 $16,254
Shrubs/Groundcover 200 EA 25.00 $5,000
Turf (Seed) 2,000 SY 0.30 $600
Irrigation LS $50,000

Grading
Cut and Fill Grading 700 CY 10.00 $7,000

Site Furnishings
Bicycle Rack 6 EA 1000.00 $6,000
Bollards 20 EA 400.00 $8,000
Trash Receptacles 6 EA 500.00 $3,000
Lighting 18 EA 4000.00 $72,000
Subtotal $479,272

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $191,709

Contingency (20%) 20% % $95,854

Estimated Project Budget $1,063,520

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-16
Cost Estimate - PIP #15 Develop a Troop Movement Pathway Flanking Sisisky
Boulevard. Between Shop Road and Carver Ave
- Map 6.11

CY=Cubic Yards EA=Each

LF=Linear Feet LS=Lump Sum
SF=Square Feet %=Percent of Construction

Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost

Demolition
Utility Relocation/New Utility 2% % Construction $1,632
General Allowance (site) 5% % Construction $4,079

Subtotal $5,711

Signage 2 EA 500.00 $1,000

Concrete Walkway/Sidewalk 18,840 SF 3.00 $56,520

Pavement Striping
Crosswalk w/ ADA Ramp 5 EA 150.00 $750

Plant Material
Deciduous Tree 37 EA 300.00 $11,100
Turf (Seed) 800 SY 0.30 $240
Irrigation LS $5,000

Grading
Cut and Fill Grading 697 CY 10.00 $6,970

Subtotal $81,580

Allowance for Work Inside Security Areas 40% % $32,632

Contingency (20%) 20% % $16,316

Estimated Project Budget $136,239

Unit Cost information derived from Means 2007

Page G-17
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Appendix H
Go to Table of
Contents

Page G-18
 APPENDIX H

SELF-HELP PROJECT CHECKLIST

Installation: develop a self-help projects checklist in accord with the degree of

latitude given to self-help projects at your installation.

Page H-1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Appendix I
Go to Table of
Contents

Page H-2
 APPENDIX I

INTERIOR FINISHES STANDARDS

1. WALLS

Interior partitions and walls at Fort Lee are generally gypsum wallboard on metal
framing. Wall finishing in high visibility or high traffic areas, such as lobbies, primary
corridors, primary private offices, conference rooms, classrooms and breakout rooms,
break rooms, public restrooms (above ceramic tile wainscot), and locker rooms, shall be
vinyl wall covering.

Other walls shall be painted gypsum wallboard. Painted CMU may be used in stairwells
and in mechanical, electrical, and other utility rooms. Paint used in areas where high
humidity is expected, such as bathrooms, shall include mildewcide additives. In very
high traffic corridors, such as outside classrooms and offices, architectural fabric panels
shall be mounted on the walls for sound attenuation. For sound attenuation, barracks
sleeping room mechanical closets shall be enclosed with 2 layers of gypsum wallboard
attached to a metal stud frame.

Public restrooms shall have ceramic tile wainscot extending to 5 feet above finish floor
surface, except it shall meet the bottom of wall-mounted mirrors and shall surround wall-
mounted fixtures, such as towel dispensers, that extend above the top of the wainscot.
Ceramic tile shall be set on gypsum wallboard. Barracks room showers shall be
ceramic tile on gypsum wallboard. All tile trim units shall match the adjoining flat tile.

FLOORS
2. FLOORS

The preferred floor covering is rolled carpet with wood baseboard. Floors in lobbies,
vestibules, and corridors shall have a center panel and borders of a different color or
texture. Borders shall be no wider than 1 foot-3 inches. Carpeting in offices, barracks
rooms, classrooms, and breakout rooms shall be solid color with no border. Carpeting
in the instructor area in classrooms shall be set on rolled cushion or shall be double-
layered. All carpet shall be solution dyed and treated with anti-microbial protection.

Alternate floor covering for use in administration building lobbies and primary corridors
may be ceramic tile, with a ceramic tile base. This ceramic floor tile shall be 6- by 6-
inch, unglazed porcelain or natural clay tile with cushioned edges. All floor tiles shall

`
Page I-1
have a slip resistant surface. Alternate floor covering for use in computer room, break
and locker room, storage and vault room, and barracks commons room floors shall be
12- by 12-inch vinyl composition tile with natural wood base.

All restroom floors shall be ceramic tile. Public restroom floors shall be 2- by 2-inch
ceramic tile on a 2-inch mortar bed, with an expansion joint around the perimeter of the
room. Shower pans shall be 2- by 2-inch ceramic tile on a 1-1/4-inch setting bed that is
sloped to the drain and is under laid with elastometric sheet waterproofing. Shower stall
thresholds shall be 4-inch CMU filled with concrete and tied to the floor slab with No.4
reinforcing bar. The threshold shall be finished with 2- by 2-inch thin set ceramic tile
that matches the shower floor. Trim units shall match adjoining flat tile.

Stair treads and utility room floors shall be concrete. Stair treads and risers shall have
continuous black rubber stair covers with textured threads or safety nosing of cast
aluminum with cross-hatched abrasive surfaces, or extruded aluminum with abrasive
inserts.

CEILINGS
3. CEILINGS

The preferred ceiling is 2- by 2-foot acoustic tile in a suspended grid under-hung from
the bottom chord of the roof trusses (or the trusses between floors). Ceilings in primary
lobby areas may be painted gypsum wallboard or acoustic tile and painted gypsum
wallboard. Locker, storage, vault, utility room, and restroom ceilings shall be gypsum
wallboard. Barracks bathroom ceilings shall be plaster. Painted ceilings shall be white.

DOORS

4. DOORS

Interior doors may be glass or prefinished solid core wood. Interior glass doors may
have a sidelight that is equal to or wider than the door, but shall have a marking and rail
to prevent accidental collision. Classroom and breakout rooms shall have a view panel
at the entrance.

Public restrooms in classrooms and office buildings shall be equipped with automatic
door openers. Other buildings must be evaluated for this need. Door controls shall be
positioned to allow for easy access and for the doors to open without interfering with the
maneuvering wheelchair.

LIGHTING
5. LIGHTING

Interior lighting shall generally be fluorescent, electronic ballast, 4100-K, low mercury,

`
Page I-2
TCLP compliant, in 3-T8 lamp aluminum fixtures. Semispecular aluminum louvers shall
be hinged and held in place with spring loaded cam latches. Prismatic diffusers shall be
used in rooms and acrylic diffusers shall be used in corridors. Fill-in lighting fixtures
shall be recessed with a 26-watt PL type lamp, electronic ballast, and 6-inch specular
clear, open alzak reflector. All lighting shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1 for energy
efficiency. Interior lighting systems shall include night-lights at locations required by
code.

All fixtures in classrooms shall be switched and ballasted so that 1-, 2-, or 3-lamp
illumination may be selected from the instructor area.

Barracks sleeping rooms shall have wall-mounted lighting fixtures above the bed area,
desk area, and sink in the bathroom. Each light shall be switched separately, with the
bed area light switch inside and adjacent to the entry door and the desk area light near
the desk location. The bathroom switch shall be outside and adjacent to the bathroom
door. Balcony lighting shall be ceiling-mounted, metal halide, photocell controlled with
specular anodized aluminum reflector, gasketed prismatic borosilicate glass refractor
lens, and weatherproof die-cast aluminum housing.

Restrooms and mechanical rooms shall have 2-lamp, single switch fluorescent fixtures
with a frosted shatter resistant diffuser.

FURNISHINGS AND FIXTURES

6. INTERIOR FINISHES

6.1 Break Rooms

Break rooms shall have a 36-inch high, plastic laminate covered 5/8-inch plywood
counter with a 4 inch splashback. Sinks shall have separate hot and cold faucets. Two
feet above the counter surface shall be a wall-mounted 24-inch high cabinet that is the
same length as the counter unit. Cabinet material shall be 5/8-inch laminate material
where visible and 1/2-inch plywood where hidden. All cabinets shall have 3/4-inch
laminate material doors and stainless steel hardware.

Water coolers shall be provided near intersections of primary and secondary corridors.
Coolers shall be electrically cooled, stainless steel, wall mounted with a splashback,
chrome plated brass anti-squirt bubbler, and adjustable “P” trap with cleanout. Drinking
water must be delivered at 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

Elevators in multistory buildings shall be hydraulic lift type with a minimum capacity of
6,000 pounds and must meet ADA or UFAS standards for accessibility as appropriate to
the use of the building. Handrails in stairwells shall be complimentary to the
appearance of the building and maintenance free.

6.2 Public Restrooms

`
Page I-3
The number of restroom fixtures in public restrooms shall conform to the minimum
number required by code. Sinks, water closets, and urinals shall be vitreous china.
Water closets and urinals shall be wall-mounted type. Water closets shall have heavy
duty plastic seats. Flush mechanisms that do not exceed low-flow requirements (6 GPF
for wall outlet units, and 1.5 GPF for urinals measured at water pressure of 15-90 PSI)
shall be used, and automatic-sensing flush controls shall be used for all fixtures in
classroom building restrooms. Water valves on water closets, lavatories, and urinals
shall be standard type, washerless.

Public restroom lavatories shall be plastic laminate counters, with 4-inch splashback at
rear and both ends. All exposed surfaces shall be covered with plastic laminate. Front
and rear 2- by 4-inch steel tube stringers shall support the counter and shall be cross
braced with 2- by 4-inch steel tubes between sinks. Stringers shall rest on 2- by 2-inch
steel legs built into partition walls at each end of the counter.

Mirrors shall be mounted on the wall behind the lavatory and shall extend from the
splashback to a height 7 feet above finished floor. Mirrors shall extend in a single unit
the length of the counter. Mirror glass shall be nominal 0.23-inch thick, conforming to
ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electroplated copper
coating, and protective organic coating.

Paper towel dispensers shall be lever operated, large diameter roll type. Toilet paper
dispensers shall be large diameter, twin roll type. All restroom hardware shall be
stainless steel. Electric hand dryers shall be used in classroom building restrooms.

Toilet partitions shall be fabricated of 1-inch thick polymer material, and should be
ceiling mounted. The bathroom vanity in barracks rooms shall have 1/2-inch plywood
back and sides with a 5/8-inch plywood or particle board top. Counter surface shall be
plastic laminate and doors shall be 3/4-inch red oak veneer plywood with lipped edges.
The 2- by 6-inch support shall be covered by a rubber base where exposed. Vanity
backsplash shall be 4 inches high where cabinet abuts walls.

Mirrors shall have stainless steel frames. Bathroom hardware, including shower rod,
retractable clothesline, soap dish, towel bar, toothbrush holder, and miscellaneous
hardware shall be stainless steel.

6.3 Barracks Rooms

Barracks room water closets shall be porcelain, floor-mounted type with plastic seats
and covers. Standard type flush mechanisms that do not exceed low-flow requirements
(3.5 GPF measured at water pressure of 15-90 PSI) shall be used.

The sleeping room wardrobe shall include three drawers a hanger rod, and a storage
shelf and shall be enclosed by two, 1-3/4 inch thick solid core doors. The wardrobe
components shall be framed by 4-inch side walls and shall be constructed with 3/4-inch
plywood with 1-inch nominal solid wood trim. All exposed plywood shall be A grade.

`
Page I-4
The wardrobe shall have an interior light and door lock.

SECURITY AND FIRE SAFETY

7. SECURITY AND FIRE SAFETY

Fire alarm systems shall be tied into the Fort Lee alarm system loop, and shall be
compatible with existing equipment. Buildings shall have a fire alarm box pull system
that ties into the Fort Lee loop system, where access is available. Alarm systems shall
be local energy trip type, supervised by building fire alarm panel. For security,
emergency call boxes and security cameras may be required in some locations.

Facilities shall be sprinklered where required. Sprinkler systems shall be wet pipe
systems fed by 6-inch supply mains and with a fire department connection between the
alarm check valve and the flow switch. Two 300-PSI water pressure gauges shall be
mounted on the alarm check valve. Each building system shall have a 2-inch drain at
the alarm check valve. The connection to the main shall have a control valve with a
tamper switch.

Fire extinguishers shall be stored at 75-foot maximum intervals in all corridors with one
in each vestibule. Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be stainless steel or fiberglass with
stainless steel hardware and tempered glass fronts.

Maximum travel distance to a building exit shall be 250 feet. Maximum dead end
corridor shall be 20 feet. Minimum corridor width shall be 3 feet-8 inches. Minimum
clear opening shall be 2 feet-6 inches.

Corridors, stairs, and vestibules shall be protected by 1-hour rated partitions with 20-
minute rated doors. Elevator rooms and shafts shall be protected by 1-hour rated
partitions with 3/4-hour doors. Electrical rooms shall be enclosed in 2-hour rated
partitions with 3/4-hour doors. Utility chases shall be enclosed in 1-hour rated
partitions.

Exit signs shall be self-powered LED illuminated type with battery backup. Emergency
lights shall have automatic power failure feature, test switch, pilot light, and fully
automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be
sealed electrolyte type, shall operate unattended, and require no maintenance,
including no additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years. Exit signs and
emergency lights shall have a minimum emergency run time of 1-and-1/2 hours.

Each barracks room shall have a ceiling-mounted combination smoke and heat detector
with alarm that sounds in the room for smoke, and both in the room and at the central
system for heat. Smoke/heat detectors shall comply with UL 268, Smoke Detectors for
Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

`
Page I-5
 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Appendix J
Go to Table of
Contents

`
Page I-6
APPENDIX J

RESERVED

Page J-1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Appendix K
Go to Table of
Contents

Page J-2
APPENDIX K

EXTERIOR MATERIALS CHARTS

Links
Go to Appendix L
Go to Table of Contents

PageK-1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PageK-2
 Exterior Building Materials Matrix
VISUAL ZONES

Indutrial Community Services Tenant Facilities Family Housing Open Space and Field Ordnance School
Gateway VZ Living- Training VZ
VZ VZ VZ VZ Training VZ Training Complex

BUILDING ELEMENT DESCRIPTION MATERIALS COLOR DIMENSIONS SOURCES or EQUAL IMAGE

Sisisky Boulevard Gate

Lee Ave. Gate
Mahone Ave Gate
Adams Ave Gate
Shop Road Gate
North- Miflin to Bld 1109
West- 49th Quarter Master
Group and Vicinity
South- CASCOM
Shop Road
Lee Club
PXtra
Lee Playhouse
East
West
Jackson Circle- RCI
Cantonment Family Housing
Areas- RCI
Golf Course Area
Central Open Space and
Training
TA-5 Ordnance School
Training Complex
North Range

Roof Types Or Equal Products

Owens Corning Oakridge

Architectural Asphalt Refer to Color Matrix
Sloped: gable, hip Sloped at 4:12 or greater Dimension Shingle Pro 40 AR Shadow          z z z   z z  
Shingle Appendix L

CONTRACT
CONTRACT
Shingles

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Galvanized Steel-
Metal sloped and Refer to Color Matrix
Sloped at 2:12 or greater Standing Seam w/ 24" Panels McElroy Metals z z z z z z z z z z z z z z    
gable Appendix L: Bronze
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Kynar 500 Finish

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Galvanized Steel-
Refer to Color Matrix 16"-24" Panels or
Metal Regular or Irregular slope Standing Seam w/ McElroy Metals      z z z  z z z z z   z z
Appendix L sheets
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Kynar 500 Finish

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Single Ply: TPO Owens Corning,

Low Slope and Refer to Color Matrix Large sheet roll or
Sloped less than 2:12 Membrane or BU: Certainteed, Durolast,      z z z z z z z z z   z 
Flat Roofs Appendix L standard roll
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Modified Bitumen Sarnifil

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Fenestration Or Equal Products

Windows-
Metal Frame with
Metal
Thermopane insul. Windows, Kawneer
Laminate and Refer to Color Matrix
double low E glass, Aluminum Steel Standard Size A & S Window Assoc.      z z z  z z z z z z z  z
Glaze as Req'd Appendix L
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Argon(R4) or Krypton(R10) MILGARD

according to
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

filled
AT/FP
Windows-
Wood Double or Single Hung
Laminate and Variance 8959, note: prefer Fiber Glass Vinyl Refer to Color Matrix MILGARD Anderson
Standard Size z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z  z
Glaze as Req'd single hung for less energy Aluminum Appendix L Pella
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

according to consumption
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

AT/FP
Windows-
Synthetic
Laminate and
Refer to Color Matrix MILGARD Anderson
Glaze as Vinyl Clad Frame and/or Vinyl Standard Size z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z  
Appendix L Fleetwood
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Req'daccording
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

to AT/FP
requirements

Store Front
according to Metal Frame/ Metal Refer to Color Matrix Amweld CECO
Vista Wall Standard Size z z z z z z z z z z z z z z   z z
AT/FP Door Appendix L Windsor Republic
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

requirements
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

AMBICO
Metal OR Wood Refer to Color Matrix
Doors Metal Door Standard Size Dimension Millworks z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Frame/ Metal Door Appendix L
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Steelcraft
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Refer to Color Matrix Steelcraft AMBICO

Doors Composite Composite Standard Size z z z z z z z z  z z z z z   z z
Appendix L Taylor Door
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

AMBICO
Refer to Color Matrix
Doors Steel Storm Pre-finished Steel Standard Size Dimension Millworks z z z z z z z z  z z z z z z z  
Appendix L
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Steelcraft
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Walls- Exterior Or Equal Products

Red Brick Face Brick Veneer, Lawrenceville 111, ACME

Brick- Preferred or Complimentary Brick Fired Clay Brick Red, Buff Modular, Engineer, Utility Brick, Cunningham Brick z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z  z z
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Veneer Co.
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Pre-cast Precast structural,

Brick and Stone Veneer
Concrete- with Brick, Concrete Fiber interlocking Panelized, NICHIHA,
Appearance non-structural Red, Buff z z    z z z z z z z z z z  z z
Visible Simulated Composite Brick on cement Arto Thin Brick Veneer
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

thin Brick or Brick Panels

Likeness of Brick substrate
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

K- 3
 Exterior Building Materials Matrix
VISUAL ZONES

Indutrial Community Services Tenant Facilities Family Housing Open Space and Field Ordnance School
Gateway VZ Living- Training VZ
VZ VZ VZ VZ Training VZ Training Complex

BUILDING ELEMENT DESCRIPTION MATERIALS COLOR DIMENSIONS SOURCES or EQUAL IMAGE

Sisisky Boulevard Gate

Lee Ave. Gate
Mahone Ave Gate
Adams Ave Gate
Shop Road Gate
North- Miflin to Bld 1109
West- 49th Quarter Master
Group and Vicinity
South- CASCOM
Shop Road
Lee Club
PXtra
Lee Playhouse
East
West
Jackson Circle- RCI
Cantonment Family Housing
Areas- RCI
Golf Course Area
Central Open Space and
Training
TA-5 Ordnance School
Training Complex
North Range

Exterior Panelized Wall Refer to Color Matrix Minimum Coverage Butler,Flexspan

Siding- Metal Pre Metal z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
System Appendix L Varies McElroy Metal, Inc.

CONTRACT
CONTRACT

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Stucco or 2 Part Exterior Cementious Wall Masonry Cement Refer to Color Matrix Dryvit
Texture As Specified z z z z z z z z  z z z z z z   
Stucco system Finish Synthetic Finish Appendix L Sto Corp. CONTRACT
CONTRACT

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Concrete
Refer to Color Matrix As Required- Structural
Masonry Cast Split Face CMU with Color Structural or Veneer Nominal 8x8x16 Inches z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Appendix L and Veneer
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Stone
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Metal panel, Alcan Composites,

Refer to Color Matrix
Composite Architectural Panel System Concrete Fiber, Varies Corrugated Metals, Inc. z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z  z z
Appendix L
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Composite Mtls. James Hardie

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Finishes Or Equal Products

McElroy Metal, Inc.

Eaves or Gables Steel or Vinyl, Refer to Color Matrix
Soffit As Specified Berridge Mfr. Co. or z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Existing Wood Perforated/ Solid Appendix L
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Local Sheet Metal

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Cover all Existing Wood McElroy Metal, Inc.

Refer to Color Matrix Minimum 6"
Fascia/ drip Fascia and Installed New Steel or Vinyl Berridge Mfr. Co. or z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Appendix L or as Specified
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Construction Local Sheet Metal

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Sloped and Low Slope Roof McElroy Metal, Inc.

Continuous Pre- Refer to Color Matrix Minimum 4"
Gutter Rain Water Collection Berridge Mfr. Co. or z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Finished Metal Appendix L or as Specified
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Systems Local Sheet Metal

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Rain Water Channeling to McElroy Metal, Inc.

Refer to Color Matrix Minimum 3"
Downspout Ground Except Historic Pre-Finished Metal Berridge Mfr. Co. or z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Appendix L or as Specified
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Areas Local Sheet Metal

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Roofing Or Equal Products

Certainteed-LdMark. 30
Asphalt Shingle- Simulated Wood Shingle Laminated Asphalt Refer to Color Matrix
12" X 36" Nominal ELK Brand- Prestique 30      z z z       z z  
Architectural Appearance Fiberglass Appendix L
Tamko- Heritage 30
ACCORDING TO CONTRACT
ACCORDING TO CONTRACT

Refer to Color Matrix McElroy Metal, Inc.

Pre-Finished Metal
Standing Seam MProfiles from 1 1/2" to 3" High Appendix L: Slate 24" Panels Berridge Mfr. Co. z z z z z z z z z z z z z z   z z
Kynar Finish
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Blue Petersen Aluminum

ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Durolast
Refer to Color Matrix 10'- 12' widths
Membrane- SingleFactory Prepared Roll Sheets PVC or Similar Sarnafil- Sarnafast Mule z z z z z z z z z z z z z z   z z
Appendix L with Seam Sealing
CONTRACT
CONTRACT

Hide- TPO
ACCORDING TO
ACCORDING TO

Specialty Or Equal Products

Locks- Main Entry Campus, CM Lock Stainless Satin Chrome Lever, cylinder/ mortise Schlage, Von Duprin z z z z z z z z z z z z z z N?A N?A z z z z z
Locks- Store Fron Security Lockset Stainless Bronze Mortise Schlage      z z z z z z z z z N?A N?A z  z z z
Card Readers Security Card Swipe N/A N/A Mortise/ Surface Schlage z z z z z z z z z z z z z z N?A N?A z z z z z
                   

K-4
 APPENDIX L

EXTERIOR COLOR CHARTS

L.1 EXTERIOR COLOR CHARTS for INSTALLATION BUILDINGS

Colors schemes and building materials are critical design elements in relating adjacent
buildings and creating a compatible visual environment within an installation. This
section identifies the Fort Lee standard palette of colors for the cantonment and
Ordnance School Training Complex. A sufficient color palette range is provided to allow
for variety. General direction on the use and application of materials and their colors
follows:

x Avoid cluttered, cosmetic application of a number of different colors on a

facade. Simplistically, an exterior color scheme should consist of a wall color,
trim color, and an accent color, all of which should work together with the
choice of roofing to provide a harmonious appearance compatible with
adjacent structures and environs.

x Select colors from the following Exterior Color Chart based upon their
appropriateness to the building type, desired appearance, material to be
painted and prevailing architectural design and landscape character of the
installation. Ease of maintenance, and sustainability should also be
considered.

x Avoid garish colors. Strong or vibrant colors should be used with restraint and
should be limited to accents or focal points such as entrance doors where
appropriate.

L.2 PANTONE COLORS

The six digit color designations found in the Exterior Color Charts are Pantone numbers
taken from the Color Guide for Architecture and Interiors which have been cross-
referenced to the Pantone Process Guide. The colors in the Process Guide are
intended for viewing on a color monitor and for printing on a four-color process printer
(CMYK) using ISO 2846-1 inks. With proper calibration, colors viewed and printed
should accurately represent the specified color.

Calibration for Dell FP E171 & 1800FP Monitor is per manufacturer’s recommendation.

Page L-1
Calibration for Hewlett Packard Color 4500 is per manufacturer’s recommendation.

For calibration of equipment other than the above, contact Pantone at (201) 935-5500.

Due to calibration and other technical problems, the color of paint to be used should be
based on manufacturer’s correspondence to the six-digit Pantone A & I number and
shall not be predicated on matching a computer-generated sample.

The name provided for the colors is a generic name representing the color range and is
not the actual Pantone name for that color. Always use the six-digit Pantone A & I
number instead of the generic name when referencing the color.

Any color name given is generic and is for the purpose of general color identification
only. When referencing the color, use the six-digit Pantone A & I number.

L.3 COLOR VALIDATION

L.3.1 Due to calibration and other technical problems, the color of paint to be used
should be based on manufacturer’s correspondence to the six-digit PANTONE Number
and shall not be predicated on matching a computer-generated sample as seen in the
Exterior Color Charts.

L.3.2 “White” when given without a number shall be construed as generic and is
intended to cover those manufacturer’s paints and finished materials called “white”.
Some slight variance may be discernible from one manufacturer to another.

L.4 COLOR NAMES

Names given for colors are not those assigned by Pantone, Inc., but are the generic
names used by the Army for general color identification only. Always use the six-digit
PANTONE for architecture and interiors color guide number instead of the generic
name when specifying a color.

L.5 Supplemental COLOR BOARD

L.5.1 Included in this Appendix is a Color Board (Page L-4) containing squares with a
simulation of each color used in the Exterior Color Charts. The electronic reproduction
of this Color Board is, however, subject to some distortion and the color will be
inaccurate to a greater or lesser degree depending on the printer used, and must,
therefore, not be used in an attempt to accurately match or select paint samples.

L.5.2 A hard copy is available which contains accurate representations of all of the
Army’s standard exterior colors. This hard copy is the supplemental Color Board for the
IDS Appendix L: Hard Copy Version (Supplemental Page L-4a, intended to be
inserted immediately following Page L-4 as a supplement to that page).

L.5.3 The hard copy version of the color board may be requested by E-mail at:
Baxter.Lawrence@mantech.com with a copy to Dannie.Fason@mantech.com

Page L-2
If the E-mail is not acknowledged within three business days, call (703) 378-1030 to
verify the request. Provide the following information: quantity of color boards requested;
name, title, and telephone number of person placing the order; mailing address; and the
name of the installation.

L.6 FACTORY FINISHED MATERIALS

Colors given for surfaces that will be factory finished during manufacturing are intended
for guidance and are not intended to constitute a directive for a custom color or finish.
Colors shall be selected from standard manufacturer colors with the exception of those
products, which can be finished with a custom color at no additional cost or that would
not result in diminishment of the standard material guarantee or serviceability.

L.7 SPECIALTY FINISHES

Site Elements, addressed in Chapter 6, are painted one of the colors used in the Color
Charts and shown on the Color Board. Fire Hydrants (see Paragraph 6.6.6.5) which
shall be Nutmeg Brown in color shall be finished in a standard manufacturers paint,
suitable for this application, to which glass beads or other suitable reflective material
has been added so as to create a light reflective finish meeting NFPA standards.

L.8 WATER STORAGE TANK FINISHES

Water storage tank finishes shall be in accordance with guidance provided in Chapter 6,
paragraph 6.6.6.4.

Page L-3
COLOR BOARD for the Army Installation Design Standards / Appendix L
The color squares shown here are approximations of the PANTONE® for architecture and interiors color
numbers indicated. They have been simulated using RGB values and are intended to be reproduced
electronically. Color quality may vary with printer. PANTONE colors are a standard. In order to accurately
reproduce the specified colors on these sheets and meet the required US Army standard, you must use
the actual PANTONE swatch of the color indicated. A hard copy supplemental sheet with accurate color
representations is available. See Paragraph L.5 for details.

PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE

11-0604 TPX 11-0907 TPX 12-0910 TPX 12-4607 TPX 13-1009 TPX
SHELL ALMOND CUSTARD PASTEL SKY TAN

PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE

13-1013 TPX 13-1107 TPX 14-4506 TPX 15-1306 TPX 15-1309 TPX
ALLSPICE BEIGE BLUEGRAY TAUPE NATURAL

PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE

15-5704 TPX 16-1210 TPX 16-1221 TPX 16-6216 TPX 18-1027 TPX
GRAY MOCHA BROWN METAL GREEN DARK BROWN

PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE PANTONE

18-1444 TPX 19-1540 TPX 14-4318 TPX 18-1222 TPX
SALSA MAROON SKY BLUE NUTMEG BROWN
PANTONE colors displayed here may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE for architecture and interiors color publications for accurate color.
PANTONE®

Page L-4
 LISTING OF ORIGINAL SOURCE FEDERAL OR COMMERCIAL
MANUFACTURER'S DESIGNATION WITH NEW IDS NAME & ACCEPTABLE
PANTONE® DESIGNATIONS
Old Federal Color Other Name IDS Name PANTONE Color Process
Source ( C-M-Y-K )
Name and/or Number and/or Number (Generic) Number Number
Federal Paint PANTONE
Tan 23578 TAN 24-7 C 0-10-25-10
Number 13-1009 TPX
Federal Paint PANTONE
Tan 23717 CUSTARD 22-8 C 0-5-15-0
Number 12-0910 TPX
Federal Paint PANTONE
Gray 26492 GRAY 329-9 C 0-0-3-30
Number 15-5704 TPX
Federal Paint PANTONE
White 20372 TAUPE 31-8 C 5-10-20-20
Number 15-1306 TPX
Federal Paint METAL PANTONE
Metal Green 24373 285-7 C 25-0-30-25
Number GREEN 16-6216 TPX
Federal Paint PANTONE
Brown 20313 BROWN 76-8 C 0-25-25-20
Number 16-1221 TPX
Federal Paint PANTONE
Mocha 20372 MOCHA 48-9 C 10-15-25-15
Number 16-1210 TPX
Federal Paint PANTONE
Gray 25526 BLUEGRAY 213-9 C 20-03-03-15
Number 14-4506 TPX
Federal Paint PANTONE
Ochre 31643 ALLSPICE 36-8 C 0-15-25-0
Number 13-1013 TPX
(Oyster White) PANTONE
Duron Oyster White 921 ALMOND 32-9 C 0-5-10-0
Almond 5910W 11-0907 TPX
DARK PANTONE
Duron Alcazar Brown 8306N Dark Brown 5225N 318-1 C 70-80-100-30
BROWN 18-1027 TPX
PANTONE
Duron Shell White 917 White 5770W SHELL No Match 0-3-3-0
11-0604 TPX
Generic DARK PANTONE
Chocolate 318-1 C 70-80-100-30
(no mfg. ref.) BROWN 18-1027 TPX
PANTONE
ICI Dusty Trail # 425 NATURAL 44-7 C 20-20-30-5
15-1309 TPX
PANTONE
ICI Sand Motif # 422 MOCHA 48-9 C 10-15-25-15
16-1210 TPX
PANTONE
ICI Bisque # 436 BEIGE 43-9 C 10-10-15-0
13-1107 TPX
PANTONE
ICI Salsa # 123 SALSA 83-3 C 30-75-75-0
18-1444 TPX
PANTONE
ICI Liberty Red # 159 MAROON 69-2 C 20-75-80-30
19-1540 TPX
Generic PANTONE
Pastel Sky PASTEL SKY 247-8 C 20-0-5-3
(no mfg.ref.) 12-4607 TPX
PANTONE
SKY BLUE 229-7 C 40-5-5-0
14-4318 TPX
SHERMAN JAVA NUTMEG PANTONE
322-9 C 50-55-55-0
WILLIAMS SW6090 BROWN 18-1222 TPX
NOTE: Please refer to Appendix L (Supplemental Page L-4a) for accurate representations of the
PANTONE for architecture and interiors color numbers indicated. The suffix TPX indicates that
the color is shown on paper. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of
Pantone, Inc., 2004. All rights reserve

Page L-5
EXTERIOR COLOR CHART Fort Lee, Virginia
Notes
Building Design Color
Required Color Standard (Hyperlinked
Element Sample
)
Base (primary) Red Brick or simulated brick or
material limestone neutral gray tones
Walls

Almond
Secondary
material
Custard

Slate Blue

Sloped areas Dark Bronze

Roof

Fiberglass Shingle Gray/White

“Flat” areas White

Wood: White
Doors
Steel: Dark Brown 1
Fenestration

Storm Doors White as Required

Door & Window
Brown
Frames
Storm window or
White
sash
Window White, Custard

Fascia Dark Brown

Soffit White

Gutters and D.S. Dark Brown

Trim Items

Awnings and
Tan
canopies
Stair or balcony
railings,
Dark Brown
balusters, and
related trim
Handrails Dark Brown

Page L-6
 Building Design
Required Color Standard Color Sample Notes
Element
Fire Escapes Dark Brown
Trim Items

Grilles and
Brown
louvers
Coping Brown

Roof ventilators Blend to match roof As Required

Courtyard
enclosure walls,
Related Site
Structures

retaining walls,
Red Brick or Dark Brown
fences,
dumpster
enclosures
Porch crawl
White
space enclosure

NOTES:
Note 1 Verify all colors selections and materials with DOL/DPW, Master Planner.

Note 2 Provide Min. three (3) manufacturers for paint finish products.
Identify type, color, and texture of local brick and stone, to include mortar color
Note 3
and joint style.

Page L-7
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Appendix M
Go to Table of
Contents

Page L-8
 APPENDIX M

HISTORIC PRESERVATION GUIDELINES

M.1 INTRODUCTION

M.1.1 Military Planning and Design

M.1.1.1 Most of the history and literature about the

military does not deal with the topic of Army facility
planning and design processes. However, to plan for
the future development of an Army installation, it is
necessary to go back and attempt to understand what
has taken place there in the past.

M.1.1.2 In the development of its policies, the Army

had to deal with the question of how buildings relate
to one another by both use and layout and by
architectural characteristics. At least in its earliest
phases, this development was not always a conscious
formulation of policy; so much as it was the immediate
response to a given situation. Over the years, there
have been different forces affecting the process of
military planning in this country. Fort Lee has several
buildings that are have been determined to be eligible
for listing on the National Register of Historic Places
(Fig. M.1).

M.2 HISTORIC PRESERVATION REGULATIONS

M.2.1 The Army’s management of historic properties

is pursuant to the duties and responsibilities
established by Congress under the National Historic
Preservation Act (NHPA) of 1966 and its subsequent
amendments. This act committed Federal agencies to Fig. M.1 Building 4300, formerly the
Theater and now the Lee Playhouse.
a program of identification and protection of historic
properties on the land they own. The NHPA
established the Advisory Council on Historic
Preservation (ACHP) to “advise the President and the
Congress on matters relating to historic preservation;
(and to) recommend measures to coordinate activities

Page M-1
of Federal, State, and local agencies.” (16 U.S.C.
470j)

M.2.2 The NHPA also created the National Register

of Historic Places to designate publicly or privately
owned resources and to encourage identification and
planning which promotes the compatible use of these
properties. The National Register is the official listing
of the nation’s historic and cultural resources
considered worthy of preservation. It includes
“districts, sites, buildings, structures, and objects
significant in American history, architecture,
archaeology, engineering, and culture”. (16 U.S.C.
470a)

M.2.3 The NHPA has established a number of

procedural steps, which Federal agencies must meet
in order to comply with the intent of the law. This is
set forth in Section 106 of the NHPA which requires
that: “the head of any Federal agency having direct or
indirect jurisdiction over a proposed Federal or
federally assisted undertaking in any State and the
head of any Federal department or independent
agency having authority to license any undertaking
shall, prior to the approval of the expenditure of any
Federal funds on the undertaking or prior to the
issuance of any license, as the case may be, take into
account the effect of the undertaking on any district,
site, buildings, structure, or object that is included in
or eligible for inclusion in the National Register. The
head of any such Federal agency shall afford the
Advisory Council on Historic Preservation established
under Title II of this Act a reasonable opportunity to
comment with regard to such undertaking.” (16 U.S.C.
470f)

M.2.4 Pursuant to its authority in overseeing the

nation’s historic preservation programs, the
Department of the Interior has developed regulations
which amount to a set of acceptable standards for
work on properties listed in or eligible for listing in the
National Register. The Secretary of the Interior’s
Standards and Guidelines for Archeology and Historic
Preservation act as a guide to the Advisory Council
and State Historic Preservation Offices in their
procedural review of Federal undertakings. These
guidelines should also act as standards for all Federal

Page M-2
agencies as they commence planning for any
undertaking, which has the potential to trigger Section
106 review, thus assuring that all proposed projects
would meet Advisory Council and NHPA requirements
(Fig. M.2).

M.2.5 Federal agencies must comply with the NHPA

by following a series of steps detailed in 36 CFR 800.
The Army further explains its policies and procedures
in Army Regulation (AR) 200-4, Cultural Resources
Management and Department of the Army Pamphlet
(DA PAM) 200-4, Cultural Resources Management.
This Installation Design Guideline is intended to be
used in conjunction with the above regulations as well
as with the Fort Lee Integrated Cultural Resources
Management Plan (ICRMP).

M.2.6 Buildings 3206, 4300 and 10000 at Fort Lee

have been determined to be eligible for listing and
inclusion to the National Register of Historic Places.
Consultation with the State Historic Preservation
Office (SHPO) must take place before making any
additions or modifications to Buildings 3206 and 4300. Fig. M.2 - Many Army Properties Are
Listed on the National Register of
Building 10000 is still eligible, however Capehart-
Historical Places.
Wherry structures have been documented under an
Army-wide agreement therefore no additional
consultation is required.

M.3 STANDARDS AND GUIDLELINES

M.3.1 Rehabilitation of Historic Properties. Design

and renovation guidelines for historic districts are of
necessity much broader than design guidelines for
single structures. Such guidelines must not only
address the, appropriate architectural image (style,
material, etc.) for proposed new buildings, they must
also address how a proposed action within the historic
district will impact its integrity. By this it is meant, how
any new work will affect the original design intent of
the given historic area.

M.3.1.1 New work should not:

M.3.1.1.2 Conflict with the existing architectural

character. For example, it should not:

Page M-3
 x Be larger in mass or taller than the existing
historic structures.

x Be of a color or material that conflicts

visually with the predominant historic
material used in the area.

x Destroy the historic fabric of any existing

structures or landscape features, which are
essential character defining elements within
the district.

x Destroy the spatial relationship between or

among historic buildings designed as a
grouping; this includes the regular spacing
of buildings within a group, as well as views
from one to the other or into the grouping
as a whole.

M.3.1.2 New work should:

M.3.1.2.1 Seek to enhance and protect the historic

quality and existing resources. For example:

x Conduct a survey examining the level of

use existing facilities prior to determining
the need for new construction.

x Follow the Standards and Guidelines for

Historic Preservation as recommended by
the Secretary of the Interior.

M.3.1.2.2 Provide necessary modern conveniences

as unobtrusively as possible. For example, it should:

x Site new construction so that it does not

destroy existing building relationships or
configurations.

x Scale new buildings down so as to minimize

their visual impact.

x Place parking to the rear of historic

buildings.

Page M-4
 x Landscape parking areas and modern
mechanical equipment so as to screen
them from view.

M.3.1.2.3 Phase out (gradually eliminate) existing

intrusions. For example, it should:

x Demolish structures designated, as

intrusions on the National Register
Inventory when they are no longer needed.

x Restore buildings, which have been altered

by inappropriate color schemes,
replacement windows, porch enclosures, Fig. M.3 - Make Every Effort to Use
etc. Historical Structures as Originally
Intended.
M.3.2 Treatment of Historic Fabric. The most
effective way to preserve historic properties is to keep
them in use and to consistently maintain them. When
buildings and grounds are consistently used for their
intended purposes, and regular maintenance is
conducted, there is rarely a need for extensive
preservation work (Fig. M.3). Only when they are
misused, underused or left vacant for long periods of
time does large-scale rehabilitation become
necessary. It follows that if a regular maintenance
program is put into effect once a property has been
appropriately renovated, another major rehabilitation
will rarely be required.

M.3.3 Standards for Historic Preservation

Projects

M.3.3.1 Compatible use of historic sites and

structures. Every reasonable effort should be made
to use a historic structure or site for its originally
intended purpose or to provide a compatible use. The
use should be compatible in the sense that it involves
minimal alteration to the property and/or has no
adverse effect upon its historic integrity. Use of the
site and structure should be regulated to prevent Fig. M.4 - Retain Distinguished
alterations that are potentially damaging to historic Stylistic or Character Defining
fabric and/or cultural context. Features.

M.3.3.2 Retention of character defining features.

Distinguishing stylistic or character defining features
and examples of skilled craftsmanship should not be

Page M-5
destroyed, altered, or removed from a historic site or
structure. All such fabric should be treated with
sensitivity and preserved in its original context and
form (Fig. M.4).

M.3.3.3 Treatment of deteriorated historic fabric.

Deteriorated historic fabric should be repaired rather
than replaced whenever possible. When replacement
is unavoidable, new material, whether man-made or
natural, should match the existing fabric in
composition, design, color, texture, and other
visual/structural qualities.

M.3.3.4 Documentation of missing historic

elements. Replacement of missing historic elements
should be based on the accurate duplication of
features known to have existed and substantiated by
historic pictorial and/or physical evidence and not on
conjecture, nor simply on the example of similar
treatment found on other structures or sites of the
same period or region.

M.3.3.5 Retention of historic alterations.

Changes to a historic structure or site, which have
occurred over the course of time, may provide
evidence of important social or cultural processes. As
such they should be respected and their potential
significance carefully evaluated.

M.3.3.6 Unacceptable alterations. Historic sites

and structures should be recognized as products of
their own time and as part of an important cultural
process. Alterations which have no historical basis or
which destroy the authenticity of the place are
discouraged.

M.3.3.7 Acceptable alterations and additions.

When possible, alterations and new additions to
historic structures or sites should be done in such a
manner as to leave the essential form and integrity
unimpaired.

M.3.3.8 Contemporary design in a historic

context. Contemporary design for additions to
existing historic sites or districts should not be
discouraged if such design is compatible with the

Page M-6
massing, proportions, scale, materials, color, views,
and general contextual relationships of the place.

M.3.3.9 Surface cleaning methods. Surface

cleaning of structures or buildings should be
undertaken with the gentlest possible means, and
only when cleaning is essential to the preservation of
the buildings. Cleaning methods, such as sand
blasting, which could damage historic material or
speed their deterioration, are discouraged.

M.3.3.10 Archaeological resources. All treatment

work, which potentially affects surface or sub-surface
pre-historic or historic archaeological resources,
should be coordinated with a qualified archaeologist
that meets the Secretary’s Standards.

M.3.3.11 Historic preservation and maintenance.

The guidelines contained within this IDG are general
in nature. The IDG must be utilized in conjunction with
the Installation ICRMP.

M.3.4 Guidelines for Historic Preservation

Projects.

M.3.4.1 Roof Guidelines

x Preserve existing historic roofing. Repair

and patch with matching materials.

x All roofs should receive an annual

inspection. Repair and patch all materials
as needed and clean out all gutters and
drains.

x When full replacement of the roof becomes

necessary, replace or restore with historic
materials (Fig. M.5).

x Roof details. Retain and/or maintain all

existing chimneys, ventilators, vents,
louvers and decorative elements such as
brackets, dentils, and cornices. When
possible, restore missing decorative
elements. Fig. M.5 - Replace or Restore Roofs
with Historical Materials.
M.3.4.2 Wall Guidelines

Page M-7
 x Limestone and brick masonry.

o Clean only when necessary using

the gentlest possible means.

o Repair or replace deteriorated or

missing units as needed.

x Stucco.

o Repair damaged or deteriorated

stucco.

o Repaint only when necessary with

appropriate color based on analysis
of historic paint.

x Wood.

o Retain or repair wood siding; where

replacement is necessary, match
existing clapboards in width and
species.
Fig. M.6 - Retain Existing Historical
o Repaint only as need to maintain Porches.
moisture protection.

o Use color scheme based on analysis

of existing paint layers.

M.3.4.3 Porch Guidelines

x Retain or maintain existing original porches

(Fig. M.6).

x Remove historically inappropriate porches.

x Where possible, restore original porches

that have been removed or enclosed.

M.3.4.4 Window Guidelines

x In most historic districts or buildings,

windows constitute a highly visible design
element as they make up a large
percentage of façades.

Page M-8
 x If building an addition or altering the
building, maintain height configuration of
windows.

x Retain window size and fenestration pattern

when replacing windows or altering the
building.

x If replacing windows, preserve frame

material or use historically accurate
reproductions. Avoid replacing original
frames with aluminum frames.

x Restore historic windows where non-historic

replacement windows have been used.

x The window manufacturing industry can

replicate and/or reproduce most all types
and sizes of windows to match existing
historic windows. In many cases, matching
replacement windows are available as stock
items.

M.3.4.5 Door Guidelines

x Although not usually as visually

overpowering as windows, main entrance
doorways are also important façade details.
As a design element, decorative doors have
stylistic features that belong to the
particular era for which they were designed.

x Retain or maintain existing historic doors.

x If replacing doors, preserve frame material

or use historically accurate reproductions.

x If building an addition or altering the

building, maintain the size of the door
opening.

x Restore all main entranceways by

reinstalling appropriate frames.

Page M-9
M.3.4.6 Color Guidelines

x If historic buildings must be repainted

before an accurate color scheme is
developed, a very conservative approach
should be followed. Repaint to match the
existing colors or colors that can be
documented to have been used on that
building.

x Utilize a qualified historic paint color

specialist for an inventory and analysis of
the paint layer sequences for all building
groupings.

x Establish a rotating schedule for the

painting and cleaning of each building.

M.3.4.7 Painting Guidelines

x Do not undertake a paint job until any

problems with leaking water have been
solved. All gutters and downspouts should
be repaired and be in good operating
condition.

x Only repaint when existing coat is no longer

performing, as excessive coats of paint
create a thick film, which obscures detail.

M.3.4.8 Handicap and Safety Access Guidelines

x As a general rule, buildings listed in or

determined eligible for listing in the National
Register may receive special consideration
for meeting safety and accessibility
requirements. Any modifications required to
bring a historic structure in compliance with
safety and accessibility codes should be
carefully planned and undertaken so that
they do not adversely affect the design of
main entrances or principal facades.

x Where possible, avoid alterations to the

main façade and principal doorways.

Page M-10
 x Place or install new ramps, lifts, and any
added fire escapes on secondary building
facades such as, to the side or rear of the
building.

x Locate new doorways at the rear or side of

the building.

x Required protective railings on ramps,

stairs, steps, and lifts should match existing
porch railings.

M.3.4.9 Mechanical Equipment Guidelines

x In many cases within historic districts,

mechanical equipment is located outside of
the building. When historic structures are
renovated and mechanical systems are
upgraded, equipment placement should be
planned in order to make the least visual
impact.

x Where possible, locate mechanical

equipment within the building.

x Screen necessary surface equipment with

vegetation.

x When large groups of buildings are

upgraded as one project, consider the use
of a remote system.

M.3.4.10 Guidelines for Additions

x In general, additions should follow all of the

guidelines for new construction within
historic districts; but, because their
proximity makes the potential for damage to
historic fabric even greater, there are
additional principles that should be
followed.

x Avoid changes that impact primary facades.

x Note that some highly visible freestanding

buildings may not have a secondary

Page M-11
 facade, and thus additions are not
advisable.

x Scale down additions so that it makes the

least visual impact.

x Design should establish a clear and obvious

difference between the existing historic
structure and the new addition.

M3.4.11 Force Protection. These guidelines should

be used in conjunction with the UFC 4-010-01, DoD
Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings and
the Force Protection Design Standards of this Army
Installation Design Guide and Standards.

M.4 ARMY STANDARDS

x Army Regulation (AR) 200-4, Cultural

Resources Management

x Department of the Army Pamphlet (DA

PAM) 200-4, Cultural Resources
Management

x The Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for

the Treatment of Historic Properties

M.5 REFERENCES

x Advisory Council on Historic Preservation

United States Army Environmental Center

Links
Go to Appendix N
Go to Table of
Contents

Page M-12
 APPENDIX N

HOUSEKEEPING RULES (EXAMPLE)

INTRODUCTION

N.1 The following set of housekeeping rules consists of a list of general and public
rules that are applicable to the administrative office work areas throughout the
installation. Organizations should make every effort to assure that all personnel are
familiar with the facilities housekeeping rules. An organized, well kept working area
that is neat and clean contributes to the visual harmony of the work area and fosters
work efficiencies. The following consists of a generic rules list and can be modified to
better represent Fort Lee’s needs. These rules may be used as a template for the
various organizations and offices to complete and post in an accessible area for all
personnel to read.

N.2 Housekeeping Rules. Modify as appropriate.

Housekeeping Rules for Fort Lee

GENERAL RULES:
1. Alterations: Employees shall not mark, paint, drill, damage, string wires within, or
in any way deface any part of the building. Employees will not install or permit the
installation of any awnings, shades, Mylar films or num filters on windows. Employees
will not obstruct, alter, or in any way impair the efficient operation of the heating,
ventilating, air conditioning, electrical, fire safety, or lighting systems, nor shall the
employee tamper with or change the setting of any thermostat or temperature control
valve in the building. Employees shall not cover or block air ducts or vents.

2. Cleanliness: Employees shall exercise their best efforts to keep workstations and
common areas, i.e., hallways, corridors, team rooms, etc., clean and free form
rubbish. No employee shall cause any unnecessary labor on the part of cleaning
personnel due to carelessness or indifference in the preservation of good order and
cleanliness. It is highly recommended that employees use covered cups when
transporting liquids to and from the coffee bars. Employees shall not bring any
substance into the building that might add an undue burden to the cleaning or
maintenance of the premises, or the building.

3. Carpet: Carpet stains and/or damage should be reported to DOL/DPW.

4. Energy Conservation: Turn off systems furniture lighting, conference room lights,

PageN-1
private office lights and equipment, etc. when not in use, especially at the end of the
day. During non-business hours, employees shall limit the use of lighting and
equipment to areas occupied.

5. Lighting: Do not move and /or modify any overhead lighting fixtures above
workstations. One task light may be placed in a workstation.

6. Vertical and Venetian Blinds: Blinds are to be left in fully extended position at all
times. Blades shall be positioned so as to permit a good level of natural lighting and
shall only be closed for the purposes of sun control and at night for privacy. Only the
wands will be used for adjustments. Items shall not be placed or stored on windowsills
other than small plants as described hereinafter.

7. Signage: No signs, advertisements or notes shall be painted or affixed on or to

any window, door, restroom conference/team room or other part of the building unless
approved by DPWL. Bulletin boards for posting of unofficial material are restricted to
communal areas such as break rooms and coffee bars.

8. Bicycles: Employees shall not bring bicycles or motorcycles into the office
environment, but shall be left secured in an upright position in areas designated for
that purpose.

9. Aerosol Sprays: The use of aerosol products such as air fresheners, hair sprays,
etc., in the work environment should be avoided.

10. Maintenance: All requests for maintenance on furnishings, or building systems

or components should be reported to DOL/DPW.

11. Smoking: The use of tobacco products inside any Army facility is strictly
prohibited. Smoking of tobacco products may only occur in designated areas where
proper ash receptacles, which are kept free of trash and debris, are located.

PUBLIC SPACES:

1. Eating in Work Areas: Eating in work areas can contribute to pest infestation and
an unsightly appearance. If eating at your desk, please ensure trash is discarded
daily. Perishable food items should not be stored in the employees’ work area.
Perishable foods are to be kept refrigerated.

2. Appliances (e.g., Heaters/Refrigerators/Microwaves/Coffee Pots): Refrigerators

and microwaves are not permitted in work areas. One personal fan, not to exceed 8”
in diameter may be placed in a workstation. Exceptions to accommodate health
problems may be submitted to DOL/DPW.

3. Centralization: Copiers, faxes, scanners, printers, etc., will be centralized and

networked to the maximum extent possible. Personal office equipment will be provided
on an exception basis only.

PageN-2
4. Office Accessories: All office equipment and other devices of any electrical or
mechanical nature shall be placed on an area of the work surface that best
accommodates the prevention/elimination of any vibration, noise or annoyance to
others. Employees shall not construct, maintain, use or operate any equipment of
machinery that produces music, sound, noise, pictures, or lighting which is audible or
visible beyond their workstation.

5. Office Wall Mountings: Only framed items shall be hung on walls. No artwork or
other displays may be placed or hung on fixed or temporary walls/partitions, other
than in private offices, without approval by DOL/DPW. The use of tape, pushpins, or
other devices to affix items to walls is prohibited.

6. Plants: Plants must be contained in appropriate leak-proof non-corroding

containers such as ceramic jardinières or flower pots with saucers and shall be kept
within workstations and not affixed in any way to the workstation, partitions, floors, or
ceiling as outlined in the guidance detailed elsewhere in this document; this prohibition
extends to trailing vines. Small plants that do not interfere with the normal operation of
window blinds may be placed on windowsills. Watering of plants shall not subject any
government equipment to risk of damage.

7. Speakerphones: The use of speakerphones is discouraged and should be

restricted to those occasions when absolutely necessary. Concerted efforts must be
made to utilize team rooms when speakerphone conversations are required.

8. Trash: The janitorial contractor will discard only items in wastebaskets or items
clearly labeled “TRASH”. Do not place trash in the corridors, hallways, stairwells, or
other common areas.

9. Workstation Reconfiguration: Workstations will not be reconfigured, modified, or

altered in any way by the occupant.

10. Workstation Guidelines: Every employee shall make a concerted effort to keep
workstations clean, uncluttered, and professional in appearance. Avoid placing papers
and other “hard copy” materials on the wall of the workstation and the accumulation of
excessive pictures/cartoons/mementos. The storage of papers, boxes, and files on
floors is prohibited. Materials are not to be hung on the outside panels of workstations.

a. Above the Panels: Nothing will be placed above the panel height of the
workstations or hung from the ceiling. Nothing will be stacked on the tops of
flipper doors, map files, filing cabinets, towers, etc.

b. Cabling: No temporary cabling for electrical, information technology or

communications is allowed. Requests for alterations must be submitted to
DOIM. This prohibition includes extension cords; surge protectors are
permitted. Wiring is to be contained in cable trays and off the floors.

PageN-3
11. Care of Furniture and Furniture Systems

a. Laminate Surfaces – To clean laminate tops, use a soft cloth or non

abrasive sponge dampened in a solution of mild detergent and warm water.
Remove residue of cleaning solution with a soft cloth wrung out in clean
water. Dry with a soft cloth.

b. Steel and Painted Metal Surfaces – Panel trim, panel poles, painted
flipper doors, and other parts of flipper doors should be cleaned with a soft
damp cloth and thoroughly dried with a soft dry cloth. For soiled areas a
mild detergent solution in warm water may be used.

c. Fabric – For information on how to remove spots from fabric panels on

workstations, contact DOL/DPW.

12. Additional Space

a. Additional Space

Links
Go to Appendix O
Go to Table of
Contents

PageN-4
APPENDIX 0

PLANT PALETTE

O.1HOW TO USE THE PLANT MATRIX

Table O-1, Plant Material Suitability Matrix, should be used in conjunction with a
thorough investigation of the micro-climate of the specific planting project. Emphasis
should be placed on selection of native or acceptable hybrid plant species and
avoidance of invasive exotic species. The matrix should then be used as a guideline to
developing a plant list for the specific project subject to review by the Environmental
Division, Natural Resources Branch staff. The staff or design professionals should use
this list as an initial guide and apply other design criteria as required to prepare the
planting plan. The listed plants are recommended species and their listing does not
preclude selection of other species based on availability, cost or other factors.

The plant material suitability matrix is organized by plant category: shade trees,
ornamental trees, evergreen trees, shrubs, groundcovers and grasses/sedges. The
applicable criteria checklist to the right of the species provides the following information:

ƒ Type (deciduous and evergreen);

ƒ Growth (slow, medium, or fast);
ƒ Flower (Fall, Summer, and Spring);
ƒ Interest (flower, bark, and foliage);
ƒ Light (shade-tolerant, sun/shade-tolerant, and sun-tolerant);
ƒ Soil pH (alkaline-tolerant , acid/alkaline-tolerant, and acid-tolerant);
ƒ Resistance (drought-resistant and pest-resistant);
ƒ Soil Moisture (moist, well-drained, and dry); and
ƒ Application/Use (street tree, shade tree, screen, massing, lawn/edging, hedge,
hill/slope, and specimen planting).

Links
Go to Appendix P
Go to Table of
Contents

Page O-1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page O-2
Table O-1 Type Growth Flower Interest Light Soil pH Resistant Soil Moisture Function
Plant Material Suitability Matrix

Deciduous
Evergreen
Slow
Medium
Fast
Fall
Summer
Spring
Flower
Bark
Foliage
Shade
Sun/shade
Sun
Alkaline
Acid./Alka.
Acidic
Drought
Pest
Moist
Well-drained
Dry
Street tree
Shade tree
Screen
Massing
Lawn/Edging
Hedge
Hill/Slope
Specimen

Botanical Name Common Name Characteristics Culture Use

Shade Trees
Acer rubrum Red maple
Quercus palustris Pin Oak z z z z z z z z
Quercus phellos Willow Oak z z z z z z z z z z z
Quercus rubra Northern Red Oak z z z z z z z z z
Tilia americana American Basswood

Ornamental Trees
Amelanchier Arborea Downy Serviceberry z z z z z z z z z z z z
Amelanchier canadensis Canada Serviceberry
Betula lenta Sweet Birch
Cornus alternifolia Alternate-leaf Dogwood
Cornus florida Flowering Dogwood z z z z
Cercis canadensis Eastern Redbud z z z z z z z z z z z
Crataegus sp. Hawthorn z z z z z z z z z z z z
Liriodendron tulipifera Yellow Poplar
Malus species Crabapple species z z z z z z z z z
Morus rubra Red Mulberry
Ostrya virginiana Eastern hophornbeam

Evergreen Trees
Ilex opaca American Holly z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Magnolia virginiana Sweetbay Magnolia
Pinus strobus White Pine z z z z z z z z z z z z
Pinus virginiana Virginia Pine z z z z z z z
Juniperus virginiana Eastern Red Cedar z

Shrubs
Ceanothus americanus New Jersey tea
Cornus amomum Silky dogwood

Gaylussacia baccata Black huckleberry

Page O-3
Table O-1 Type Growth Flower Interest Light Soil pH Resistant Soil Moisture Function
Plant Material Suitability Matrix

Deciduous
Evergreen
Slow
Medium
Fast
Fall
Summer
Spring
Flower
Bark
Foliage
Shade
Sun/shade
Sun
Alkaline
Acid./Alka.
Acidic
Drought
Pest
Moist
Well-drained
Dry
Street tree
Shade tree
Screen
Massing
Lawn/Edging
Hedge
Hill/Slope
Specimen

Botanical Name Common Name Characteristics Culture Use

Hydrangea arborescens Wild hydrangea
Ilex glabra Inkberry
Itea virginica Virginia sweetspire
Kalmia latifolia Mountain laurel
Lindera benzoin Spicebush
Lyonia mariana Stagger-bush
Myrica cerifera Southern Bayberry z z z z z z z z z z
Rhododendron atlanticum Dwarf azalea
Viburnum species Viburnum species z z z z z z z z z
Spirea tomentosa Steeplebush spirea z z z z z z z z z

Groundcovers
Andropogan glomeratus Bushy bluestem
Andropogan virginicus Broomsedge
Asclepias tuberosa Butterflyweed, milkweed
Lobelia cardinalis Cardnal flower
Lobelia siphilitica Great blue lobelia
Monarda didyma Beebalm, Oswego tea
Rudbeckia hirta Black-eyed Susan
Grasses/Sedges
Andropogan gerardii Big bluestem z z z z z z z
Bermuda grass
Festuca rubra Chewings Fescue z z z z z z
Lolium perenne Perennial Ryegrass z z z z z z
Schizachyrium scoparium Little bluestem
Sorghastrum nutans Indiangrass

Page O-4
 APPENDIX P

DA FACILITIES STANDARDIZATION
PROGRAM CENTERS OF
STANDARDIZATION

P.1 The following U.S. Army Corps of Engineer Centers of Standardization locations
are responsible for the standardization of the respective facility types. Addresses and
telephone numbers are provided.

Page P-1
Page P-2
 DA Facilities Standardization Program
Centers of Standardization
Assigned Center Facility Type
U.S. Army Engineering and Support Child Development Center-Infant/Toddlers
Center, Huntsville Child Development Center Playground
Attn: CEHNC-ED-CS-A and IS Child Development Center – 6 to 10 Year
P.O. Box 1600 Olds
Huntsville AL 35807 Physical Fitness Facilities
Telephone: 256-895-1673/1672/1535 Fire Station
Hazardous Material Storage Facility
Outdoor Sports Facility
Close Combat Tactical Trainer
Military Operations Urban Terrain (MOUT)
Facility
Training Range
Youth Activity Center
Consolidated Fire, Safety & Security Fac.
Army Community Service Center
Bowling Center (RFP)
Battle Command Training Center
Training Support Center
U.S. Army Engineer District, Louisville Army Reserve Center/National Guard
ATTN: CELRL-ED-D-A Armory
600 Martin Luther King Jr. Place Operational Readiness Training Complex
Louisville, KY 40202
Telephone: 502-315-6250
U.S. Army Engineer District, Norfolk Classroom21
ATTN: CENAO-TS-EA Criminal Investigation Facility (CIDC)
803 Front Street Enlisted Personnel Dining Facility
Norfolk, VA 23510 Family Housing (RFP)
Telephone: 757-441-7702
General Instruction Building
Information Systems Facility
Troop Issue Subsistence Activity Facility
(TISA)
Military Entrance Processing Station
(MEPS)
U.S. Army Engineer District, Omaha Religious Facilities- Army Chapel

Page P-3
 DA Facilities Standardization Program
Centers of Standardization
Assigned Center Facility Type
ATTN: CENWO-ED-DG/PM-M Access Control Points
215 North 17th Street
Omaha, NE 68102
Telephone: 402-221-4552/4434
U.S. Army Engineer District, Mobile Aviation Facilities- Vertical
ATTN: CESAM 4 Star Headquarters Facility
109 Saint Joseph Street
Mobile, Alabama 36602
Telephone: 251-690-2614

U.S. Army Engineer District, Savannah Company Operations Facility

ATTN: CESAS-EN-E Brigade/Battalion HQ
P.O. Box 889 Tactical Equipment Maintenance Facility
Savannah, GA 31402 (TEMF)
Telephone: 912-652-5212 Command and Control Facility
Brigade Combat Team Operations Complex
U.S. Army Engineer District, Honolulu Unaccompanied Officers Quarters
ATTN: CEPOH-PA Transient Officers Quarters
Building 230
Fort Shafter, Ha 96858-5440
Telephone: 808-438-9050
U.S. Army Engineer District, Fort One Station Unit Training (OSUT) Barracks
Worth Advanced Individual Training (AIT) Barracks
ATTN: CESWF Basic Combat Trainee (BCT)
819 Taylor Street General Purpose Warehouse
Fort Worth, Texas 76102
Central Issue Warehouse
Telephone: 817-886-1326
Unaccompanied Enlisted Personnel
Housing (UEPH), New & Modernization

Links
Go to Appendix Q
Go to Table of Contents

Page P-4
 APPENDIX Q

STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

Q.1 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

Standards and References for the Army Installation Design Standards (IDS).

Q.1.1 Chapter 2, Site Planning Design Standards

Q.1.1.1 Army Standards

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)

x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

x Army Regulation (AR) 200-2, Environmental Effects of Army Actions

x Army Regulation (AR) 210-20, Master Planning for Army Installations

x Army Regulation (AR) 415-15, Army Military Construction Program

Development and Execution

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-70, Buildings and Structures

Q.1.1.2 References

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01, Installation Design, Chap 7

x Technical Instructions (TI) 800-01, Design Criteria

x Technical Instructions (TI) 801-02, Family Housing

x Technical Instructions (TI) 804-01, Area Planning, Site Planning, and Design

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-803-14, Site Planning and Design

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-820-1/ Air Force AFM 88-5, Chap. 1, Surface
Drainage Facilities for Airfields and Heliports

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-820-3/Air Force AFM 88-5, Chap. 3, Drainage and
Erosion-Control Structures for Airfields and Heliports

Page Q-1
 x Technical Manual (TM) 5-820-4/Air Force AFM 88-5, Chap. 4, Drainage for
Areas Other Than Airfields

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-822-2, General Provisions and Geometric Design

for Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage Areas

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-822-5, Pavement Design for Roads, Streets, Walks,
and Open Storage Areas

x Master Planning Instructions (MPI)

x Whole Building Design

Q.1.2 Chapter 3, Building Design Standards

Q.1.2.1 Army Standards

x Army Regulation (AR) 200-4, Cultural Resources Management

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-70, Buildings and Structures

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 3-520-01, Interior Electrical Systems

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism

Standards for Buildings

x UFC 4-171-05, Design: Guide for Army Reserve Facilities

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)

x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

x Secretary of the Interior's Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-807-10, Signage

x Technical Instructions (TI) 809-04, Seismic Design for Buildings

x Technical Instructions (TI) 809-05, Seismic Design Evaluation and Rehabilitation for
Buildings

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-809-10/Navy NAVFAC P-355/Air Force AFM 88-3,

Chap 13, Seismic Design for Buildings

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-809-10-2/Navy NAVFAC P-355.2/Air Force AFM 88-

3, Chap 13, Sec B, Seismic Design Guidelines for Upgrading Existing
Buildings

Page Q-2
 x U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Engineering Technical Letter (ETL) 1110-3-
502, Telephone and Network Distribution System Design and Implementation
Guide

x Standards of Seismic Safety for Existing Federally Owned and Leased

Buildings

x Army Barracks Master Plan, Appendix I, Army Barracks Standards

x Memorandum Subject: Revised Barracks Construction Criteria, dated 1 May

2003

x Quality Standards for New and Replacement Residential Communities

Initiative (RCI) Family Housing

x Army Lodging Standards

x Design Manual for Remoted Target Systems (RETS) Ranges, CEHCN 1110-
1-23 Manual

x Unexploded Ordinance Considerations in the Planning, Design, and

Construction of Ranges, Supplement to CEHNC 1110-1-23 Manual

x Revised Range Design/Construction Interface Standards

x Army Chapel Standard Definitive Design

x Army Standard for Chapel Construction – January 2004 and Memorandum for
Record, subject: The Army Standards for Chapels, dated 21 January 2004.

x Army Standards for Company Operation Facility (COF)

Q.1.2.2 References

x Army Regulation (AR) 190-13, The Army Physical Security Program

x Army Regulation (AR) 200-1, Environmental Protection and Enhancement

x Army Regulation (AR) 200-2, Environmental Effects of Army Actions

x Army Regulation (AR) 200-4, Cultural Resources Management

x Army Regulation (AR) 210-20, Master Planning for Army Installations

x Army Regulation (AR) 210-21, Army Ranges and Training Land Program

x Army Regulation (AR) 405-45, Real Property Inventory Management

Page Q-3
x Army Regulation (AR) 405-70, Utilization of Real Property

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01, Installation Design, Chap 8

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-510-01, Design: Medical Military Facilities

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 1-200-01, Design: General Building

Requirements, 31 July 2002

x Engineering Regulation (ER) 1110-345-122, Engineering and Design, Interior

Design

x Department of the Army Pamphlet (DA PAM) 200-4, Cultural Resources

Management

x U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Design Guide (DG) 1110-3-122, Design Guide
for Interiors

x Department of Defense (DoD) Interior Design Website

x Technical Instructions (TI) 800-01, Design Criteria

x Technical Instructions (TI) 811-16, Lighting Design

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-683, Electrical Interior Facilities

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-688, Foreign Voltage and Frequencies Guide

x TM 5-852-9, Arctic and Sub-arctic Construction – Buildings

x Army Barracks Master Plan

x Air Force Sustainable Facilities Guide

x Air Force Interior Design Guides

x Office of the Assistant Secretary of the Army for Financial Management and
Comptroller (OASA [FM&C]) Sales and Outlease of Army Assets - Installation
Guide

x Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation Management, Sustainable Design and

Development Website

x U.S Army Corps of Engineers, Engineering Research and Development

Center, Construction Engineering Research Laboratory (CERL), Sustainable
Design and Development Website

Page Q-4
 x U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Engineering Technical Letter (ETL) 1110-3-
502, Telephone and Network Distribution System Design and Implementation
Guide

x Whole Building Design Guide

x Unified Facilities Guide Specifications (UFGS), "Division 12 - Furnishings",

Construction Criteria Base

x Engineering and Construction Bulletins

x Assistant Secretary of the Army memorandum Subject: Sustainable Design

and Development Requirements, dated 18 March 2003

Q.1.3 Chapter 4, Circulation Design Standards

Q.1.3.1 Army Standards

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-72, Transportation Infrastructure and Dams

x Technical Instructions (TI) 804-11, Design for Non-Organizational or Privately

Owned Vehicle (POV) Site Circulation and Parking

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-811-1/Air Force AFJMAN 32-1080, Electric Power

Supply and Distribution

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-822-2, General Provisions and Geometric Design

for Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage Areas

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-850-2/Air Force AFJMAN 32-1046, Railroad Design

and Rehabilitation

x Manual For Railway Engineering

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism

Standards for Buildings

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)

x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

x Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)

x Chicago's Bike Lane Design Manual (Provides a comprehensive series of

technical drawings and design specifications for bike lanes).

Q.1.3.2 References

Page Q-5
 x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01, Installation Design, Chap 9

x U.S. Air Force, Landscape Design Guide, Parking Area

x U.S. Air Force, Landscape Design Guide, Walkways and Bikeways (Provides
a comprehensive walkways and bikeways planning guide including sections
on paving materials and gradients and curvature data).

x Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

x Federal Highway Administration reference document “Accessible Sidewalks

and Street Crossings – an informational guide”.

Q.1.4 Chapter 5, Landscape Design Standards

Q.1.4.1 Army Standards

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-70, Buildings and Structures

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-630, Natural Resources Land Management

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-803-13, Landscape Design and Planting

x American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1

x Overseas (Host Nation Standards)

Q.1.4.2 References

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01, Installation Design, Chap 10

x USAF Landscape Design Guide

x C. Brickell and D. Joyce. Pruning and Training, 1996

Q.1.5 Chapter 6, Site Elements Design Standards

Q.1.5.1 Army Standards

x DoD 4525.8-M, DoD Official Mail Manual

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-49, Utility Services

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-70, Buildings and Structures

x Army Regulation (AR) 420-72, Transportation Infrastructure and Dams

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)

Page Q-6
 x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-807-10, Signage

x Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)

x MTMC Pamphlet 55-14, Traffic Engineering for Better Signs and Markings

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism

Standards for Buildings

Q.1.5.2 References

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01, Installation Design, Chap 11

x Army Regulation (AR) 1-33, Memorial Programs

x Army Regulation (AR) 840-1, Department of the Army Seal, and Department
of the Army Emblem and Branch of Service Plaques

x Technical Instructions (TI) 811-16, Lighting Design

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-663, Child Development Center, Play Area

Inspection and Maintenance Program

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-803-5, Installation Design Manual

x Technical Manual (TM) 5-803-11/Air Force AFJMAN 32-10139, Children's

Outdoor Play Areas

Q.1.6 Chapter 7, Force Protection Design Standards

Q.1.6.1 Army Standards

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism

Standards for Buildings

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-10, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism

Standoff Distances for Buildings. (This document is a "For Official Use Only
[FOUO]" publication. Users may contact the Point of Contact posted at the
noted website for inquires regarding this document).

x Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

x Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guideline (ADAAG)

x DoD Instruction 2000.16, DoD Antiterrorism Standards

Page Q-7
Q.1.6.2 References

x Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 2-600-01, Installation Design, Chap 12

x DoD Handbook 2000.12-H, Protection of DoD Personnel and Activities

Against Acts of Terrorism and Political Turbulence, February 1993 (This
Handbook is a "For Official Use Only [FOUO]" publication. Users may contact
the Point of Contact posted at the following website to obtain a copy of the
Handbook). http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/corres/html/o200012h.htm

x Army Regulation (AR) 525-13, The Army Force Protection Program (Available
only through the Army Knowledge Online web portal).

x UFC 4-010-02, DoD Security Engineering Manual, (This document is in draft

form. See the Security Engineering Working Group website).

x U.S. Air Force, Installation Force Protection Guide: (Contains information on

installation planning, engineering design, and construction techniques that will
preclude or minimize the effect of a terrorist attack).

x Technical Manuals/Air Force Manual series TM 5-853/AFMAN) 32-1071,

Security Engineering, 3 volume series: (Volumes 2 and 3 are "For Official Use
Only [FOUO]" and are not available on the Army Corps of Engineers
publications website. A copy of the manuals can be acquired via a standard
publications account. The three volumes cover, Project Development,
Concept Design, and Final Design respectively).

Q.1.7 Appendix D, Sustainable Design

Q.1.7.1 Army Standard

x The SPiRiT rating of "Silver" is the standard for all FY06 MILCON vertical
construction projects currently under design (as of March 18 2003). For all
other FY06 and future-year MILCON projects the minimum SPiRiT rating
requirement is "Gold". Construction projects starting FY08 will require a LEED
Silver minimum requirement.

x See Assistant Secretary of the Army memorandum Subject: Sustainable

Design and Development Requirements, dated 18 March 2003.

Q.1.7.2 References

x Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation Management memorandum Subject:

Sustainable Project Rating Tool, dated 21 December 2002

x Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation Management, Sustainable Design and

Development Website

Page Q-8
 x U.S Army Corps of Engineers, Engineering Research and Development
Center, Construction Engineering Research Laboratory (CERL), Sustainable
Design and Development Website

x Air Force Sustainable Facilities Guide

x Whole Building Design Guide

Q.1.8 Appendix M, Historic Preservation Guidelines

Q.1.8.1 Army Standards

x Army Regulation (AR) 200-4, Cultural Resources Management

x Department of the Army Pamphlet (DA PAM) 200-4, Cultural Resources

Management

x The Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic

Properties

Q.1.8.2 References

x Advisory Council on Historic Preservation

x United States Army Environmental Center

Page Q-9
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Links
Go to Index
Go to Table of
Contents

Page Q-10
(PART 2)

MODEL IDG INDEX

A
Barracks Standards · 8.15.4.2
Access Control Points · 12.7 Battalion Headquarters (BNHQ) · 8.15.4.1
Accessibility · 7.3.2 Benches · 11.3.3.1
Accessories · 8.13.11.4 Berms · 12.6
Activity Nodes · 3.5 Bicycle Paths · 7.6.2.12
ADA Accessibility Guidelines · 7.3.2, 8.6.1 Bikeways · 9.13
Additions or Extension of Existing Facilities · Brigade Headquarters (BDEHQ) · 8.15.4.1
8.7.4 Buffer · 5.4.2
Air Pollution · 9.5.4.1 Building Objectives · 8.2
Air Quality · 4.1.4.4 Building Siting and Design Standards · 12.2
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Buildings · 5.4.3.2, 5.4.4.2
Guidelines (ADAAG) · 7.3.2, 8.6.1 Buildings and Structures · 3.5
Analysis Criteria · 3 Buildings Design Component · 7.13
Anti-Terrorism/Force Protection Considerations · Buildings Design Standards · 8
10.11 Introduction · 8.1
Anti-Terrorism Setback · 9.9.3 Building Accessibility · 8.6
Anti-Terrorism Standards for Buildings, DoD · ADA Accessibility Guidelines · 8.6.1
11.7 Military Exclusion · 8.6.1.1
Area Planning · Q.1.1.2 Closed Messes · 8.6.1.2
Army Knowledge Online · 12.10.1 Unaccompanied Personnel Housing ·
Art · 8.13.11.5 8.6.1.2
Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation Vehicle and Aircraft Maintenance
Management (ACSIM) · ES.4.1, 1.8.1.1 Facilities · 8.6.1.2
Assets · 2.2.1.2.2.1, 5.4.3 Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
Buildings · 5.4.3.2 (UFAS) · 8.6.1
Circulation · 5.4.3.3 Historic Architecture · 8.9
Force Protection · 5.4.3.6 Historic Buildings or Structures · 8.9.1.1
Plant Material · 5.4.3.4 Historic District · 8.9.1.2
Site Elements · 5.4.3.5 National Historic Landmarks · 8.9.1.3
Site Planning · 5.4.3.1 National Historic Preservation Act
Axis · 3.4 (NHPA) · 8.9.1
Secretary Of The Interior’s Standards
for the Treatment of Historic
B Properties · 8.9.2
Interior Design · 8.13
Balance · 3.4 Acoustics · 8.13.7
Barracks Modernization Program · 8.15.4.1 Color · 8.13.6

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-1

 Electrical and Communications · 8.13.5 Signs · 9.13.10
Finishes · 8.13.9 Circulation Objectives · 9.2
Furnishings · 8.13.11 Roadway Hierarchy · 9.3
Installation Finishes Standards · 8.13.10 Cul-De-Sacs · 9.3.1.5
Installation Furnishings Standards · Highways · 9.3.1.1
8.13.13 Primary Roadways · 9.3.1.2
Interior Appearance Policy · 8.13.15 Secondary Roadways · 9.3.1.3
Interior Design · 8.13.2 Tactical Vehicle Trails · 9.3.1.6
Interior Lighting · 8.13.8 Tertiary Roadways · 9.3.1.4
Interior Operations Policies · 8.13.14 Walkways and Pedestrian Circulation · 9.12
Introduction · 8.13.1 Circulation Objectives · 9.2
Space Planning · 8.13.4 Circulation System · 3.5
Unified Facilities Guide Specifications · Climate · 4.1.3.4, 7.5.3
8.13.12 Regions · 7.5.3
Key Facility Types Standardization · 8.15 Cool · 7.5.3.1
Army Lodging · 8.15.5 Hot Arid · 7.5.3.3
Morale, Welfare, and Recreation (MWR) Hot Humid · 7.5.3.4
Branded Theme Operations · 8.15.6 Temperate · 7.5.3.2
Range Standards · 8.15.7 Climatic Conditions · 7.2.1
Residential Communities Initiative · Microclimate · 7.2.1.2
8.15.2 Solar Orientation · 7.2.1.2
Unaccompanied Personnel Housing · Wind · 7.2.1.2
8.15.4 Color · 3.4, 8.3.3.4
Seismic Policy · 8.7 Community and Family Support Center (CFSC) ·
Additions or Extension of Existing 8.15.6.1
Facilities 8.7.4 Community Development and Management Plan
Exceptions to Seismic Evaluations · (CDMP) · 8.15.2.2
8.7.3 Company Operations Facilities (COF) · 8.15.4.1
New Facilities · 8.7.4 Conflicting Guidelines · 7.3.2
Seismic Evaluation · 8.7.2 Consumer Product Safety Commission Press
Substantial Life-Safety · 8.7.1 Releases and Recalls · 11.3.14.4
Building Objectives · 8.2 Contaminated Areas · 4.1.4.1
Courtyards · 8.11
C Cul-de-Sacs · 9.3.1.5
Cultural Resources Management · 8.18.1
Checklist · 2.4.6
Interior Design Review · 2.4.6.1 D
Projects Requirements · 2.4.6.1
Child Development Center, Play Area Inspection DA Facilities Standardization Program Centers
and Maintenance Program · 11.3.14.3 of Standardization · P
Children’s Outdoor Play Areas · 11.3.14.2 Director Installation Management Agency (IMA) ·
Circulation · 5.4.2, 5.4.3.3, 5.4.4.3 ES.4.2, 1.8.1.2
Circulation Design Component · 7.1.3 Design Agent · 2.4.3.2.2
Circulation Design Standards · 9 Design Charrettes · 2.4.6.1
Bikeways · 9.13 Designer of Record · 2.4.3.2.2
Bicycle Storage · 9.13.6 Design Components · 2.2.2
Bikeway Design · 9.13.3 Design Guide Analysis Criteria · 3
Class I · 9.13.3.1 Design Principles · 3.4
Class II · 9.13.3.2 Axis · 3.4
Class III · 9.13.3.3 Balance · 3.4
Crosswalks · 9.13.8 Color · 3.4
Furnishings · 9.13.5 Form · 3.4
General Guidelines · 9.13.3.4 Framing · 3.4
Landscaping · 9.13.7 Function · 3.4
Lighting · 9.13.9 Scale · 3.4

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-2

 Sustainability · 3.4 F
Terminus · 3.4
Texture · 3.4 Facilities Standardization Program · 8.15.3
Unity · 3.4 Facilities Standardization Program Centers of
Goals, Objectives, and Recommendations · Standardization · P
3.2 Features Projects · 2.4.4
Identification and Classification of Visual Fencing · 11.3.7.3, 12.3
Elements · 3.3 Fenestration · 8.3.3.6
Introduction · 3.1 Focal Points · 5.4.2
Visual Elements · 3.5 Force Protection · 5.4.3.6, 5.4.4.6, 7.1.3
Activity Nodes · 3.5 Force Protection Design Standards · 12
Buildings and Structures · 3.5 Access Control Points · 12.7
Circulation System · 3.5 Army Standards · 12.9
Edges and Boundaries · 3.5 Berms · 12.6
Entrances and Gates · 3.5 Building Siting and Design Standards · 12.2
Landmarks · 3.5 Fencing · 12.3
Natural Characteristics · 3.5 Gates and Entrances · 12.7
Open Spaces · 3.5 Introduction · 12.1
Other Elements · 3.5 Landscape Considerations · 12.4
Signage · 3.5 Lighting · 12.5
Street Trees · 3.5 References · 12.10
Trees and Other Vegetation · 3.5 Form · 3.4, 8.3.3.3
Utility Corridors · 3.5 Framing · 3.4
Views and Vistas · 3.5 Function · 3.4
Design Guide Process · 2 Furnishings · 8.15.4.3
Conduct Visual and Spatial Surveys ·
2.2.1.2
Determine Assets and Liabilities · 2.2.1.2.2 G
Establish Visual Zones and Themes ·
2.2.1.2.1 Garrison Commander · ES.4.3, 1.8.1.3
Recommendations and Implementation Plan Gates and Entrances · 12.7
· 2.2.1.3 Geology · 4.1.3.2
Setting Goals and Objectives · 2.2.1.1 Goals and Objectives · 2.2.1.1
Design Principles · 3.4 Good Views · 5.4.2
Design Team IDG Checklist · A.1
Dining Facilities (DEFC) · 8.15.4.1 H
DoD Anti-Terrorism Standards for Buildings ·
11.7 Highways · 9.3.1.1
Dumpsters · 11.3.8.3 Historical and/or Architecturally Significant
Features 5.4.2
E Historical Architecture · 8.9
Historical Preservation Guidelines · 8.9.3, M.1
Edges and Boundaries · 3.5 History of the Installation · 4.1.2
Entrances and Gates · 3.5 Housekeeping Rules · N.1
Environmental · 7.3.3 Hydrology · 4.1.3.5, 7.2.1.1
Environmental Effects of Army Actions · 7.1.1
Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) · 7.3.3.1 I
Environmental Setting · 4.1.3
Environmentally Sensitive Habitat · 4.1.3.9 IDG Checklist · 2.4.3.2, A.1, B.1
Exceptions to Seismic Evaluations · 8.7.3 IDG Methodology · ES.3
Existing Land Use · 4.2 IDG Review and Approval · 2.4.1
Exterior Building Materials and Color · 8.14 Project Approval · 2.4.3
Exterior Color Charts · L Request for Waiver · 2.4.5
Exterior Materials Charts · K Self-Help Projects · 2.4.4
Site Furnishings · 2.4.4

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-3

Implementation · 2.4 L
Checklists · 2.4.6
Compliance · 2.4.2 Landmarks · 3.5
Features Projects · 2.4.4 Landscape Considerations · 12.4
Implementation Plan · 2.2.1.3 Landscape Design Component · 7.1.3
Improvement Projects · 6 Landscape Design Standards · 10
Indigenous Structures · 8.8 Anti-Terrorism/Force Protection · 10.11
Installation Design Guide (IDG) · 1 Army Standards · 10.12
Army Standards · 1.10 Introduction · 10.1
Audience · 1.4 Landscape Design Guidelines · 10.5
Goal · 1.2 Buffer Planting · 10.5.2.3
Implementation · 2.4 Entrances · 10.5.2.9
Maintaining · 1.7 Environmental Control Planting ·
Objectives · 1.3 10.5.2.7
Organization · 1.5 Foundation Planting · 10.5.2.1
Purpose · 1.1 Image Planting · 10.5.2.8
Responsibilities · 1.8 Open Space Planting · 10.5.2.4
Sustainable Design and Development · 1.9 Parking Lot Planting · 10.5.2.6
When to Use · 1.6 Screening · 10.5.2.2
Installation Design Process and Implementation Street Trees · 10.5.2.5
·2 Xeriscape · 10.5.2.11
Installation Finishes Standards · 8.13.10, I Zeroscaping · 10.5.2.10
Installation Profile · 4 Maintenance of Plant Material · 10.9
Existing Land Use · 4.2 Ground Cover · 10.9.4
Proposed Land Use · 4.3 Mulching · 10.9.2.3
Setting · 4.1 Pruning Shrubs · 10.9.2.1
Environmental Setting · 4.1.3 Pruning Trees · 10.9.2.2
Climate · 4.1.3.4 Schedule · 10.9.5
Environmentally Sensitive Habitat · Objectives · 10.2
4.1.3.9 Plant Categories · 10.7.3
Geology · 4.1.3.2 Plant Material Installation · 10.8
Hydrology · 4.1.3.5 Plant Palette · 10.7.2, O
Soils · 4.1.3.3 Broadleaf Evergreen Shrubs · 10.7.2.1
Topography · 4.1.3.1 Coniferous Shrubs · 10.7.2.1
Vegetation · 4.1.3.6 Coniferous Trees · 10.7.2.1
Wetlands · 4.1.3.7 Deciduous Shrubs · 10.7.2.1
Wildlife · 4.1.3.8 Deciduous Trees · 10.7.2.1
History of the Installation · 4.1.2 Groundcover and Vines · 10.7.2.1
Man-Made Environment · 4.1.4 Principles · 10.3
Air Quality · 4.1.4.4 Balance · 10.3.1.2
Contaminated Areas · 4.1.4.1 Color and Texture · 10.3.1.5
Noise · 4.1.4.3 Contrast · 10.3.1.3
Solid Waste Management · 4.1.4.2 Rhythm · 10.3.1.4
Regional Setting · 4.1.1 Simplicity · 10.3.1.6
Interior Design Manual · 8.15.4.3.2 Spatial Articulation · 10.3.1.8
Interior Design Review Checklist · C.1 Ultimate Effect · 10.3.1.7
Interior Finishes Standards · 8.13.10, I Unity · 10.3.1.1
Interior Furnishings Standards · J Protection and Preservation · 10.10
Interior Operations Policies · 8.13.14 References · 10.13
Intersections · 9.6 Sustainable Landscape Development · 10.4
Landscape Maintenance Schedule · F
K Landscaping At Walkways · 9.12.7
Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
Key Facility Types Standardization · 8.15 · 1.9.3.1
Kiosks · 11.3.6 Liabilities · 2.2.1.2.2.2, 5.4.4

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-4

 Buildings · 5.4.4.2 N
Circulation · 5.4.4.3
Force Protection · 5.4.4.6 National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) ·
Plant Material · 5.4.4.4 7.3.3
Site Elements · 5.4.4.5 National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA) ·
Site Planning · 5.4.4.1 8.9.1
Lighting · 11.5, 12.5 National Register of Historic Places · 8.9.1
Lamp Characteristics · 11.5.9 Natural Characteristics · 3.5
Fluorescent · 11.5.9.4 Natural Conditions · 7.5
High Pressure Sodium · 11.5.9.2 Climate · 7.5.3
Incandescent · 11.5.9.1 Hydrology · 7.5.2
Low Pressure Sodium · 11.5.9.3 Topography · 7.5.1
Mercury Vapor · 11.5.9.6 Vegetation · 7.5.5
Metal Halide · 11.5.9.5 Views and Vistas · 7.5.4
Light Design Matrix · 11.5.4 Natural Site Features · 7.2.1.1
Light Fixtures · 11.5.6 Hydrology · 7.2.1.1
Bollard · 11.5.6.2.3 Topography · 7.2.1.1
Cutoff · 11.5.6.2.1 Tree Cover · 7.2.1.1
Spotlighting · 11.5.6.2.4 Vegetation · 7.2.1.1
Utility · 11.5.6.2.2 Natural Terrain · 7.5.1
Wall-Mounted · 11.5.6.2.5 Navigable Waters · 7.3.3.2
Light Poles · 11.5.7 New Facilities · 8.7.4
Lighting Noise · 4.1.4.3
Outdoor Architectural · 11.5.1 Noise Pollution · 9.5.4.2
Parking Lot · 11.5.1
Pedestrian · 11.5.1
Roadway · 11.5.1 O
Security · 11.5.1
Lodging · 8.15 Open Space - Visual Analysis Map · 5.4.2
Lodging, Army · 8.15.5 Open Spaces - Visual Elements · 3.5, 8.13.4
Lodging Standards for Facilities · 8.15.5.2 Other Elements - Visual Elements · 3.5
Lodging Standards for Operations · 8.15.5.2
Lodging Standards for Service · 8.15.5.2 P

M Parking Area Design Guide · 9.9.2

Parking Requirements · 9.8
Major Army Command/Tenant · ES.4.5, 1.8.1.5 Pedestrian Circulation · 9.12
Mail Addressing · 11.4.5.1.4.1 Pedestrian Walkways · 7.6.2.12
Mailboxes · 11.3.15 Physical Security Requirements 8.16
Main Entrance · 5.4.2 Picnic Shelters · 11.3.5.1.2
Man-Made Environment · 4.1.4 Planning Charrettes · 2.4.6.1
Massing · 8.3.3.2 Plant Material · 5.4.3.4, 5.4.4.4
Master Planner · 2.4.2.2 Plant Matrix · 7.5.5
Master Planning For Army Installations · 7.1.2 Planters · 11.3.10
Master Planning Instructions · 7.1.2 Plants · 8.13.11.6
Materials · 8.3.3.6 Plant Selection List · O
Medical Military Construction Program · 8.13.2 Playgrounds · 11.3.14
Microclimate · 7.2.1.2 Plazas · 8.11
Military Housing Privatization Initiative (MHPI) · Primary “Fit” · 7.3.1
8.15.2.2 Primary Road · 5.4.2
Morale, Welfare, and Recreation (MWR) · Primary Roadways · 9.3.1.2
8.15.16 Prioritized Improvements Projects List · G
Project Requirements IDG Checklist · B.1
Proposed Land Use · 4.3

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-5

Q Legibility · 11.4.2.4
Simplicity · 11.4.2.1
Quality Standards for Family Housing · 8.15.2.2 Visibility · 11.4.2.3
Site Amenities at Walkways · 9.12.5
Site Elements · 5.4.3.5, 5.4.4.5
R Site Elements Design · 11
Army Standards · 11.7
Range Standards · 8.15.7 Furnishings · 11.3
Rating Standard · 1.9.3.2 Bicycle Racks · 11.3.11
Real Property Planning Board · 1.8.1.3, 1.8.1.4 Bollards · 11.3.13
Real Property Utilization · 8.13.4.1 Drinking Fountains · 11.3.17
Recommendations · 5.4.5 Flagpoles · 11.3.9
Buildings · 5.4.5.2 Kiosks · 11.3.6
Circulation · 5.4.5.3 Mailboxes · 11.3.15
Force Protection · 5.4.5.6 Military Equipment Static Displays ·
Plant Material · 5.4.5.4 11.3.16
Site Elements · 5.4.5.5 Monuments/Memorials · 11.3.16
Site Planning · 5.4.5.1 Planters · 11.3.10
Regional Setting · 4.1.1 Playgrounds/Tot Lots · 11.3.14
Renovations and Additions · 8.10 Seating · 11.3.3
Roadway Hierarchy · 9.3 Shelters · 11.3.5
Cul-De-Sacs · 9.3.1.5 Tables · 11.3.3.3
Highways · 9.3.1.1 Telephone Booths · 11.3.4
Primary Roadways · 9.3.1.2 Trash Receptacles · 11.3.8
Secondary Roadways · 9.3.1.3 Tree Grates · 11.3.12
Tactical Vehicle Trails · 9.3.1.6 Walls and Fences · 11.3.7
Tertiary Roadways · 9.3.1.4 Introduction · 11.1
Roadway System Design · 9.5 Lighting · 11.5
Responsibilities · ES.4, 1.8 Lamp Characteristics · 11.5.9
Fluorescent · 11.5.9.4
S High Pressure Sodium · 11.5.9.2
Incandescent · 11.5.9.1
Sale and Outlease of Army Assets · 8.17 Low Pressure Sodium · 11.5.9.3
Scale · 3.4, 8.3.3.1 Mercury Vapor · 11.5.9.6
Secondary Road · 5.4.2 Metal Halide · 11.5.9.5
Secondary Roadways · 9.3.1.3 Light Design Matrix · 11.5.4
Secretary Of The Interior’s Standards for the Light Fixtures · 11.5.6
Treatment of Historic Properties · 8.9.2 Bollard · 11.5.6.2.3
Seismic Evaluation · 8.7.2 Cutoff · 11.5.6.2.1
Seismic Policy · 8.7 Spotlighting · 11.5.6.2.4
Additions or Extension of Existing Facilities · Utility · 11.5.6.2.2
8.7.4 Wall-Mounted · 11.5.6.2.5
Exceptions to Seismic Evaluations · 8.7.3 Light Poles · 11.5.7
New Facilities · 8.7.4 Outdoor Architectural · 11.5.1
Seismic Evaluation · 8.7.2 Parking Lot · 11.5.1
Substantial Life-Safety · 8.7.1 Pedestrian · 11.5.1
Self-Help Projects · 2.4.4 Roadway · 11.5.1
Self-Help Projects Checklist · H Security · 11.5.1
Senior Mission Commander ES.4.4, 1.8.1.4 Signs · 11.4
Service Areas · 8.5, 9.10 Characteristics · 11.4.2
Signage · 3.5, 8.13.11.3, 11.4 Continuity · 11.4.2.2
Significant Vegetation · 5.4.2 Legibility · 11.4.2.4
Signs · 11.4 Simplicity · 11.4.2.1
Characteristics · 11.4.2 Visibility · 11.4.2.3
Continuity · 11.4.2.2 Electronic Exterior · 11.4.6
Location Maps · 11.4.10

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-6

 Placement · 11.4.7 Systems Furniture Design Guidelines ·
Reduce Visual Clutter · 11.4.9 8.13.11.1.4
Types · 11.4.5
Directional · 11.4.5.2 T
Information/Identification · 11.4.5.1
Regulatory · 11.4.5.3 Tactical Vehicle Trails · 9.3.1.6
Typography · 11.4.8 Telephone and Network Distribution System
Visual Hierarchy · 11.4.4 Design · 8.13.5.2.1
Vocabulary-Communications · 11.4.3 Terminus · 3.4
Objectives · 11.2 Tertiary Roadways · 9.3.1.4
References · 11.8 Texture · 3.4, 8.3.3.5
Utilities · 11.6 Theme/Zone Relationship · 5.2.2
Distribution Lines · 11.6.4 Topography · 4.1.3.1, 7.2.1.1
Overhead Transmission Lines · 11.6.3 Cut and Fill · 7.5.1.7
Substations and Transformers · 11.6.5 Elevations · 7.5.1.1
Sewer and Water · 11.6.6 Flat Terrain · 7.5.1.3
Storm Drainage · 11.6.7 Flood Plains · 7.5.1.6
Site Elements Design Component · 7.1.3 Ground Slopes · 7.5.1.1
Site Furnishings · 2.4.4 Natural Drainage Ways · 7.5.1.6
Site Planning · 5.4.3.1, 5.4.4.1, 7.1.1 Steep Slopes · 7.5.1.5
Site Planning Design Standards · 7 Tree Cover · 7.2.1.1
Natural Conditions · 7.5 Trees and Other Vegetation · 3.5
Climate · 7.5.3 Troop Movement Paths · 9.12.5
Hydrology · 7.5.2 Troop Running Trails · 9.12.5
Topography · 7.5.1
Vegetation · 7.5.5
Views and Vistas · 7.5.4 U
References · 7.8
Site Planning Considerations · 7.3 U. S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ·
Primary “Fit” · 7.3.1 7.3.3.1
Soils · 4.1.3.3 Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)
Solar Orientation · 7.2.1.2 · 7.3.2, 8.6.1
Solid Waste Management · 4.1.4.2 Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) · 2.1, 8.13.5.1.1,
Space Planning · 8.13.4 11.3.1
Standards, Army · 1.10, 7.7.1, 8.18, 9.14, 10.12, Unity · 3.4
11.7, 12.9, Q Using the Design Guide · 2.3
Standards and References · Q Utilities · 11.6
Statutory, Administrative, and Judicial Materials · Distribution Lines · 11.6.4
7.3.3.2 Overhead Transmission Lines · 11.6.3
Street Trees · 3.5 Sewer and Water · 11.6.6
Structural Character · 8.3 Storm Drainage · 11.6.7
Color · 8.3.3.4 Substations and Transformers · 11.6.5
Fenestration · 8.3.3.6 Utility Corridors · 3.5
Form · 8.3.3.3
Massing · 8.3.3.2 V
Materials · 8.3.3.6
Scale · 8.3.3.1 Vegetation · 4.1.3.6, 7.2.1.1
Texture · 8.3.3.5 Vehicle Circulation Design Standards · 9.1
Substantial Life-Safety · 8.7.1 Views and Vistas · 3.5, 7.5.4
Sustainability · 3.4 Visual Analysis Map · 5.4.2
Sustainable Design · D.1 Buffer · 5.4.2
Sustainable Design and Development Website · Circulation · 5.4.2
1.9.4 Focal Points · 5.4.2
Sustainable Project Rating Tool (SPiRiT) · 1.9.3, Good Views · 5.4.2
E
Sustainable Range Program (SRP) · 8.15.7.1

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-7

 Historical and/or Architecturally Significant
Features · 5.4.2
Main Entrance · 5.4.2
Open Space · 5.4.2
Primary Road · 5.4.2
Secondary Road · 5.4.2
Significant Vegetation · 5.4.2
Visual and Spatial Surveys · 2.2.1.2
Visual Character · 5.4.1
Visual Elements · 3.5
Activity Nodes · 3.5
Buildings and Structures · 3.5
Circulation System · 3.5
Edges and Boundaries · 3.5
Entrances and Gates · 3.5
Landmarks · 3.5
Natural Characteristics · 3.5
Open Spaces · 3.5
Other Elements · 3.5
Signage · 3.5
Street Trees · 3.5
Trees and Other Vegetation · 3.5
Utility Corridors · 3.5
Views and Vistas · 3.5
Visual Themes · 5.1
Visual Zone · 5.4
Assets · 5.4.3
Liabilities · 5.4.4
Recommendations · 5.4.5
Visual Analysis Map · 5.4.2
Visual Character - 5.4.1
Visual Zones · 5.3
Visual Zones and Themes · 2.2.1.2.1, 5

W
Walkway Network Hierarchy · 9.12.4
Primary Walkways · 9.12.4.1
Secondary Walkways · 9.12.4.2
Tertiary Walkways · 9.12.4.3
Walkways and Pedestrian Circulation · 9.12
Wetlands · 4.1.3.7, 7.3.3.2
Whole Building Design Guide · 1.9.4
Wildlife · 4.1.3.8
Wind · 7.2.1.2
Window Treatments · 8.13.11.2

X
Xeriscape · 10.5.2.11

Z
Zeroscape · 10.5.2.10

(Part 2) Model IDG Index Page-8